CGlPOKlsSiRMai 
 
CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
 
 THE GIFT OF 
 
 WATERMAN THOMAS HEWETT 
 
 PROFESSOR OF THE 
 GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 
 
3 1924 031 292 786 
 
 olin.anx 
 
The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031292786 
 
THE 
 
 TEACHER'S COMPANION 
 
 TO 
 
 THE GERMAN COURSE 
 
 BY 
 
 GEO. F. COMFOKT, A.}L, 
 
 FS07ESS0B OF MODSSN LANOTTAGEB AND .^STIIETIOS IS ALLEGUA27Y COLLEGB, 
 HSADVILLE, PA. 
 
 JSr£;W TOBK: 
 HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
 
 FBANKLtN BQTJAnB. 
 
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 18 69, by 
 
 HAEPEB& BkOTHEKS, 
 
 In the Clerk's Office "of the District Court of the United States for the 
 Southern District of New York. 
 
INTEODUCTION 
 
 TO THE 
 
 TEACHEH'S COMPANION. 
 
 To the comparaJtively inexperienced teacher, the following 
 suggestions with reference to methods of instruction in liv- 
 ing language, and especially with reference to the use of the 
 " German Course" may be of service : ■ 
 
 Cultivation of the It is necessary to keep in mind, from 
 ear and tongue. the very outset, that in learning a liv- 
 ing language especially, the cultivation of the ear and the 
 tongue are of as great importance as is the cultivation of the 
 eye.' In studying a language away from the country where 
 it is spoken, a person is apt to acquire a great facility in de- 
 tecting the meaning of a word or of a sentence upon seeing 
 it, while he would he perfectly bewildered upon hearing it 
 spoken. 
 
 Every plan, therefore, which ingenuity can suggest, should 
 be resorted to, that will induce the student to practice his 
 tongue and his ear. Thus he should be requested to read 
 each exercise aloud several times in his room before coming 
 to the recitation. Great variety may also be introduced 
 into the exercises of the class-room. Thus the teacher may 
 require the class to close their books while he reads sentences 
 from the lesson, and calls upon different members of the class 
 to give the English translation ; or a single student may 
 open his book and read sentences, while others will be called 
 upon to give the translation. Students may also be called 
 upon to go to the blackboard and there write off words or 
 sentences that are enunciated by the teacher, but which are 
 Tuew to the class. 
 
IV INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Pronunciation. A rapid, easy, and elegant pronunciation 
 is one of the most difficult, as it is usually one of the latest 
 attainments in the study of a living language. Great as are 
 the difficulties in the way- of acquiring a good pronunciation 
 away from the country where the language is spoken, they 
 are not all removed by going to the country itself. Thus, in 
 Germany, as in all other European lands, every province, and 
 almost every city and neighborhood, has its peculiar dialect 
 {see § 23 in the Gennceii Course). And the dialectic peculiar- 
 ities are apt to affect the pronunciation even of the educated 
 classes of the particular province. The usage at present pre- 
 vailing among the educated classes and in polite circles in 
 the city of Berlin is now admitted to be the standard of pro- 
 nunciation throughout all Germany. The rules given in the 
 German Course are in accordance with this usage (§ 42). 
 
 Provincial It may be well to put teachers upon their 
 Pronunciation, guard against what is sometimes the pro- 
 vincial pronunciation of even native Oerman teachers. It is 
 especially necessary to guard them against the bad pronun- 
 ciation, and also against the violations of grammatical rules, 
 and the "un-Gei-man" words and expressions that have 
 grown up among the descendants of the early German set- 
 tlers in different parts of the United States. 
 
 Sapidity A catching, haggling, and drawling style of 
 of enunciation, reading and pronouncing is one of the most 
 offensive habits that the student of language can fall into. 
 This can be prevented if proper care be taken at the outset. 
 The student should take a single sentence in the first lesson, 
 and should repeat it aloud a number of times (either by him- 
 self or in the class-room), until he can speak it as rapidly and 
 as easily as he can an English sentence. Before passing to 
 the second lesson, he should go over all the sentences of the 
 first lesson again, taking pains to suppress to the proper de- 
 gree all the unaccented syllables and the unimportant words 
 until he has secured precision and elegance of intonation. 
 Let the same care be taken with a few lessons, and the evil 
 habits alluded to will be effectually prevented. 
 
INTRODUCTION. V 
 
 The rules of pronunciation are given in outline in the first 
 and second lessons. When the class reaches the tenth or fif- 
 teenth lesson, it may be well for them to learn, or at least to 
 make frequent. references tq, the complete rules as given un- 
 der Orthogi-aphy in Part Second (page 240). • 
 
 German The German Current Hand, which varies 
 
 Current Hand, greatly from the English, is not presented 
 until the student has studied the language long enough for 
 his eye to become perfectly familiar with the German print- 
 ed type. 
 
 Additional It is of the utmost importance to anticipate 
 Sentences, or correct a mistake to which students who 
 receive set tasks are liable. They are apt to think that the 
 given sentences in each lesson include all the natural and le- 
 gitimate illustrations of the principles explained in the les- 
 ■ son, while the fact is that the number of possible sentences 
 that may be formed increases almost in geometrical progres- 
 sion with the addition of new rules and words. 
 
 To assist such teachers as may not have perfect confidence 
 in their ability to form accurate sentences, a number of sen- 
 tences are added in many of the lessons. As the sentences 
 in the " German Course" refer mostly to German history and 
 life, the additional sentences refer mostly to American proper 
 nanies and places. 
 
 Original It will add much to the interest and the profit 
 Sentences, of the class-room instruction if the students 
 themselves compose a few additional sentences at the end of 
 each lesson. This wiU be a most profitable exercise for those 
 students who by greater age, better previous* linguistic train- 
 ing, or greater genius for the study of language, are able to 
 go faster than the majority of the class. By this means the 
 .class will be kept together, and all will have enough to do. 
 It may be well, at the end of every fifth lesson, for the whole 
 class to be required to bring original sentences instead of tak- 
 ing a new lesson. 
 
 The new sentences should not contain any grammatical 
 
VI INTRODUCTION. 
 
 principles that have not been previously explained, and no 
 new words except proper names. The teacher may also, at 
 his discretion, announce orally new sentences in German and 
 
 English, and require the class to give the translation of them. 
 
 * 
 
 Notes to the Philological, historical, and explanatory notes 
 
 Lessons. are added to the key to the exercises of the 
 
 lessons of Part First. The teacher will he guided by his 
 
 judgment as to the propriety of using them or not with the 
 
 particular class that may be studying the " German Course." 
 
 German Newspapers After the class has advanced to the 
 and Books. twenty-fifth or the thirtieth lesson, a 
 
 new interest can be awakened by the teacher bringing into 
 the recitation-room copies of German newspapers, American 
 or foreign. The teacher can read in German the date of 
 cable or other telegraphic dispatches, or the date of deaths 
 and marriages, requiring the class to give the English trans- 
 lation. If the class shall be mature and advanced enough to 
 profit by it, the teacher can then select short sentences from 
 advertisements, notices, and items of news, giving himself the 
 translation and explanation of the sentences. He may also 
 read the title-page and short sentences from a book, or from 
 a letter, should he happen to receive one from a Gennan 
 friend. 
 
 The German All these exercises will assist to impress upon 
 a living the minds of the students the very important 
 Language, fact — and one that is too often lost sight of 
 in class instruction — that the German is a living language; 
 that it is equally well adapted with the English language to 
 express all the'facts, thoughts,- emotions, and necessities of 
 daily life and of modern civilization. This will give to the 
 earnest student an unusual zest in the study of the language ; 
 it will also often kindle an interest and even enthusiasm in 
 the minds of listless and backward students. 
 
 Books of For the sake of those who may desire to extend 
 reference, their study of the German language beyond the 
 
INTRODUCTION. Vll 
 
 limits that are possible in a single text-book, we append the 
 following list of the best books published in Germany, and 
 relating to the study of the German and its cognate lan- 
 guages. 
 
 1. German (xrammars. 
 
 TWr.Sgr.Pf. 
 
 Hetse, Leitfaden zum Unterricht in der deutschen Sprache — 10 — 
 
 " Deutsche Sclmlgrammatik 1 
 
 " Ausfiihrliehes Lesebueh der deutschen Sprache, 2 vols ... 10 
 
 Gtjkcke, die Hauptpunkte der deutschen Sprachlehre — 6 — 
 
 " Deutsche Sohulgrammatik .' — 12 — 
 
 E^EHKEIN, Schulgrammatik der deutschen Sprache — 35 — 
 
 Becker, Leitfaden fur den ersten Unterricht in der deutschen 
 
 Sprache — 10 — 
 
 " Schulgrammatik der deutschen Sprache, 1 Band 3 
 
 " Ausfuhrliche deutsche Grammatik als Kommentar zur 
 
 Schulgrammatik, 3 Bande ;.;..'.'. 5 
 
 WuEST, Practische Spraehdenklehre fiir Volksschulen und die 
 Elementarclassen der Gymnasial- und Kealschulen, 
 nach Becker's Ansichten ilber die Behandlung des Un- 
 
 terrichts in der Muttersprache hearbeitet 17 6 
 
 Jeitteles, Neuhochdeutsche Wortbildung, auf Grundlage der 
 
 historischen Grammatik — 20 — 
 
 Becker, Die deutscheWortbildung oder die organischeEntwicke- 
 
 lung der deutschen Sprache in der Ableitung 12 3 — 
 
 2. Dictionaries of Synonyms. 
 
 Eberhabd (1 Band 13mo), Synonjmisches Handworterbuch der 
 
 deutschen Sprache 4 
 
 " Maass & Gruber deutsche Synomymik, 3 Bande. ..... 3 
 
 " " deutsche Synomymik, 6 Bande 1 
 
 Abblmakh, Handworterbuch deutscher Synomyme zum Ge- • 
 
 branch fur Schule und Haus 1 10 — 
 
 3. Dictionaries of the German Language {in German). 
 
 Schmitthennbb, Kurzes deutsches Worterbuch iur Etymologie, 
 
 Synony mik una Orthographic 
 
 " Tollig umgearbeitet von Dr. F. L. K. Weigand. 6 20 — 
 
 Weber, Handworterbuch der deutschen Sprache, nebst den ge- 
 brauchlichsten Eremdwortern, Angabe der Betonung 
 
 und Aussprache, IBand, 8vo 3 15 — 
 
 Kaltschmidt, Taseheuworterbuch der deutschen Sprache, 1 Bd., 
 
 13mo ; :...;... 1 
 
 HoiTMANN, VoUstandiges Worterbuch der deutschen Sprache, 
 mit Angabe der Abstammung, der Eechtschrei- 
 bung, der Wortformen, etc., nebst einer guten 
 Sprachlehre, 6 Bande, 8vo 6 
 
viii INTEODDCTIOIT. 
 
 Sanders, ■Worterbuch der deutsclien Sprache, mit Belegen von 
 
 Luther bis auf die Gegenwart, 3 Bande, 4to 34 
 
 Geimm, Deutsehes Worterbucli, Bande I— IV, 3, V. 1—7 31 30 — 
 
 (flnislied nearly to tlie letter I and part of K.) 
 Hetse, Allgemelnes verdeutscliendes und erklarendes Fremd- 
 
 worterbncli 3 
 
 'N Petm, Gedrangtes Handbuch der Fremdworter in deutscber 3 6 — 
 Sohrift- und Umgangssprache .'. . . 
 
 KiESEWBTTER, Fremdworterbucb 1 35 — 
 
 4. German and English Dictiona/ries. 
 
 Feller, Neues engliseh und deutscbes Tascbenworterbuch, 3 
 
 Bande, 16mo (gebunden) 1 7 6 
 
 James, Worterbucb der engliscben und deutscben Sprache, IBd., 
 
 13mo(geb.) 1 35 — 
 
 Thieme, Vollstandiges Worterbucb der englischen und deutachen ' 
 
 Sprache, 1 Band, 8vo (geb.) 3 
 
 (The English-German is much larger than the Ger- 
 man-English part.) 
 
 Fluegel, Vollstandiges Worterbucb der englischen und deut- 
 scben Sprache, 3 Bande, 8vo 44 — — 
 
 HiLPEKT, "Worterbucb der englischen und deutscben Sprache, 3 
 
 Bande, 4to 8 
 
 Lucas, English-deutsches und deutsch-englisches Worterbueh, 4 
 
 Bande, 8ro 18 
 
 5. History oftlie German Language. 
 
 Davin, Geschichte der Sprache der Deutscben 1 15 — 
 
 Schleicher, Die deutsehe Sprache 3 
 
 Grimm, Geschichte der deutscben Sprache, 3 Bande 4 10 — 
 
 6. Comparative and Historical Grammars. 
 Hetne, Kurze Grammatik der altgermaniscben Sprachstamme . . 1 10 — 
 Kelle, Vergleichende Grammatik der germanischen Spracben, 
 
 Band 1 3 
 
 ScHADE, Paradigmen zur deutscben Grammatik, Gothisch, Alt- 
 
 bocbd'eutsch, Mittelhochdeutsch, Neuhochdeutsch ... — 13 — 
 Stamm, Ulflla, Oder die uns erhaltenen Denkmaler der gothischen 
 
 Sprache (Text, Grammatik und Worterbucb) — 30 — 
 
 Westphal, Philosophisch-historische Grammatik der deutscben 
 
 Sprache 3 
 
 BuHSE,Intemationale(franz6siseh-englisch-spanisch-italienische) 
 
 Grammatik fur Deutsche, 3 Bande, 8vo 10 
 
 Schleicher, Compendium der vergleichenden Grammatik der 
 
INTEODUCTION. IX 
 
 Bopp, Vergleichende Grammatik der indo-gei-manisclien Sprachen 15 
 
 Gkimm, Deutsche Grammatik, 4 Biinde, 8vo 20 
 
 7. Periodicals. 
 Gekmania, Vierteljahrsschrift fur deutsclie Altertlinmskunde, 
 
 herausgegeben von F. Pfeifer, Wien (quarterly) ... 3 
 
 Zeitscbbift fur deutsclies Alterthum, herausgegeben von M. 
 
 Hanft, Berlin (three numbers a year) 3 
 
 Zeitscheitt filr deutscbe Philologie, herausgegeben von E. Hopf- 
 
 nerundj. Zacher (quarterly) 3 
 
 Rem. The follomng are among the leading importers of German books in 
 New York City. Packages are received by them every week by steamers 
 from Hamburg and Bremen. 
 
 L. Schmidt, 24 Barclay -Sfc, New York. 
 
 B. WESTEKMANif, 471 Broadway, New York. 
 
 F. W. Chkisieen, 77 University Place, New York. 
 
 E. Steigek, 22 Frankfort St., New York. 
 Usually six weeks are required for books to be received from Germany, in 
 reply to orders sent out from New York. In importing books the Prussian 
 thaler is now (1869) reckoned as equal to a doUar and ten cents in gold. 
 The price will vaiy from time to time according to the price of gold and the 
 import duty on books. The import duty (at present twenty-five per cent.) is 
 remitted upon the books imported for colleges and other schools. The pub- 
 lishing houses above mentioned have also extensive catalogues of works in 
 all branches of phUology, which will be of great service in assisting teachers 
 to order the latest and best works upon the philology of the German or its 
 cognate languages. 
 
 In Conclusion,' the author commits to the teachers of the 
 German language this companion to the " German Course" 
 in the hope that its suggestions may prove to be of some 
 service, especially to those who are commencing their career' 
 as instructors of the German language. A word of caution 
 may, however, not be out of place. The method of instruc- 
 tion that should be adopted in a given case must depend 
 largely upon the age, the character, and the attainments of 
 the students, and also upon the length of time they purpose 
 devoting to the study of the language. Nor should the 
 teacher be so bound down to the method proposed, nor to 
 any other method, as to lose his individuality of character. 
 WJien instruction becomes routine-work and enthusiasm dies 
 out of the heart of the teacher, the scholar will soon lose his 
 interest, and the study will lose much of its value. 
 
I. KEY TO THE EXERCISES 
 
 OF THE LESSONS IN PART FIRST, 
 
 WITH PUILOLOGIOAL AHD EXPLANATORY NOTES. 
 
 ©rftc Scftion. 
 
 The first lesson upon pronunciation contains no sounds that do not occur 
 in the English language. 
 
 Upon examining the words in the first column of Exercise 1, the student 
 will usually be able to identify a part and sometimes all of the letters in the 
 words, and thus he will ascertain just where he needs assistance in learning 
 the German alphabet. 
 
 In all the exercises upon pronunciation, in the first and second lessons, 
 the student is called upon to pronounce only words of winch he knows the 
 signification. Thus the attention is not diverted from the object of the ex- 
 ercises,, which is to train the eye, tJie tongue, and the ear, by natural, but pain- 
 ful, because fruitless efforts to grasp the meaning of the words that are being 
 pronounced. 
 
 It will be well to have the student spdl a number of words in each of the 
 exercises of the first two lessons. 
 
 Btoeite Seftion. 
 
 This lesson contains the umlauts a.n6L gutturals, sounds that do not exist in 
 the English language. The student can acquire a correct pronunciation of 
 these sounds only .from the livijgi teacher. 
 
 (3, 1.) Care must be taken to avoid giving the sound of g after tig, as in 
 fin':gcn, Sing'scr, Sing' sen, ^ung'scr (hunger). 
 
 2)rtttc Mtiort, 
 Exercise 5. 
 
 1. Where are Mr. Reinhart and Mr. Menzel ? 2. Mr. Eeinhart is in Berlin,- 
 and Mr. Menzel is in Potsdam. 3. Were you in Cologne yesterday ? 4. No, I 
 was in Frankfort yesterday. 5. Is Mrs. Neumann in Berlin to-day ? 6. Yes, 
 she is in Berlin. 7. Is Miss Neumann also in Berlin ? 8. No, she is in Dres- 
 den to-day. 9. Where is the booli ? 10. Here it is. 11. The weather is very 
 warm now. 13. Day before yesterday it was very cold. 13. Yesterday we 
 were in Potsdam. .14. Potsdam and Magdeburg are in Prussia. ' 15. Prussia, 
 
12 teacher's companion, 
 
 notes to lesson iii. 
 
 It will add much to the interest of the recitation, and will serve to fix the 
 sentences in the minds of the students, if the teacher will occasionally in- 
 troduce historical and geographical remarks with reference to the persons 
 and places spoken of in the exercises. Thus : 
 
 1. Germany is situated in the centre of Europe. It has 245,000 squal-e 
 miles, being somewhat larger than Texas. It has (1869) ahout 50,000,000 in- 
 habitants, having a larger population than any other European country ex- 
 cept Bussia. 
 
 3. Berlin has ahout 750,000 inhabitants. It is nearly in the geographical 
 centre of Europe. It is in the latitude of southern Labrador and Kamtschat- 
 ka. It is growing as rapidly in population and wealth as any city in America. 
 
 3. Tolsdam is sixteen miles from Berlin, is an unimportant city in itself, 
 but is surrounded by royal parks of immense extent and of great magnifi- 
 cence. They contain many fine palaces, which are the summer residences of 
 the dififerent members of the Prussian royal family. 
 
 4.'^he German word fibln, and the French and English word Cologne, are 
 derived from the Latin word Colonia. The Romans gave the city the name 
 of Colonia Agrippina, in honor of Agrippina, the mother of Nero, who settled 
 here a large Roman colony. 
 
 5. Sadm takes its name from its fanious baths or springs of mineral waters. 
 
 Sei^fte ?tufflaSc. 
 1. SBo ifl §£vt Hoffmann I)e«te ? 2. Et ifl :^eutE in SWagbcBurg. 3. SGBatin mx et 
 in Scrlin ? i. ®t v>ox sotgeficttt in Serlin. 5. gran ScJct unb gvciulein Sffieict 
 finb je^t in gtan!furt. 6. ©ejlem i»atm fte in ifbln. 7. 2)a« SBetter ijl ^eute Wt. 
 8. ®c|i«n WOT eS fel)t WOTm. 9. Wo tjl ba« Suc^ ? 10. ■&icr ijl _e«. 11. Sii baa 
 Suil BiHig ? 12. 3«, c3 i^ fel)r MHig- 13- 3P §«« 3»e?i;vI)Eim noc^ in ^iiln ? 14. 
 3a, cr ip no* ba. 15. 3|1 SBreSlau in Spteupen ? 16. 3a, Sve«Iau, unb an* SKagbe^ 
 teg, Scvlin unb Obttingen flnb jcfet in ^Jteugcn. 17. .gienr Sieg ifl icftt in ^aKt. 
 18. §evr SEBeier ijl in gtantfnrt. 19. ©efiern war id) in CciMig unb in ^aHe. 
 
 Additional Seii,^ces. 
 1. .^err a)crfina t|l $cutc in SI)ica3i). 2, SBm warcn ©ie in ffluffato ? 3. 2Btt 
 luaren sjorgefttrn in Suffalo. 4. ©rau SBogera uttb gviiutein SHoflcvg finb '^cute in 
 mimij. 5..§crt SBavvcn unb feit 9>attet fmb nic^t pt, fie ftnb ^eutc in 5ieW»g)ort. 
 6. 3(^ war sorgcficrn in pilabeWa. 
 
 mtxtt Scltion. 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 
 1. Where does Mr. Schuhmann reside ? 2. He resides now in Frankfort. 3. 
 He resided formerly in Heidelberg. 4. Do yon reside in Halle ? 5. No, we 
 do not reside in Halle ; we reside in Leipsio. 6. Did you buy the cloth ? 7. 
 No, I did not buy it ; it was very dear, and not very good. 8. Does the schol- 
 ar hear what the teacher is saying? 9. Yes, the scholar hears what the 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 13 
 
 teacher says. 10. The merchant heard what the tailor said. 11. Did you 
 hear wliat Henry and William said ? 13. Yes, I heard what they said. 13. 
 The father and the mother love the child. 14. The child loves the father 
 and the mother. 15. Where did you buy the book? 16. 1 bought it day be- 
 fore yesterday in Leipzic. 17. The scholar bought the book and the paper. 
 18. When were you in Augsburg ? 19. 1 was in Augsburg day before yester- 
 day. 20. Mr. Meyerheim, Mr. Rosenthal, and Mr. Ehrlich reside in Cologne, 
 Mr. Schleiermacher and Mr. Auerbach reside in Magdeburg, Mrs. Forster and 
 Miss Eggers reside in Gotha, and Mr. Biudemann resides in Munich. 
 
 NOTES TO LESSOK IV. 
 
 1. Particular care is necessary at the outset in the translation of is, are, do, 
 did, etc. When they are auxiliaries in tlie progressive, or emphatic forms 
 of conjugating the verb, they are not to be translated separately {see Lesson 
 IV., 3). 
 
 2. The En^lfeh proper name, Mr. Snyder, Is of Teutonic origin, correspond- 
 ing to Mr. Taylor, which is of French origin. 
 
 3. Magdeburg is about eighty miles west of Berlin, has 80,000 inhabitants, 
 is one of the most strongly fortified places in Germany, was almost totally 
 destroyed by Tilly (in 1639) during the Thirty Years' War. The cathedral is 
 one of the most beautiful in Germany. Otto Guericke, mayor of the city, 
 invented the air-pumj} here in 1595. The original "hemispheres'.' which he 
 used are now preserved in the Museum in Berlin. Lafayette was Imprisoned 
 in the citadel of Magdeburg in 1797.- 
 
 4. The word !)Sopicr was first introduced into the German language in the 
 fourteenth century. Paper was not made in England till 1588 ; it was made 
 in Germany as early as 1390 ; in Italy before 1300 ; in France about 1360 ; in 
 Spain, by the Moors, in the ninth century. The word is derived from the 
 Greek ■jroirupos. It is probable, though not certain, that the word S>5ppici: 
 came through the French into the German language. 
 
 %m SlttfgaSe. 
 
 1. S5cr Se'^rer lott ben ©i^Mer. 2. Set Satet lott iag fiinij. 3. Iiorten <Bie, !»«? 
 ^einrtc^ fagte ? 4. ?Jetn, i($ ^^orte nic^t, wag ev fagte. 5. SBit prtcn, »aa ev fagte. 
 6. •56rlc er ntc^f, xoai ber Septet fagte ? 7. 3a, ev '^iivte, ttaS ber Se'^rer fagte. 8. 2)er 
 Saufmann laufte ba^ SEu^. 9. Sic %tm Io6tc ba« itinb. lo. 25«a Bmi IteBt bie 
 Srau. 11. SBo lauften ©ie baS Sud^ ? 12. 3i% fttufte ea in Serltn. 13. SBann 
 lauftcn Sie ti 1 14. 3c^ laufte cS sorgejlctn. 15. $6rcn ©te, was graulcin ©teffen^ 
 fflgt ? 16. 3c^ '^Bre, »«« fte fagt. 17. SBo wo^nt Srauletn ©teffen? ? 18. ©ic iso^nt 
 jejt ^ier iit^erlin. 19, gtiJI)ct ttjo^nte (te in ■^(imButg. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. ^iircn ©te, tta3 ^ert SRoMnfon fagt? 2. .3a, i^ IjBve, wa^ er fagt. 3. |)iirten 
 ©ie, iD&i Stan Stnberfon fagte ? 4. 3(% I)iitte ni(|t, was pE fagte. 5. §ax SBtig'^t 
 woljnt Mt in Salttmore. 6. SBo tuo'^nt |>etr Sljonrnfon 1 1. ®r iro'^nt Jc^t in 8Itc^= 
 monb^ifritjet tto'^nte er in ©asanna^. a, Set ©^neibcr fauft ba« ZniS^. 9. Ser 
 ^aufmann laufte ba3 %v.&). lo. Set Ce^tet lott ben ©c^itlcr, unb bet ©i|Met XvAi 
 
14 teachee's companion. 
 
 gunfte 2e!tiott. 
 Exercise 9. 
 
 1. Who has the book? 2. 1 have not it (I hav'n't it); John had it when 
 he was here. 3. What have you there ? 4. We have the hook and the paper. 
 5. Mr. Schade visited us very often when we were in Gotha. 6. Mr. Hofi&nann 
 Is visiting Mr. Ritter. 7. What are you looking for ? 8. 1 am looking for 
 the knife. 9. Here it is. I have it. 10. What did the cook buy ? 11. He 
 bought bread, meat, and fruit. 12. The room is; too small. 13. The carpen- 
 ter sold the house. 14. The merchant bought the house. 15. Where did 
 Henry Neumann study, when he was in Germany ? 16. He studied in Leip- 
 sic and Berlin. 17. Does Mr. Niedner reside in Gotha? 18. No, he resides 
 in DresdenJ but he resided formerly in Gotha. 
 
 NOTES TO LESSON V. 
 
 1. The English words flesh and meat are both rendered in^ German by 
 Sleifd). The original word (01d-German^to(;,/(Ks<;) seems to have signified 
 "fat meaV The Swedish "jftasfc" and Danisli "flesk" now signify "pork." 
 
 2. astubirctt (like the English stad^, Erench etudier, ftalian stucliare) is from 
 the Latin studere. It was first introduced into the German language during 
 the twelfth century. 
 
 3. We deem itbest to give in the first few lessons only the customary form 
 of address in the second person of the personal pronoun (2Sic). A little later 
 the grammatical forms bxx, H)t, will be given, together with the rules that 
 govern their use. 
 
 3cl)nte StufpSc. 
 
 1. SSettoufte icr flaufmann i)«3 Sud^ ? 2. 3«, unb tet ©i^netber faufte c3. s. ©ct 
 ffldcEev fauft SDte'^I unb serlauft ©rob. i. SEBo iJubivtcilCprtm ©icj, «W tr in 23cutf^= 
 lanb tear? sTSt fiubtvte in ^cibctterg unb Scrim. 6. SSefuc^ten ©ie %x<m $off= 
 mam, aU ©ie in 3)?agbeJurg wmml 1. 3a, Wit befuc^tcn (le. 8. Sa3 fuc^cn §em= 
 vic^ unb aBm)eIm? 9. Sie fu^m ba« Suet). 10. Sa iji e«. 11. ®er ©c^iilet tfl 
 :^eufe jc'^r flctptg. Sutteilen ip cv ntc&t fe^r flei^ig, unb cr fiubivt nicSrt fe'^t" Did. 12. 
 3|t btii SBcttet fe'^r :^eip in S>eutWIanb ? 13. SJein, in S5cutf(i^tanb t|l iai.SBettex fcl= 
 ten je^r $cti, dbtt in 3talicn i|l e« oft fe^r ^cig. 14. Setltn ifJ fe^r grop unb fc|on. 
 15. aSJer I)ftt baS S«c^ unb baS 3)at)ter ? 16. 2)er ©filler ^ftt e8. 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. ^m Eolton laufte ba3 ZkSj. 2I Set ©c^iilev Iduft b«« 3>a()i«. 3. fBai fu^t ber 
 StUjI 4. Et fuc^t bas SKeffer. 5. S)«« $«u3 i|l fe^r Itcin. 6. S5a« Simmer ifinic^t 
 fc'^r ixo^. 7. Iierr Zxp\>(M fauftc ba3 SBu^ di cr in 5?ew=g)orI mt. '\ SBil^cIm 
 ©te()^cn« ilubirt in SKiin^en. 
 
 ©e^fte Scltion. 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 1. Mr. Blumenbach had already bought the house. 3. Charles says that he 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 
 
 15 
 
 day. 4. It rained very hard yesterday -when we were in Potsdam. 5. Mr. 
 Becker had already finished the painting day before yesterday. 6. He was 
 painting It when we visited him. 7. What is the child doing? 8. It is play- 
 ing. 9, Is it snowing no w ? 10. No, it has snowed much to-day, hut, it is 
 not snowing now (any more). 11. Did you visit the Museum often when you 
 were in Berlin ? 13. Tes, we visited it very often. 13. It is really very large 
 and beautiful. 14. The Museum in Dresden also is very beautiful. 15. The 
 carpenter had built the house. 16. The house is really very large, but it is 
 (certainly) not very beautiful! 
 
 NOTES TO LESSON VI. 
 1. It may be well to draw the attention to the vocal differences between 
 words of the same origin in the German and English languages, such as : 
 1. Consonantal Variations: 
 
 S for t. 
 
 t for a. 
 
 t (or b) for th. 
 
 d) for k. 
 
 KAi, what. 
 
 gut, 
 
 good. 
 
 aSater, father. 
 
 SSuSj, book. 
 
 e«, it. 
 
 lalt, 
 
 cold. 
 
 SKutter, mother. 
 
 Sed), cook. 
 
 t>ap, that. 
 
 feltett. 
 
 seldom. 
 
 'iSBetter, weather 
 
 fu^cn, seek. 
 
 gtoi great. 
 
 uni). 
 
 and. " 
 
 Sonner, thunder. 
 
 ntac^cit, make. 
 
 Ul hot. 
 
 Sroi), 
 
 bread. 
 
 .bcr, the. 
 
 ©ai^fcn, Saxony. 
 
 (UcJt, loves.) 
 
 mi, 
 
 child. 
 
 baf, that. 
 
 m . (I). 
 
 3. Vowel Varia 
 
 tions : 
 
 
 
 
 itie^r, more. 
 
 ©driller, scholar. 
 
 mai|en, make. 
 
 war, was. 
 
 nein, no. 
 
 nt*t, 
 
 not. 
 
 fagett, say. 
 
 ttJO, who. 
 
 fc&neicn, snow. 
 
 m. 
 
 hot. • 
 
 ■^aBEltt, hail. 
 
 wann, when. 
 
 lalt, cold. 
 
 ssii, 
 
 what. 
 
 8V0§, great. 
 
 id, there. 
 
 Stoiitfte Slufgofie. 
 
 1. E3 regnete Wr jiavt, al8 «3tt im SBJufeum njareti. 2. §m tRafixtiji fagt, bag ea 
 ge-fJcvti in Statiben^urg gefc^neit Jat. ■■ s. ■&tec Tjni ea mdj tiid^t geWneit. 4. txx Roi) 
 ^at m Srob; ba« 3«eil unb m Sleifi^' fftun getauft. 5. Ser Saufmann :^at baS 
 Suc^ «o^ nic^t scrfauft. 6. Titx 'SKalet Ijatte ba« ®cmdlbe mdj mc^t soUenbet, aW wir 
 in SZagbrtutg warm. 7. Severn ^atte Solann ba« SBaS) no* nii$t grtauft. 8. £« 
 $at fc^on fe^r tange geregnet. 9. SBaa ntai^t Sill)clin? 10. ffir i|i mc^'^ier.' 11. 
 SBo iil er? -12. (£t iefu^t $mn Stnbemann. IS. S>aa itinb ^at f^on ju.langege- 
 fOiett. 14. aUann 5a6en .Ste.ba« ©cmabe gelauft ? 15. SBtr tauftcn cS (or wit ^a= 
 ten ti gelauft), al« wir in ©crlin warcn. 16. & ifi wirllii^ fejt fcfebn. 17. #aiert 
 ®ie gePrt, wa3 §erir 5(?iebnet fagte? ' is. SiJein, iiSj Ijdbt ni^t gcprt, Kdi ev fagte. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. ea :^at IcHtE fe^t flati geregnet, al« Wir in 3JeW=S)i)r! waren. 2. Sann ^aien 
 @ie ba« Sttc^ gelauft? 3. 3c^ '^aie c« sorgeflern in pitobelrtia grtauft. 4. $a6en 
 ©ie ge^6tt, waS •5ert Elarle fagte ? 6. Slein, id) fjoit eS ni^t ge'^iirt. 6. Ser Sauf= 
 mann'^atte ba8 a:uc^ fi^on »or8eflern gelauft. 7. 2Bo ifi ^einric^ ? 8. ffir iefucit 
 ^errn EatDenter. 9. §err Suncan '^atte ba« ©emdlbe noc^ nii|t gelauft, ate Wir in 
 
16 teachbe's companion. 
 
 <Bitbmtt Scftion. 
 Exercise 13. 
 
 1. Has Albert bought the haf ? 3. No, it Is too- large for him. 3. Have 
 you the ribbon ? 4. No, it is around (on) the hat. 5. Have you the pencil ? 
 6. 1 have had it,' but I have not it now (haven't it now). 7. Oh, there it is. 
 8. The night is very warm and beautiful, but also very dark. 9. The church 
 is very large, but it is (really) not very beautiful. 10. Has the cook got (been 
 to get) the butter? 11. Yes, he got it yesterday. 12. Has the scholar the 
 book and the paper ? 13. Yes, he has them. 14. Has Mary bought the bon- 
 net? 15. Yes, she has bought it. 16. .For whom have you bought the book? 
 17. 1 have bought it for the child. 18. Yesterday it was very warm tm to- 
 wards evening, but the night was quite (or pretty) cold. 19. This morning 
 Mr. Neumann conducted (took) us through the Museum. 30. The coat is 
 not for me. 21. "Without doubt (doubtless) it is for Mr. Becker. 
 
 NOTES. 
 1. The Germans use „fd)on" in many cases where the English idiom does 
 not permit the use of already (see sentences 10, 11 above, and sentences 8, 9, 
 10 below). The too frequent use of already is indeed a marked feature in 
 the conversation of Germans when speaking English. Thus they say : " Have 
 you already been in Berlin ?" 
 
 3. It is best for the student at first to learn the gender of such nouns as 
 are neuter in English individually. The rules, when given later, will serve 
 their true purpose, as plans of classification by gender of words, with which the 
 learner u already acquainted. 
 
 3. Many valuable hints with reference to the syntax and the idiomatic 
 construction of foreign languages can be gathered by observing the errors 
 foreigners make In.speaking English. Thus one often hears from Germans 
 who have as yet acquired but an imperfect knowledge of the English lan- 
 guage, such Germanisms as the following : 
 
 " "Where is the letter?" " I have put him in my pocket." 
 
 "Have you bought the book?" "Yes, I bought it yesterday already." 
 
 aSicrje^ttte Slufgafic. 
 
 1. %m am x\i bn SJoiJ ? 2. (£x i|J fiir mic^. s. 3fl er nic^t fiir ©it ju grog ? 4. 
 Et tfJ stemlit^ grop. 5. SBatin I)at ^ot^atitw irnS Su§ getauft ? 6. ©ie laufte e«, al« 
 fte in S)te«i>m tsar. 7. D^ne Sweifel ^at $ctr ®|rttc^ i)«3 Oemcittie fc^on gelauft. 8. 
 3(t, Wixti}t fagt, bap er ti fcljon BefJcrn gcfauft I)«t. 9. $«t bcr SioS) We Suttci: unb 
 bflS D6|l fc^on ge^olt? 10. Sci, er 5«t ^i \i)m $EUte SBJorgen ge^cft. 11. Set Siigcr 
 :^at un« bur$ ben SBalb gefii^tt. 12. ^«ien ©ie ben Steij^ift? -13. Sa, i^-^aSe i^rt 
 fc^on. 14. Set ^iiget ifl fetjt jieil, «kt fe^t Ijo^ ip et tiic^t. 15. ^at 3J?9tie ben §«t 
 filon getauft? 16. 3«, ^ieljat i^n gctauft. 17. gtciutein Jteumamt fagt, bop e8 :^cute 
 gegen 3ffienb fe'^t warm wat, «6et fie fagt, bap e8 mi|t getegnet 5at. 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. |iert Suttia fflgt, bap eS gejietn Sl6tnb in 3)ttt86Htg fe'^t fl«I getegnet $at. 2. 
 SBo 1«Jcn ©ie ben §ut gef auft ? 3. Sd) '^aSe tt)n »otge|letn in ©t. CouiS ge!«uft. 4. 
 
KEY TO THE FIEST PAET. 17 
 
 2l(^te geltion. 
 Exercise 15. 
 
 1. Where were yoii during the war in Germany ? 2. We were in Leipsic. 
 ^. Mr. Weber and Mr. Kraft were in Potsdam during the storm. 4. Why did 
 not Mr. Schultz buy the house ? 5. On account of the price. 6. The house 
 is very fine and convenient, but the price is much too high. 7. The house of 
 Professor Meyerheim is outside of the city (many cities in Germany being 
 inclosed within walls). 8. The heart of the mother is full of anxiety be- 
 cause the child is so sick. 9. The roof of the house is very steep. 10. The 
 history ofrthe city is very interesting. 11. The tower of'Hihe church is high 
 and imposing. 13. The spire (literally the point) of the tower of the cathe- 
 dral in Vienna is very high and also very beautiful. 13. What book has 
 George ? 14. He has Henry's book. 15. Catharine has Mary's book. 16. 
 The teacher has the scholar's book (or the book of the scholar). 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. Many European cities are surrounded with walls. Often only these 
 walls separate cities from important suburbs. 
 
 2. The Word „®om" is from the Latin domus. The German has taken 
 the word from the French. It refers to the entire edifice of a cathedral 
 chm'ch, whereas the English word dome refers only to the cupola. 
 
 3. The word „5prct8" is from the Latin pretium (a price). 
 
 4. The word „!E^urttl" is from the Latin turris (a tower). 
 
 5. It may be well to call the attention of the student occasionally to the ob- 
 seiTation in Lesson I., 4, Itetn. 3, and to § 43 in the Compound of German 
 Grammar in Part III. 
 
 The plan foEowed by many Gennan grammarians, and which we adopt, 
 of separating the terminations and prefixes from the stems of the words in 
 paradigms, has great advantage in presenting clearly to the eye the additions 
 which words take on by inflection. But the student will need to be guarded 
 against pronouncing with the preceding a single consonant ^vihich occurs be- 
 tween two vowels (§ 43, 1 , and Rem.). The prjjper division of syllables in pro- 
 nunciation has been fully illustrated in the Exercises of Lessons I. , II. , and III. 
 
 6. The attention of the student should also be frequently called to the fact 
 that, in German Grammar, the term long, as applied to a vowel sound, does 
 not have reference simply to the quality of sound (as a term is at present 
 used by English grammarians), but that it has reference also to the prolonga- 
 tion of the vowel sound. 
 
 Thus there is no diiference in the duration of the sound of the vowel in 
 the words rain, ran; pace, pass; feel, fill; dole, dSll; while the duration 
 of the vowel sound is sensibly longer in the above words than in the words 
 stated, tatters, cake, cackle; Peter, better; dote, dSt. 
 
 In German all long vowel sounds sues prolonged. Thus, compare the words 
 5!3a'»tev, a'=6ev, 5Wa''4er, Srie'=ge«, $rei'»fe8, §ait'4eg, tt)a»rum', §ut, Sa- 
 t^a«rt'»:to, with the words SKann, aHon'^neS, Sin'^ijeS, ®of 4or8, ©tabt. 
 
 1. §ctt 2)ofti)v giicbrtil tto^nt nupcv^att bet ©tabt. 2. S)a3 $ctuS beg $etvtt 9)ro= 
 fcffot Cmbetier lie«t au§er6att ber ©tabt. 3. SBeffen Suft Ijate ift? 4. ©ie Sabett 
 
18 teacher's companion. 
 
 ^Etnrit^'S SniS). 5. £)ie ®eWi$te ie« SticgeS in Seutf^lanb ip fC^t intcrcffant. 6. 
 titx ^vxm ici tnmti in ^xtiima, tjl fe^r impofant. 7. 2)er 3>tei« bc^ Su^ea tfl ju 
 ^iS); iS) '^o.U ei titc^t getauft (or tc^ laujte e8 tiic^t). 8. SBatcn ©ie in 2)eutf^I«nb 
 walrmb beS JfttegeS ? 9. 3* trir waten in 9)veupen. 10. 23«a Dai^ bet ifitc^e tjl 
 JU fieit. 11. Sie ©pi^e ber JEir^e iji fe'^r fdjiin. 12. 2B«rum $a6en ©ie ben SRod 
 ni^t gelauft? 13. SBegen bea 9)wife«i er war Did su teener. 14. SBfi^tenb bet VlaSjt 
 |ttt ea siemli^ fiail getegnet. 15. 33et SoJet tfl son Slngfl, ttetl btt* Sinb fe^t ftttut i|l. 
 16. aso ijl'3«Mien3 Sleiflift ? 17. Sot^otina :^at ijn. 18. SWatie :§at flftt^attnaS fflud^. 
 Additional Sentences. 
 1. Sfi .^ettn Softot ©uncan? §mS aupet^ttlfi bet ©tabt? 2. 3a, ea Ifl aupet^alS 
 bet ©tabt. 3. S>ie ©e^ic^te iti Sticge? tfl fe$t inteteffant. 4. SBaten ©ie in 3ta= 
 lien nia^tcnb be« ffiriegcS? 5. 3«- wit t»«ten in SRom. 6. Set 95tci3 bicfeS luc^e^ 
 ill niiljt su ^0$, aJet ba« ZnH) ifl nic&t Won. 7. SBet ^at SBit^elma Suc^ ? 8. 3^ 
 ^(At ei nic^t, So^ann '^at ei. 9. ©ett Somjjfon Ijat u«« »on bet Sibliot^ef na$ bem 
 2)om gefit^tt. 
 
 SWeunte Seition. 
 Exercise 17. 
 
 1. To whom does the pencil belong? 2. It belongs to the painter. 3. Mr. 
 Ruprecht has sent the cook to the city (to town). 4. The father has presented 
 the hook to the child (or has presented the child with the book). 5. Mr. 
 Bergmann has shown the painting to the painter (or has shown the painter 
 the painting). 6. Mr. Bernhard resides outside of the city. 7. The Libraiy is 
 opposite the Museum (or opposite to the Museum). 8. The house of Professor 
 Eberhard is very similar to the house of Mr. Leutner (or resembles the house 
 of Mr. Tjcutner very much). 9. To whom does the newspaper (or paper) be- 
 long? 10. It belongs to Mr. Klein. 11. Where is Henry? ,12., He is at 
 home. 13. We have sent the book home. 14. The book was very service- 
 able to him. 16. Mr. Viebahn is from Dresden. 16. The child plays (or is 
 playing) with the dog. 17. George conducted (or guided, or took) us from 
 the Museum to the Library. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. The English word hound is used in a specific sense, the corresponding 
 German word, iet $unb, in a generic sense. 
 
 2. The word £nabe is of the same origin as the English word knave (An- 
 glo-Saxon cndpe). In English the word has meant successively boy, servant, 
 bad servant, knave. It was used by Shakspeare m both significations — of 
 boi/ and knave. 
 
 3. The word Solfcat' came into the German language in the sixteenth 
 century. . Like the English word soldier, it is from the Prench soldat (Italian 
 solddto, Spanish soldddo). 
 
 The Low-Latin soldus (from Latin solidus) was a name applied to several 
 gold and silver coins of different value. Fi-om this was formed the Low- 
 Latin verb soliddre=to pay. The participle soliddtus, contracted solddtus, 
 was used as a Tionn. and was a.ntilip.d to MrpA mnrt^nvR. 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PAET. 10 
 
 4. The word Sibliotljcl' is from the French hihliothique, which is from 
 the Latin libliotMca, and this frorai the Greels /Si/SXioSijinj. 
 
 5. The German folgcn and the English follow (Anglo-Saxon /oZ^'jan) are 
 from the same root. 
 
 6. For the position of the dative and accusative cases of nouns, see also 
 § 279, Rem. 2. 
 
 Stcfttjcljitte aiufflak. 
 
 l.aiJem ge'^iirt baS |iaua? 2. e« gepttfcrrn ©c^umann. z.^'iytit bet jtnate, 
 waa bet ©olbat fagte ? 4. 2Ba« fdjiitte ber Saufmann bem ©li^neibcr ? 5. ®t f^tiite 
 bem Si^netber _ba« Ju^. 6. 25et 9)rofeffor gafi bem finaten ben ffllei|lift. 7. 2)er 
 SRocE ge^ijrt bem ©olbaten. 8. S)a8 Sud) ifl bem fiinbe fe|t fd^ablic^. 9. SaStob 
 folgt bem SSater twc^ bet ©tobt. io. ■&ert SRiegel I)«t b«8 Suc^ bem §emt SJvofeffor 
 Sxtaxi gefiiiiit. 11. ©aS Sui| gcWvt ^evrn SRiegel. 12.,£)ie SZ«c|riii)t war bem ©ot 
 baten' a«gericl)m. 13. .gerv 3t«etSad^ ip au^ 5K«gbe6urg. 14. Sic .ffird^e \^ bem 
 $aufe be« -gicvrn Stetric^ (or ^cnrn SiettiiJ't^aufe) getabe gegeniiJet. 15. 2)er SWolet 
 jcigte §ettn ffirumm ba« (Semflbe. 16. Sv*^ Stnb ifl bem Satet Pr uniS^nlic^. 17. 
 §eute iji bte Settung fe^r intereffants; ' 18. Set Ce'^ver fc^enfte bem ©c^iiler b«^ SBu$. 
 19. Set SnaDe fptelt mit bem Sinbe. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 1. 35er Som ifl bem SWujeum gvabe gcgeniik]^2. gt folgtc bem S««fwanite (or 
 Saiifmann) mi^ $aufe. s.'SuS ^auS ge'^iivt bem*evrn gjrofeffov SRogft^. 4. §evra 
 SJilfonS ^unb folgte bem Scigcr nai| bem SBalbc.^. $ert SJierce ifl auS Soflon, aiet 
 lien Ettttte t(i mi e^tcfl'go. 6. Set §unb''bc« ^etrn Stown t|l bem liunbe bc0 ^ertd 
 SoneS fe'^r ci^nHc^. 
 
 3c^ntc Scltion. 
 
 Exercise 19. 
 1. We hung the picture over the table. 2. 1 sent the letter to America by 
 way of Hamburg. 3. The village is between the forest and the mountain. 
 4. The pencil is between the book and the paper. 5. Henry laid the pencil 
 between the book and the paper. '6. The dog is in the garden. 7. The boat 
 is under the bridge. 8. The pencil is under the book. S. Who has laid it 
 under the hook! (fir better, who laid it under the book) ? 10. Mr. Meyer told 
 the painter that he sent the letter.- 11. We hung the picture on the wall. 
 It was on the floor. 12. Mr." Meyer conducted (took) us from the church to 
 the Library. 13. Charles hasbeen' looking for the book a long time. 14. 
 This morning I sent Professor Burckhardt the book. 15. Where does he 
 live (reside) ? 16. He lives in Leipsic. 17. The boat is at the shore. 18. 
 I have not hung the picture on the wall yet. 19. The lamp is on the table. 
 
 NOTES. 
 1. All the Teutonic languages, including the Anglo-Saxon, had originally 
 a dative case. In English the dative has assumed the form of the accusative 
 in the noun and in most of the pronouns. 
 
20 teacher's companion. 
 
 2. fficc SvUf is from the Latin irevis=sIiort, and meant originally a short 
 writing (compare, in English, a lawyer's bi-ief). 
 
 3.. Both the German bic fiompc and the English lamp hare come (through 
 the -French la lampe) from the Low-Latin Umpana (or Umpada), which is from 
 the Late-Greet Xd/xiras (XdfnraSi.i), from \afLTriut=to shine. 
 
 4. The word Ofcn (Anglo=Saxon ofen) receiyed in English a specific meaning. 
 
 Bwansigfte StufgoSe. 
 
 1. %itn Salter '^at ioA Sud) bent £et)tev w&i ntc^t gefc^itft. 2. SBit :^cikit baS ®e= 
 mate gefievn S(6eni) on tie SBflnb se'^ans*- 3. SftS Sii^t t|i auf bem STtWe. 4. m\= 
 ^elnt fleUte ben ©tu^l sWtWen ben SEtfi^ wtib bie SBanb (or SBH^elm :^at ben Stu|I 
 jWifc^en ben Sijc^ unb bie Sanb geflem). 5. S)er Som t|i jttifc^en bem SKufcum unb 
 ber SiMtot^el. 6. 2)o3 Sue!) t|l ttitf bem Soben. 7. Scr SOTafa jlellte bft^ (SemiSlbe 
 auf ben StW. 8. SBo ifi ber Svief ? 9. St ip in bem ffluc^e; ic^ legte i?n in ba3 
 ffluc^. lo.Ser^aie Wvte una Don bem Some nac^ bem aHufeum. 11. 2)er ©arten 
 til ^intet bem ^m\t. 12. S)te Sviicte \^ jwij^en bem Sovfc unb bem Setge. 13. 
 2>a« au^, ber SBIcijlift unb baa 3)a))icv Ttnb auf bem Sifc^c. 
 
 Additional Senteucss. 
 1. SBo ftnb baa Sui) unb bev Slctfiift? 2. 3^ Ijak baa Sud) auf ben Slifd) unb 
 ben Sleiilift auf baa Su$ getegt. 3. SBo i|1 $evv SomilocE ? 4. gr ijl ju $aufe. 5. 
 ^mdi^ Wi an bem Sifc^e. 6. Set $unb ifi Winter bem Gfen. 
 
 ©Iftc Scftion, 
 Exercise 21. 
 
 1. Hast thou (hare you) the pencil? 2. No, I have it not (I hav'n't it). 3. 
 Hast thou already finished the exercise ? 4. Yes, I have finished it. 5. Henry, 
 did you hear what the teacher said {or has been saying) 1 6. Yes, I heard it 
 (<»■ yes, I did). 7. Did you hear what the teacher said? 8. Yes, we heard it. 
 9. Did you lay the book on the chair. 10. No, T laid it on the table. 11. Does 
 Mr. Weber reside far from Mr. Kraft? 12, No, he resides just opposite to him. 
 13. The painter showed me the painting. 14. The painting belongs to Mr. 
 Meyer; the painter sold it to him tMs morning. 15. The Library is not far 
 from the Museum. 16. He laid the letter in the book. 17. Mr. Schuhmacher 
 conducted us through the Museum to-day. 18. Mrs. Auerbaoh and Miss Auer- 
 bach were yesterday and day before yesterday in Frankfort-on-the-Main. 19. 
 Henry Kiemerhofer formerly resided in Frankfort-on-the-Oder. 
 
 NOTES. 
 The Roman Emperors were accustomed to speak in the first person plural 
 (the pluralis majestatis). This custom was adopted early in the language of the 
 courts in Germany. In the ninth century it began to be the custom to address 
 persons of high rank also in the second person plural, 3^r« Asa mark of re- 
 spect, parents, persons of holy orders, and foreigners were also addressed with 
 3&r (compare you in English). In the beginning of the seventeenth century, 
 the titles ^crr and ^rati were first used in direct address, together with the per- 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 21 
 
 sonal pronouns ffit {lie) and Sie (she).. Soon §ert and tjvciuwore dropped, and only 
 (Sr and Sic were employed in. polite -address. - .With .the adoption of Spanish 
 etiquette in the seventeenth century, the titles ■S'O'^cit (Highness), ExceKettj' 
 (Excellency), SBJa'jefldt (Majesty), eic, -were applied to persons of high rank, 
 being used with a plural verb. This custom yet prevails in official language, 
 and in direct address to royal personages. 
 
 At the beginning of the eighteenth century was introduced the custom, which 
 has been spreading ever since through all classes of society, of using the plural 
 form of the pronoun @ie (they) for ymi in polite address. 
 
 <St is now used in .direct address only in sportive language, in speaking to 
 children, birds, etc, 
 
 ©^Wagft (brother-in-law) is used in addressing postillion in a familiar way. 
 
 Saciuniisioanjiofte SlufgaSe. 
 
 1. ^«t, W i"" fc™ Sleijltft ni($t geljaSt t 2. 3c& I)ftie i^n xwi 33«* gelcgt. 3. SffiaS 
 fHc^ejlbu? 4.3*WebenSWpift. 5. 2Ba0 Men ©ie ? 6. 2Btt fudjm t>a« Sud). 
 1. ^afl bu i>a3 Stob gc^olt. 8. 3i^ $ft6c ti Won tjeutc SRorgm seloU. 9. SB* warfl 
 bu? 10. 3i| WM im Oarten." ll.iiajen ©ie ba3 (Dematit gftof? 12. Sleta, \i) 
 ^abe e3 md)t getauft. 13. 2Batin t)akn ©tc bcm ^evrn g)tofeffor Hoffmann ben fflrtcf 
 geWWt? 14. 3* ^a6e t^m ben Svief (Won) flcjlevn itWii. 15. ©ct SBttef iii im 
 ffiuc^c. 16. 2)ie ffit^e ifl nic^t Wett »om SKufeum. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 l.aBoiflbet Stiet? 2.$tcrt|ler. 3. SBer :§ttt ben fflteifltft ? 4. 3ft I)«5e i^n. 
 5. ^«5en Sie bic Samije ? 6. 3* id) ^aJe fie. 7. Iiaien ©ie bte SamK wnb baa Sictit ? 
 8. 3a, i^ 5a6e f}c. 9. SBo til bie Sitfte ? lO.Saiflfie. ii. $«6en©ie ben Kod? 
 12. 5Retn, xij ^abc i^n ntftt, So^ann ^at tt)n. 18. §at So'^ann ben Siod wnb ben ^ut ? 
 14.3a, evl)at Tie- 
 
 Btoiilfte Seltion. 
 Exercise 23. 
 
 1. It will certainly be very hot to-day. 2. The book is becoming tedious. 
 3. Toward evening the weather became cold, wet, and very disagreable. 4. 
 The merchant became very rich. 5. It is becoming sultry. 6. It will probably 
 rain before evening. 7. To-morrow the painter will certainly have finished the 
 paintings. 8. The cat>inet-maker will mend the table to-morrow. 9. The peas- 
 ant will sell the grain. 10. The father will praise the child, because it is so 
 industrious, and because it has finished the lesson so very quick. 11. This 
 evening William Schroeder will visit the Director of the Museum. 12. We will 
 visit Profeasor Siebert, from Vienna, to-morrow evening. 13. During the night 
 the weather became quite cold, but now the weather is warm and agreeable. 
 14. The boy will £oon have learned the lesson. 15. We will not buy the 
 house. 16. It thundered; it will soon rain. 
 
22 teacher's companion. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. In many cases d) in German is replaced by gji in English. Compare iit 
 Stadlt with night; fjod) with high; fciirdj (Old-Serman, ciurh), with through 
 (Anglo-Saxon, ttwj-Ay Old-English, ttMJ'5'A). 
 
 2. Frequently g in German is replaced hy y in English. Compare fagsen 
 with saj^ (Ang.-Sax., secgan; Old-Bng., seggin, seyen, sayn). 
 
 3. For illustrations of the analogous forms of words in languages related to 
 the German, and of the development of words during the history of the Ger- 
 man language, see § 28-30. 
 
 i. The word iit Sommo'ie is from the French la commode. 
 
 5. The oldest form of the word bcr ^ttit is der arzdt (found in the ninth cent- 
 ury). It is formed from the Latin archidter (from the Greek apxia'''pos)=ohief 
 physician. This foreign word has lopg since driven the native Gerinan word 
 for physician (der Mhhi) entirely out.of use. 
 
 6. The relationship of the German and English languages is seen in the in- 
 flection of the verb as strongly as in the analogous forms of individual words. 
 
 SSicrun&jmaitjTSfte Slufggk. 
 
 1. S)er Strst tttrb |ierrn 3Ke?er ^eutc kfuc^en. 2. Ser Stmmermann i<mt baS •&dtt«. 
 3. Ser Sauet ieim bai gctb. i. Set Saufmann wivb fe^r retd). ' 6. S)ct ©c&nriber 
 tturbe fe^v arm. 6. 35ie ©eWtc^te ttuvbe langwciH^. 7. (E3 wivb f(|ttul. 8. Si ttitb 
 Solb regnen. 9. & bonprt foeSm. ■ 10. S)er fflauer toirb ben SCeijen unb ben SRoggen 
 settaufen. ii. S)ct Sireftor be^ SWufeum? ttcir fcl)v yreunblic^ gegcn un3. 12. ffiv $ftt 
 ung buvcj) bfl^ SSfufeum gefiilrt. is. Set ffltHtotlcIav fii'^vte un3 bur^ bic ffiitltot^rt 
 (or 5at una . . . '. gefii'^tt)'. U. 2>ie SiMiotI)et ijl fe^t gtog unb fofltar. 15. 2)er Ce$= 
 ret tabeltc ba? tob, t»eit eg bie Settion (or SIutgaBe) nii^t lernte ; or, bet Secret ^«t 
 bag flinb getabclt, Weil ei bie Scltton nt^t gelernt I)at. 16. SBtt ^aScn ba« §ciu« ge= 
 mieflef. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. Set ©il)nciber toirb ben SRotf :^eute Slknb.tetJttrircn. '2. Set ^unb Wivb bcm 
 Sciget nac^ bet ©tabt folgen. 3. SBit wetben 6«lb n«^ §au(e ge^en. 4. Sie SJac^tt^t 
 Witb bcm fioufmanne fe'^t unangene^m' fctn. 5. SEBtt wetben baS $«u8 mi)t wict|cn. 
 6. SBa^tenb bet SJai^t ttutbe eS jiemtic^ fait, aSer ^eute witb baS SSJettet wa^tfc^einlicj 
 Mt t)eip Wetben. 
 
 SSicrjeljnte Settion. 
 Exercise 27. 
 
 1. Do you speak German ? 2. We speak only English. 3. Mrs. Dietrich speaks 
 German and French. 4. Miss Hasenolever speaks French, Italian, and Spanish. 
 5. The bookbinder has bound the book very (or quite) well. 6. Where did you 
 find the letter? 7. 1 found it in the book. 8. Miss Hildebrand sang the song 
 very beautifully. 9. Yes, she sang it really very beautifully. 10. The thief has 
 stolen the money. 11. The child has been playing with the cane. 12. Tes, and 
 it has broken it. IS. I spoke with Mr. Brown this morning. 14. 1 have been 
 looking for the book a long time, but I have not found it yet. 15. John has it. 
 
KEY TO THE FIEST PART. 23 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. From the similarity of-the English and German verbs in conjugation, wo 
 prefer to retain the terms "Irregular" and " Regular" Verbs, as used by En- 
 glish grammarians, rather than to use the terms "Verba of the Old or Strong 
 Conjugation" and "Verbs of the New or Weak Conjugation," which are used by 
 German grammarians (see §139 and §142). 
 
 2. Strictly speaking, the eleventh sentence signifies that the ohild has broken 
 the cane, but not into two pieces ; to break into pieces is rendered by jctbrecftcn. 
 
 3. A short e in the radical syllable of irregular verbs is usually changed to 
 short i in the 2d and 8d person singular of the indie, pres. ; when e is long,' it is 
 usually changed to ie; compare [fXtSjtn (fpric^ll) with jlt^Im (fiie'^tfl). 
 
 8ltfttttnt)5tt)n«3iflfte Slufrjafie. 
 
 1. ©iire^m Sic gransijjtfi^ ? 2. fUdn, ^icm'M\^ fptei^f i^ wil)t (or ic^ fpte^e feitt 
 Srcmsopfc^)^ ■ 3. ■^evt J?ve«|nEV fprid^t SeutW, ^ottointif^ StaltciniW uni) ©panifc^. 
 4. -^ett SJtofeffor ©^mtbt fprtc^t Sateinifi^ «nb ®rtec^tfc^. 5. ©it :^aJen ben ©tocE 
 geiroc^en. 6. 1)er I>teb '^at ben .^ut «nb ben SfJotf aeW™- 7. SSo 1}o.ien ©ie (or 
 W bu) ben fflleifiift gefunben? S. 3^ t)a5e i^n untcr bent Su^ gefunben. 9. ©eorg 
 Ui ba« Sanb urn ben §ut ge6mibcn. 10. SKatie ^ot baS Sieb ganj gut (or fe|)t gut) 
 gefungen. 11. ■^ert 3!iebner ft>tic^t; prcn ©ie,»al er fagt? 12. 3iS fuc^te bie Sci^ 
 tung. 13. .fieinric^ wirb baS Sieb fingen. 14. S)a« Sinb ^atte ben ©tod geJtodjen 
 (or jcr6toc^en, see note 2, above). 15. So'^ann ttirb M fdaij pnben. 16. §ert 
 fiMufe »irb b«« ■&aua foufen. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 Sem. The teacher will use his discretion as to -when it will be best, consider- 
 ing the attainments of the particular ■ class under instruction, to introduce 
 into the additional sentences new words, from the classified list of words given 
 on pages 415, 417, and 423. 
 
 1. $ert 2)ubl£» fDvii^t e^incriid) unb 3fti)ancrtW. 2. (BtfxiSjt ^m SRogcrS StiirfiW ? 
 3. 3«, er ftti^t SiirfiW, 5lta6iW unb KuirtW. 4. ©et.Sui^Mnbef ^at ba« Su(% noc^ 
 ni$t geiunbcn i ev wirb c« morgen binben. 5. Sffio ijl Slbolp? SBerner je Jt ? 6. £v i(l 
 in Slacken. 
 
 gitnfjel^ntc Seftion. 
 Exercise 29. 
 
 1. The scholars have finished the exercises. 2. The hills are not very high. 
 3. The rooms are too small. 4. The paintings are beautiful, but very dear. • 5. 
 John laid (or has laid) the pencils on the table. 6. The pencils are beside (or 
 near) the books. 7. The tables are in the rooms. 8. The thieves have stolen 
 the money. 9. The roofs of the houses in the villages are very steep. 10. The 
 towers of the churches in the cities are high and imposing. 11. The painters 
 have hung the paintings on the walls of the rooms. 12. The painter has hung 
 the painting on the wall of the room. 13. Mr. Dietrich sent the letters to 
 America by way of Bremen. 14. Mr. Elumenbach and Mr. Bunker have sung 
 the songs very beautifully (or finely). 
 
24 teacher's, companion. 
 
 NOTES; 
 
 1. We have deemed it best to adhere to the historically and logically correct di- 
 vision of nouns into Declensions, which is adopted by all German grammarians. 
 Besides being more advantageous in the philological study of the language, 
 this method of division will prevent confusion in the minds of such persons as 
 shall continue the study of the language in the works of the great German 
 grammarians, Heyse, Becker, Heyne, Kelle, Kehrein, Grimm, etc., and especially 
 to such as shall continue the study of the language under native teachers in 
 Germany itself. At the same time, in the practical use of the language, and es- 
 pecially during the early period of its study, the gender and declension of each 
 noun will have to be learned separately. 
 
 2. As the terms "Old" and "New Declensions" have already become familiar 
 to American students and teachers of the German language, we prefer to adhere 
 to them, rather than to introduce the terms " Strong and Weak Declensions," 
 which are used by German grammarians. 
 
 S. As the use of cases in the German is so different from that in the English 
 language, and as the cases in German are capable of such a variety of construc- 
 tion (the oblique cases being governed by verbs, adjectives, and prepositions), 
 ■ we prefer to give no translation of the oblique cases in the paradigms. ' While 
 the genitive case is more frequently rendered by of and the dative by to than 
 by other words, the genitive case may be governed by from thirty to forty 
 words that have a prepositional use, and eighteen prepositions always must be, 
 and nine may be used with the dative case. With many adjectives and verbs 
 that govern the genitive and dative cases, the prepositions (jf and to would give 
 erroneous translations. 
 
 1. S)i£ ©djiiler Ijakn bte ffliit^er gctauff. 2. 2/ie fflu^cr bet STtcitcr ftiib ouf bm 
 Stfc^En. 3. X)ic Sijc^lct ^akn bie Stifle vetjarirt. 4. 2)te Defcti, bte Stil^Ie iinb bic 
 Sif^c finb in ben Bimmnn. 5. grciulein SReuwann tjat bie Sicbcr fd)r fc^iin gcfutijen. 
 6. Sie 3tctc&te fmb jegt fe^r fatt. 7. Sie a:i)&tme bev ffivdien ftnb fel)): :^od). 8. 2)ie 
 Sfa^vidjten in bet Seitung jinb '^eute fc'^r intereffant. 9. 2>ic Odvten ftnb nicljt fe^t 
 gvog. 10. 2)te ©olbaten flnb tti ber ©tabt. ii. SBo ^a6cn ©ie bie Sleiflifte gcfunbcn ? 
 12. 2)te Sleipifte iraren unter ben ffliic^ern. 13. 35te Si^neibet Ijaien bie Kiide re))«=> 
 vitt. 14. Sic Wnber fpieten mit ben ^unben. 15. SBiv f^ictten bie Svtefe obex ■gomJuvg. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 1. 2)ic ®emalbe gepven ben SOTnIern. 2. Sie ©(^ijlet (lubiren fc^r flcigig. 3. S)ie 
 2)Zeff ct jinb nic^t fe^t fc^arf. i. ^m SDJiiller unb ■gictt ©c^ulg $aStn bie |>(iufec ge jlern 
 f^on gemiet^et. 5. SBir '^a6en bie JEommoben nie^t gclauft ; |ie finb ju Rein. 6. S)ic 
 Sauern ^aien ben SBeijen unb ben SRoggen fc|on »cv!auft. 7. ffiie Sirte 5«ien id 
 ©rib gefto'^len. 
 
 ©c^Sjel^tttc Seftion, 
 'Exercise 31. 
 
 1. Mr. Auerbach bought a painting to-day. 2. Henry bought to-day a coat, a 
 hat, a pair of boots, and a pair of shoes. S. The cook has procured (been to get) a 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PAET. 25 
 
 pound of sugar, a pound of coffee, and a pound of tea. 4. Do you wish a cup 
 of coffee or a cup of tea. 4. 1 wish only a glass of water. 6. The child wishes 
 a glfes of milk and a piece of bread and butter. 7. The cups {or the cups and 
 the saucers) are very beautiful^ ' 8. Shall you buy a quire of paper or a ream 
 of paper? 9. 1 shall buy a ream of paper. 10. The cloth is an ell wide. 11. 
 It costs a dollar an ell. 12. The tea costs a dollar (SHjOlev) a pound. 13. The 
 eggs cost ten groschens a dozen. 14. Henry has paid {or paid) a thaler and ten 
 groschens for the book. 15. The ribbon is an inch wide. 16. A year ago we 
 were in Germany. 17. 1 wish a quart of milk, a pound of tea, and a dozen eggs. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. In the year 1516 a rich vein of silver ore was discovered in the valley of 
 St. Joachim (©t. 30(lC^tm^=£t)ttl), in Bohemia. In 1518 there were struck off in 
 this valley a large quantity of silver coin, called JbaehimsthaUr, and worth in 
 value about one and a half of the present Prussian thaler, or about an Ameri- 
 can dollar (in gold). From that time forward, through the last three hundred 
 and fifty years, the name thaler has spread through many civilized lands. It 
 has been modified from Scaler, as in German, to Daler in Danish and Swedish, 
 Oaaler in 'Dutch, Dollar in English, and Dollaro in Italian, Spanish, and Portu- 
 guese. 
 
 2. The name ©rofdjcit is derived from the Middle-Latin adjective {denanus) 
 grossus, meaning large or thick {ipenmj). The first groschens were struck in 
 1296, and were worth about fifteen cents in gold. 
 
 3. The German word <)Sf(!nni3 and the English word penny are derived from 
 the ancient German word pjiant=^fani=a pawn oi pledge. The pfennig was 
 at first a silver coin, worth about five cents in gold. It was the chief silver 
 coin in Germany from the twelfth to the fifteenth century. The first copper 
 pfennig, struck in the sixteenth centoy, had nearly the value of the present 
 German !)}fennis. The pfennig (an^ienny) was represented in commercial 
 accounts by d {denarius). 
 
 i. The word XaiTe comes to the German, through the French {la tasse), from 
 the Arabic 'tassah {a basin) which is from the verb 'tassa=(o immerse. 
 
 5. The word Sa^t (and the English year) is allied to the Polish yar=spring, 
 and the Bohemian gar=summer. Many nations reckon the passage of time 
 by the number of " summers," as some others do by the number of " winters." 
 
 6. The original g was yet preserved in the Old-German in the plural of (Si, 
 which was eigir=&iet=eggs. 
 
 7. The word *fun6 (and the English pound) came from the Latin pondo (an 
 ablative used as a" nominative, allied to pondm), which was derived from pen- 
 dere—to hang {as in a balance). 
 
 Sttictttittiiircipgftc Slufgaie. 
 
 1. .JioJen ©ie eincn Sleiflift? 2. Da «uf bem %\W ifl (or liegt) tin Sletfitft. 3. 
 SBtt^dm ■^flt ein 3>«ar ©c^u^e utib eih '^m 35antoff£ln gelauft. 4. t>a Stoiii ttiri) etn 
 Sugenb eicr, tin 9)funt> Suilet, ein Quart WlWi^ unb ein 9)funb SReia ^oteti. 5. SaS 
 S«c^ t»ttb einen S^alet unb swatisig (Srofdjen toflcn. 6. SBil^elm wunWt ein ®la« _ 
 aCaffer. 7. Sunken ©ie cine Saffe SE^ee cbet eine Saffe fiaffee? 8.3il) WfinWe 
 
26 teacher's companion. 
 
 cine SEaffe Saffce. 9. Sa« SEuft ill eine EUc init. lo. ea toftct einen JEIjalet bte 
 eiie. 11. 3^ ^atc einen St)aleic mi sct)n (SroWen jiit baa Suet) beja^It. i% SaS 
 SBanb tp eine ©He taig «nb einen 3oU Jvett. 13. ea.Io|let 8e:^n ®n!fd)en.tiic eUc. 
 14. 2)et S^ce lollete einen SE^olet ba3 g)funb. 15. ^akn Sie einen Sojen g)ai)i«? 
 16. ®t :6at ein SRiea ^tifiex. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 1. §ctt SSJeProoI I)ot je^n SoUara fiii ben £iW «nii JWonjia SoKara fiit bie Som= 
 mobe imm. 2. ■Jieute wevbe i^ ein 3)flat ©tiefel, ein %)wx.<SS)vX)e, ein 3)aav $anb= 
 fdiu'^e «nb einen $ut faufett. 3. S«8 SBaffet ifi Ijiet jel^n gug tief. 4. Saa Sui^ fo= 
 jlet jwci'sjolflra bie ®Ie. 
 
 ©icfise^nte Seftion, 
 Exercise 33. 
 
 1. Mr. Meyer has bought three houses in Gotha. 2. The cloth is a yard {or 
 an ell) wide. 3. The cook has got two dozen eggs, five pounds, of'^ugar, and 
 seven pounds of rice. 4. The book costs eight thalers and twenty-five gro- 
 schens. 5. 1 paid twenty-five groschens and six pfennigs for the ribbon. 6. 
 Henry is four feet and eleven inches tall. 7. The bridge is eighty-four feet 
 long. 8. The tower of the cathedral of Magdeburg is three hundred and thirty 
 feet high. 9. The tower of the cathedral at Vienna is four hundred and thirty- 
 six feet high. 10. The Library in Berlin has {or contains) six hundred and 
 fifty thousand volumes. 11 . Dresden has a hundred and forty thousand inhab- 
 itants. 12. Magdeburg has ninety thousand inhabitants. 13. In the year 1863 
 Mr. Friedland and Mr. A^^olf were residing in Heidelberg, 14, Yesterday Mr. 
 Braun was fifty-eight years old. w 
 
 aSicriin&itcipfli'te SfufgoBe. 
 
 1. 2)et Xoi) I)at jwci 9)funb Suilet unb Jed)? 9Jfunb SJcia gcfauft. 2. §m Svicb- 
 lanb Stjft^Ite filnfje^n Sottava (or, if in Germany, JQciIer) fiir bie ffiiii^cr- 3- SBil^ 
 fjeim ip fiinf gup unb fieten Soil ^od). 4. Scr 2^utra tea Somca in SBicn ifl »ier= 
 l^unbcvt unb fcc^aunbbreilig Sup t)ocb- 5. S)ie j«5ei S^iimte beS ©omea in 3Kiinc&cn 
 finb btci^unbett unb fei^aunbbreipg gup IjoJ). 6, ©ie SSrtcife iJ6et bie Ettc in Sveabcn 
 t|l eintflufeitb fedjaiunbettunbfunfsig gup tang unb fiinfjig gup Jreit. 7. 25aa ©c^Iop 
 in Sevlin ij^ fec^a^unbcvtunbswansig gup lanij. 8. Ca Ijat fedja^unbcrt Simmer. 9. 
 fflremen Ijat ai^tunbrteSjig taufenb ©nwo^ner. lo. ^amiutg ^at Tjunbert unb fec^aunb= 
 ttcuttjia taufenb Ginwo'iner. 11. ©ie SiMiut^ef in SKiinc^en ij^ jwei^unbctmnbfitnfjig 
 gup lang unb fiinfunbaWg gup $0^. 12. ©ie $at (or ent^cilt) ai^f|unb'evtunbfunf jein 
 taufenb Siic^et (or SBcinbe). 13. ■^ert JJo^ner t»at im Sa^re 1865 in J)cutf:|lanb (or 
 im Sa^re 1865 war $en JJo^ner in Seutfi^Ianb). 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 1. 35er SJiaga'rafall (the Niagara Falls) ifi Dtertaufenb gup treit unb ^unbcvt ji»ei= 
 unbfcd)sig gup l)oa^. 2. !pi)itabclpl)!a (P)t4rt=bri'=rtia) I)at «d;t5unbevttaufenb ein= 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART 27 
 
 tto^ncr. 3. EI)ica30t)at^untiertunt>ac()tjig toufcnb Einwo^jiev. 4. 23ie ®tfcirtci^n swi= 
 fcl)fii Sllbani) unb Sufjalo ijl jwti^unbcrt mi ai)tmii\tmh\i SOTeileit lang. 5. Set 
 Erie- flaBtil ifl bvei^unbcrl SBIeilea Imig. 6. 2Bie alt fiitb Sie ? 7. 3c^ tin petenseljn 
 3a6re alt. 8. §cvr Slraenbevg I)at bvei'^unbevt unb tieununba^tstg SWorgen Canb in 
 gJommErn setlauft, unb cv Ijat in S!Bi«conjin stcrljunbertunbncunsig Mn 8«nb geTauft. 
 
 Slf^tat^ntc Seltion.- 
 Exercise 35. 
 
 1. The water is cold. 2. Do you "wish cold water? 3. 1 wish warm water. 4. 
 The cook has a pitcher fall of hot water. 6. The bookbinder has bound the book 
 with red leather. 6. The tailor has lined the coat with black cloth. 7. Catha- 
 rine picked two white and three red roses in the garden, 8. Miss Hildebrand 
 sang two beautiful German songs yesterday evening. 9. Berlin and Vienna 
 are large,and beautiful cities. 10. Professor Eberhard has bought two Italian 
 and four Spanish books. 11. Do you wish gray or green cloth ? 12. 1 wish brown 
 (cloth). 13. Instructive books are sometimes very tedious. 14. The Cathedral 
 in Munich has two high towers. 15. Berlin has wide streets. 16. Brunswick 
 has narrow, crooked streets. 17. The houses in Brunswick have steep roofs. 
 18. .The house is large and convenient, but it is too dear. 19. The saddler has 
 bought black, yellow, and brown leather. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. The word SKofc is from the Latin rosa. The Latin form was indeed retain- 
 ed for a long time during the Old-German Period (§ 9). 
 
 2. The German verb pfliicfcn and the English verb to pluch are derived from 
 the Provencal verb pelucar'=to pluck out, which (as well as the Italian verb 
 pUiiceare=fo pick grapes), is from the Latin YeibpUare=io pluck out hairs (from 
 pilus:=a hair). 
 
 3. There are very many examples ot the change of p in words from the 
 Latin to pf in German (see § 48, 2, 26). 
 
 4. The German word fciii and the English word fine have come from the 
 French J!«, which (with the Provengal ^», Italian and Spanish ^no) is abbre- 
 viated frcm the participle ^ni tus=finished, complete. 
 
 5. The English word deck and the German word 'Siad} are from the same root 
 as the verb bccfcn (see page 442). 
 
 ©c^guu&brci^igftc SlufgaJe. 
 
 1. §£rr 95rofeffot Sinbemsnn '^at jwci italianiWc unb btet franjiiftWe 3eitungcn. 2. 
 •Jjolien ©ie ^ottonbifdie Siic^ct 1 3. STein, abcr wir Jaben franjbjtWc unb fijantWe Sit= 
 djcv. 4. .^Err SKcijer'^Eim $at jwet fdjbne unb foflbave Siiftet auf ben Sif^ gelegt. 5. 
 2)er ©attler ^at gelbe« unb Wwarje^Sebet gEtautt. 6. S)er SBuc^binbet '^at bte Sitdjet 
 nic^t mit gtiinem Seber gebunben. 7. Et l)at bte Siid^cr mit rot^em Cebet gebunbcn. 
 8. 3)er ©i^neibEV Wivb b£n SRoii mit braunem Suc^e {iittern. 9. 2)a3 Stnb :^at brej 
 gjofen gepfliidt. 10. fiojlbate Sijc()et finb iutsctlen nic^t fe^r le'^vretd;. 11. 2)et Som 
 ju flbin mtvb jlDCt ■^o^e S^iirme ^abcn. 12. ©ie werben 476 gu6 ^oiS fein.- 13. |ierr 
 aUieget ^at iWet groge unb Wbne ©emcilbe getauft. 14. gr beja'^Ite 890 Scaler fUr bic 
 ®emalbe- 
 
28 teacher's companion. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. S)tc f8viiji)aniUt ©ilulfe unb ©(enfelbt ^ft6ra bcut^e, italwtitfe^c unb vujjtfc^e 
 S3u(5et. 2. .^aSen r« «wc& mffiWc SettHngen? 3. Sfein, fte 1)aitn mx beutlc^e unb 
 ttdUamWE Settunscn. 4. S)ct S)om ju Sam^erg t)at Diet "^oie S^iivme. 6. ac^tsig 
 amertlaniWe ©tubtntm tefu^en (attend) je^t bte ttntoKfitat ju (or in) Serlin. 6. 
 23a3 fduS) I)at 527 ©eiten. 
 
 9lcunje:^ntc Scltiou. 
 Exercise 37. 
 
 1. What are you looking for ? 2. 1 am looking for my books. 3. My father is 
 not at home. 4. My grandfather has presented a book to my brother. 5. Mr. 
 Diez, his wife, and his daughter Catharine are in Potsdam to-day. 6. My cousin 
 visited his parents in Jena day-before-yesterday. 7. Charles, hast thou found 
 thy pencil? 8. Children, have you finished your exercises? 9. The scholars 
 have learned their lessons very well. 10. Mary said that she will probably visit 
 her aunt to-day. H. Have you seen my brother to-day ? 12. Yes, I saw your 
 brother this morning in the Museum. 13. Do you not see the tower of the 
 Cathedral? 14..0h yes! I see it. 15. Have.you read the news this morning? 
 16. Yes, I read it in your newspaper. 17. What are you reading? 18. 1 'am 
 reading the history of Germany. 19. My uncle has given my sister the book. 
 20. Mr. Niemeyer told me yesterday evening that he saw my grandfather and 
 my grandmother in Magdeburg day before yesterday. 21. My parents are to- 
 day in Magdeburg. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. With reference to the word fSftann, see § 49, 2, Setn. The Gothic verb mi- 
 nan (Old-German, meinan; Middle and New German, metnen=fo think; Dutch, 
 meenen; Swedish, mena; Danish, mme; Anglo-Saxon, maenan; Old-English, 
 menen; New-English, mean) is allied to the Latin verb me-men-is=io remember; 
 the Greek verb fUii.ova=zI am mindful; the Russian verb m'njeM=:to think, and 
 the Sanscrit verb ma»=to think ; and also to the Latin noun ?nens=mind, the 
 Greek /i6'i/os=:will, and the Sanscrit manas=spirit. 
 
 2. The word Srnu originally signified miM, pleasant, lovely. It is allied to 
 the adjective ftol)=happy, cheerfid, and to ^tet>a, the name of the Goddess of 
 Love in Northern Mythology, in whose honor the day ^titae=Miclay, is named. 
 
 3. The German words Xante and the English word aunt come (through the 
 French iante; Old-French ante) from the Latin amiia=awnt on, the father's side. 
 
 4. The German word 6oufine and the English word ayusin come (through the 
 French [masc] coimn, [fem.] cousine) from the Latin, being contracted from 
 consobrinus. Sobrinm is changed from sororinus=a sister's child (from soror— 
 
 CL StstSVS 
 
 8l«tuuiibretj!i8fte StufgaJe. 
 
 1. §(ikn ©ie mcine ^anb^u^e gcfe^m? 2. 3a, S'^rc ^anbyclulje jtnb (or Hegcn) 
 ttuf bcm SEifc^e. 3. S)oS ffinb fw'^t feincn fflatev unb \tm SKuttcr. 4. ^oien ©ie ben 
 Stief son 3t)rcm C^ctm in Sunn geUfcn ? 5. 3c^ ^aJe i^n m^ nic^t gelefen. 6. Un= 
 fcr Crtjrct f«gt, bai Wit unfevE CcKoncn (or Slufgaticn) jcTjr gut gclernt ^dben. 7. 3o» 
 Sann, tad bu bcine StufaaBc soUmbet ? 8. ffinber, Iiatit ifir eurc fflflScr oefunbfti 9 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. , 29 
 
 g. 2)ie SJJa^vic^tcn im StmcviEa in 3^rcr Scitung pnti fel)v ititereffant. 10. S!BiIl)rtm 
 SOTc^er fdgt, tag feine Eltevn jcjt in Sre^ben j^nb. 11. ■^einvi^ tRcMi) fagt, ba^ fcine 
 Sante fe^r ftan! i|l. 12. 3o^«nn SOTe^er fugt, baf fein O^eim fcin ^CMi unb fcinm 
 Oattcn sevlauft :^«t. 13. SBJeine Si^wcflet Ijdi bai SBixi) nod) nii|t gclefen. 14. 3Kein 
 aJater lat mtt ba« Sud) gegeten. 15. 2)er ©c^neibct |at wcinen fStoi rcpavivt. 16. 
 SBil^etm tefudjt feinen Uvgvofsatet. 17. gvciulcin 2Bci)ganb iH mcine Eoufine. 18. 
 §m 3Ji(%ter ifJ ntein ©djBager. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 1. SKtine Wtgrogmuttcr t»o$nt in .&ctbel6evg. 2. ©ie iji 84 34f« "I'- s. .gierr 
 Stac^felb icfu($t jegt feinen S^tDtegersotet in Jfiffingcn. i. SBilletm aBcnJel ^at fei^ 
 nem ©ticf^n, So'^ann Sraun, Ijcute ein ffluc^ gefficnf t. 5. fjvftu Hrumicvg ifl ^ebteig 
 Dbm^Eimet'^ Sante. 6. gvaulcin SJeic^cnicvg ijlmeine Sflidjte. 
 
 Exercise 39. 
 
 1. The pronunciation of the German language is strong (energetic, or forcible), 
 but it is not very soft. 2. To whom do these new boolis belong? 3. They be- 
 long to that rich merchant. 4. Not all instructive books are interesting. 5. 
 Not every book is instructive. 6. Mr. Sehauer resides in that large house oppo- 
 site the New Itluseum. 7. Some days ago I bought some German and French 
 books in Leipzig. 8. Professor Sehauer has many Italian books in his library. 9. 
 That black overcoat is too large for me. 10. These (American) rubber over- 
 shoes cost three thalers. 11. The colors of the Prussian flag are black and 
 white. 12. The colors of the American flag are red, white, and blue. 13. The 
 army of the North-German Confederation has now 800,000 soldiers. 14. In 
 which cities of Germany were you? 15. We were in a number of {or several) 
 large cities, especially in Berlin, Dresden, Vienna, Munich, Stuttgart, and Co- 
 logne. 16. Cologne is on the left side andDusseldorf is on the right side of the 
 Khine. 17. Mr. Ludemann resides on the right side of the street, opposite the 
 new church. 18. Saxony belongs now to the North-German Confederation. 
 19. This overcoat belongs to Dr. Messerschmidt. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. The word 9lrmcc', which came from the French armle, a modification of the 
 Middle-Latin participle wmdta^armed (body), was but little used in Germany 
 before the Thirty Years' War (1618-1648). For some time previous to the 17th 
 century, the Spanish word armada was much used. The native German word 
 for army is fca§ $eev. 
 
 2. The Anglo-Saxon form of the word ®t)rad)e was spraec (and, with the r 
 dropped, space). For other examples of the dropping of the r in English words 
 of Teutonic origin, see § 49, 2, 19. . 
 
 3. The German word alt {old) is allied in its root to the Latin verb Here— to 
 nourish, the ancient participle of which. aUus=nomished, groum up, received the 
 adjective signification of high. 
 
30 teacher's companion. 
 
 4. One of the most striking examples, by which the relationship of the Indo^ 
 European languages (§ 1) is shown, is in the word ncu (Middle-German, neuwe; 
 Old-German, niwi; Qothio, niujis ; Anglo-Saxon, niwe, mom; English, new) 
 which is allied to the Latin nomts; the Greek j/los (originally with the digam- 
 na, 1/eFos), the Slavic (Russian) nowyi, the Keltic (Irish) mm, the Persian naw, 
 nu, and the Sanscrit newas. 
 
 5. As there had arisen a great variety in the spelling of the name of Bavaria 
 (as S3at)£ra, Satevn, Severn, Seietn) and of the adjective Bavarian (as Sat)mfi^, 
 ffiatjtifc^, SaieriJ^, Satrif^, f&ttim\ii, Sc^ttfc^, SEteriji^, Seitifc^), the government of 
 Bavaria issued a decree on June 30, 1846, directing the forms Saiern and 
 ajnirifd) to be used in all ofiScial documents, and requesting all persons to adopt 
 these forms. 
 
 aStcrsiflftc S(«fga6e. / 
 
 1. Sie 3tu3fS)rac()e bet Staliemfc^eit Sprac^e i|i tucti^, (An boc6 tvaftBoH. 2. SEBcm 
 ge'^bvt biejer neue |)«t ? s. Et gepvt bcm ■^ettn ffle^r. i. gtanlfurt (om SKatn) 8e= 
 ptt iejt stt 9)rEU§cn. 5. SaS 5?eue 3)Jufeum in SBerlin t|l \t^x grog unb tmuofant. 6. 
 & ijl brci^unbett unb sterjig gug lang. T. 2)a« Sdte SKufeum tjl ni^t fo gtog. 8. © 
 tjl jwei^unbert (ci^^unbrtelisig gu§ lang, I)unbert unb ^uim Su^ titf unb braunbac&t= 
 Sicj gug 5o§. 9. 2)a« 9teue 3Kufeum ifl t)tnttr bcm Sllten SJiujcum. 10. Die gavBen 
 bet italiciniWcn ga'^ne jtnb vot^, tteig unb griin. 11. Sin ttelc^et ©eite bcr ©tvape 
 tto^nen ®e? 12. 3Biv woI)nen an bet tect'ten ©eite bet Sttage, getabe gegeniiict bem 
 neuen §aufe bea #ettn fitanjlet. 13. aBa« loflet biefc« lua^ bie Elle ? 14. 2)a« Maue 
 Suc^ foflet fitnf Sr^alet bie EHe. 15. Saa Wwatje S:ud^ tojJet sier 3:^aler unb 8W(m= 
 jig Otof^cn bie SHe. 16. 2)ie iSfiettetc^ifdje 3ltmce l^at ttc^tljunbett taufenb ©otbaten. 
 17. Set 3;|utm bet Sit4e iji ^unbett unb Dietjig guj ^oc^. 18. 3i^ '^a6e $cute SWot» 
 gen einige beutfc^e Siic^et gelauft. 19. 3c^ :^a6e nic^t uiele beulf^e Siidjet. 20. 3c^ 
 :^a6e m«nct)e (or siele) beutf^e Siiii^et gelefen. 21. 3c& ^<At nut wenig beutf*e Su^et. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 1. 2)iefe« $au3 gcprt §etmann Dtot^, unb jenc3 |iau3 ge^bvt §ettn Sietiic^. 2. 
 Sa8 Sui^ 5at Diet^unbeit fe^aunbac^tjig ©eiten. 3. Set ©i^nctbet '^at sttblf «eBet= 
 totfe gemai^t. 4. J)ie gav6en bet meritttnifc&en gtt|ne pnb weig, rot^ unb griin. 5. 
 SBeWe Seitungen ttiinWen ©ie? 6. SEBit wiinfi^en biefe Seitungen. 7. ^^ett fltaft 
 ^at '^eute jwet neue englifc^e Siic^et in SojJon getauft. 
 
 (Sinmtbsttianstgfte Seltton. 
 Exercise 41. 
 
 1. Have you seen my German Grammar to-day ? 2. Tour German Header is 
 on my table near my French Grammar, but I have not seen your German 
 Grammar to-day. 3. Mary has mislaid^ her Italian Grammar ; have you seen 
 it ? 4. 1 have riot seen it to-day. 5. The sleeves of your tfew dress-coat are too 
 long. 6. No, the tailor made it exactly {or quite) according to the new {or 
 latest) fashion. 7. Henry Dietrich has ordered a black overcoat. 8. The collar 
 
KEY TO THE FIEST PART. 31 
 
 of mywhite Test is too wide. 9. But the vest fits you Tery well. 10. The fa- 
 ther has promised the child a new hook, because it has learned its German ex- 
 ercise so well. 12. I^r. Beyerloin asserts {or says) that Mr. Gellort paid 2840 
 dollars for his new paintings. 12. A thief has stolen my pocket-book out of 
 my pocket. 13. William has broken the new pitcher. 14. The pattern (figure) 
 of your new dress is very beautiful. 15. Anna has bought to-day a black dress, 
 an umbrella, a parasol, and a blue veil. 16. The size (of the page) of this 
 French Grammar is too large. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. The word SRobe comes, through the French la mode (fern.), from the Latin 
 modus (maso.)=measMre, way, manner, to which was given in the Middle-Latin 
 the signification of usage, custom. Modu^ has given rise to the two French 
 words le mj>de=manner, way; and la inod«=fashion. The latter word was taken 
 into the German language early in the 17th century. 
 
 2. The word ©rammo'tit comes from the Greek yjoa/i/iaTiKii {Tixvn)=ihe 
 art of writing — from 'fA, ypccfifia^^tJie engraved thing, the letter — from ypa(piiv= 
 to engrave, to write (allied to the German grabcn; see page 316). 
 
 3. As the terms " OW and "New Declension of Adjectives" are already famil- 
 iar to American students of the German language, we prefer to adhere to their 
 use, rather than to adopt the terms "Strong" and "Weah Declension of Adjec- 
 tives" which are employed by German grammarians. 
 
 Sffleiuitblitctjigfte Slufplic. 
 
 1- ^ii 1«Be mein beutfileS CefeBu(| Scrlegt; ii^ :^«k e« tonje scfuc^t, «5er tc^ '^aSe 
 ti noi$ tiidjt gefwnien. 2. ©a ifl e? (or licijt c8) «uf bem SliWe untcr mciner beutfc^ra 
 (SrammaKt. s. liaJett ©ie 3t)ve kutfdje Seititng ortcfen ? 4. SJeiii, ti$ $ak fie noc^ 
 . tiic^t gclefcn; WilnWen ©ie fie? 5. ■&a6cn ®te Me neue SOTiiJe iti fiitibea Scmcrit? 
 6. 3a, fte i)apt i^m fc'^r gut. 7. ^(Htn ©ie 3I)ren 3iegenfd)irm gtfunben ? 8. §«6cn 
 ©ie mein beutfdea CefeSuil gcfel)en? 9. |ia6en ©ie ein 3)ftar ©ttefri SeflcHt? lo. 
 SJein, ic^ late ciit 35aOT ©i^ul)e teflcttt. 11. Set ft'vagen feineS Ke5ervoae« ijl jtt 
 Bvett (mcit, in Gerrnan, refers only to distance away). 12. 2)a3 A'int l^at bic S^affe 
 jertroii^en (the word SEaffc may refer to the cup alone, or to the cup and saucer). 
 13. Mx\ ^at ^cute SBorgen ctti Su^eni) Safc&etituc^er, eine neue ffiefle, eincn gjege«= 
 fd^tvm, mi cin SJttftt amevttoifi^e ®ummtfil)ul)e gctauft. 14. Svc^Iau ^at ^uni)ertunb= 
 fiinfjig taufcnb ©nwo'^net. 15. Set S)om ju SteiBuvg tft bret^unbctt unb gwanjig 
 gug lang mib Ijunbevt gug 6veit. 16. Ser 'S^mxa ifl brci^unbevt unb fe^aunbneunjtg 
 
 3tociunbjtoanjig[te Seftion; 
 Exercise 43. 
 
 1. This painting is more beautiful {or a more beautiful one) than that one. 
 2. The weather is milder to-day than it was yesterday. 3. Have you heard the 
 last news ? 4. Have you read the last news ? 5. The spire of the cathedral in 
 Vienna is the highest in the world. 6. The Schneekoppe, the highest mountain 
 
32 teacher's companion. 
 
 in North and Central Germany, is 4960 feet high. 7. The Danube is the longest 
 river in Germany. 8. The shortest way (or road) from Berlin to Paris is by 
 way of Magdeburg and Cologne. 9. To-day is the shortest day of the year. 
 10. Baron von Eothschild was the richest man in the world. 11. Albert Durer 
 was the most famous German painter of (or in) the Middle Age. .12. In Nu- 
 remberg especially he painted many beautiful paintings.'; 13. Little Freddy is 
 a dear little child. 14. Henry is not as old as John, but he is two years older 
 than William. 15. General von Frankenstein was more brave than prudent in 
 the battle. 16. The history of the Thirty Years' War is very interesting. 17. 
 My youngest brother is six years old. 18. Munich is the largest city in Bava- 
 ria. 19. !y is much larger than Nuremberg or Augsburg. 20. Baden is a little 
 larger than Saxony, 21. Bavaria is much larger than Baden. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. !Scr Sflug is allied to the English word ^oss (see note to fUcfjen on page 815). 
 
 2. SBJcnig is from melttm=io cry (see § 122, 4, Sem. 3).* 
 
 3. Sc^t (and the English last) is from the ancient adjective las=lasy (see § 9). 
 
 aStcrunbliicrjifli'tc Slufgaie. 
 
 1. SWein altejlev Svubct ijl swblf 3«'^tc att, mi mein jungPcv SSvubcr ijl ^eiji Sa^re 
 alt. 2. SBiinWcn ©ie femcvE« Slud) ? 3. Slein, bicfe? Zni) i|l fcin gcnug. 4. $e«tc 
 ifl ber Icinglle Sag iti SaljvcS. 5. Sart tfl fiinf 3aT)i:e alter (Hi fein fflvubct. 6, .^evv 
 fitaufe fingt ganj gut, ain ^m EngKffi ftngt »iet Jeffcr, unb •^evr Etierljavb fingt om 
 icflen son aHen. 1. 'Bai SBctter i|l ^cutt fe^r unangene$m, «5m eS ip me'^r jJurmif^ 
 aK fait. 8. Set DJerjl war in ber ©c^ladjt nWjt tBctitger sovjti^ttg aW tapfcv. 9. 2Ka= 
 rie Svatijtev ^at bie beutjc^en Ctcbct fe^r Won gefungen. 10. SSiI^tImgriebKnbeti|l 
 gctabe fo att wie (or aW) griebric^ ©d^naa(e. 11. 2)tefe8 3)a))tcr ifl nic^t fo gut tttc 
 ienc«. 12. SeneS Suc^ ip grower aK btefca. 13. Sie Dber i(l ber Idnglle Slup in 
 SlovbbeutWIanb. 14. Sie tjl lottgct aW bie ©6c. 15. ^aim Sic bie le^ten 3?ac6= 
 rii^ten geprt? 16. TOctt Siivet war untet (or gctjiivtc ju) ben krittjmteficn SKalem 
 Dcut[c^Ianb3. ir. Ser fiirjepe SBcg son Serlin nad) 2:riefl i|l iiJev 2;reSben, 3)rag unb 
 SBien. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. 2)eutfi$Ianb i|l fafi fo gvop tote Swag. 2. SBatcrn ifl etwa? Hcin.n- M 5Waine. 
 3. ©ac^fen ifl etwai? ftciner ats Eonnccticut unb 9Jt)obe Mimb. 4. Stalicn ifl ettoaS 
 grower aW ©eorgien unb gloriba. 5. 33cr SPJiffiffiwi ifl 3I66 SKeilen lang; ev ifl ber 
 langfle glup in SJotbamerifa. 6. 3)ev S^urm ber Srcteinigtcitaiitdje (Trinity Church) 
 in 9few §)ovI, ber pa)fle S|«rm in Slmevifa, ifl jwct^unbevt stevunbfcc^gjig gui Ijod). 
 7. Sterai? ifl ber gropte ©taat unb Delaware ifl ber Meinfle Staat in ben SJeveinigtcn 
 ©taatcn. 8. 2)er ffivjeflc SBcg son SJero 8)ot{ tjg Etjattanooga ifl iiJev 5):^ilabelrtia, 
 SBof^ington, Ssn#utg unb i^nortitlc. 
 
 Sem. The names of most rivers out of Germany are of the masculine gender, 
 as: Ser 2»iffiffi()))i, Stmajonenftup, ®«ngcS, 3)o, but bie Siter, SJcmfc, SBoIaa, etc. 
 
KEY TO THE FIEST PART. 33 
 
 Sreiunbjtoanjigftc Scltioit. 
 Exercise 45. 
 
 1. 1 have borroweil to-day of Professor Steinmeyer the first volume of Hein- 
 rich Kurz's History of the German Literature. 2. Mr. Sohonberg resides in the 
 second story of the fifth house on the right-hand side of Friedrich Street. 3. 
 The advertisements are on the seventh and eighth pages of the newspaper. 4. 
 The telegraphic dispatch from America is in about the middle of the fourth 
 column on the third page of to-day's paper of this place; the dispatch is of very 
 great interest. 5. You will find the origin of the word „3)Jeffet" (given) in the 
 second volume of the third edition of the Glerman Dictionary by Schmitthenner, 
 on the one hundred and forty-eighth page, in the twenty-ninth line from the 
 bottom. 6. Christopher Columbus discovered America on October 11, 1492. 
 . 7. Frederick the Second, generally called the Great, died on the seventh of Au- 
 gust, 1786. 8. He was the third king of Prussia. 9. Frederick William the 
 Fourth, the sixth king of Prussia, died January 2, 1861. 10. Gothe died in Wei- 
 mar on the twenty-second of March, 1832. 11. Schiller died in Weimar on May 
 9, 1805. 12. Albert Durer was the greatest German painter of the sixteenth and 
 seveententh centuries. 13, Monday was the first of January. 14, Tuesday was 
 a very hot day. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. Set Saubis from Bin bert (§145); see also §79, 2, Hem. 2. 
 
 2. S)cr ^!anis=king, is allied to (onncn and (enneii (see § 145). 
 
 3. ®cir ^aifer comes, through the Gothic Icaiser (and this through the Greek 
 Koitrap) from the Latin ccESar. 
 
 Hem. The Eussian word csar comes also, through the Greek Koiirap, from the 
 Latin ccesar. 
 
 4. The letter g is dropped from many English words of Germanic origin (as in 
 the word bovsen=bsrrow). Especially is this the case when the g is not initial. 
 For other examples, see § 49, 2, 12. 
 
 Hem. It will be noticed that the original g is often represented in the English 
 word by the letter y. 
 
 5. The verb bauttn=to last (in the Middle-German durm), is from the Latin 
 verb durare (from durus=ihard), which signified to harden, remain, last. 
 
 6. On the Rhine and in South Germany the form @amftag is more used; in 
 Central and North Germany @onnabenb is usually employed. 
 
 7. The word Si>lcffcr=a knife (Middle-German meser, Old-German meznirahs, 
 mezisahs), is compounded from two words, mats-sahs; the first component, mats 
 {Grot'b\c)^meatj food, is not found in the German language; the second, saJis 
 (Old-German) =knife, is allied to the Latin saxum:=a rock. The first knives of 
 the Germanic, as of the American Indian tribes, were made of stone. 
 
 8. When the adverbial expression of time is long, as in the fifth of the follow- 
 ing sentences, it may be placed after the adverbial expression of place. 
 
 ©t$§uttbl>icr5iBfte StufgaSe. 
 
 1. ^ij Icfe iefet fern britttn Sanb ha ©eWii^te SeutWtoiS Don M. 81, ajfetijel. 2. 
 3luf Writer ©rite tefm ©ie ? s. 3S) lefe auf iet ■^unbettbreiunbfunfstgilen ©eite, in bet 
 
 B2 
 
34 teacher's companion. 
 
 ftc6scl)nteti Seile son oten. 4. Ste Sttijetge Don bem SSevtanfe bci3 $aufi;« ifi (or jlEtjt) in 
 bev britten ©palte bet Dievtra Seite bei ^eutigen Settung. 5. gvanj btv B»eite, M\n 
 tm OefJerret^ unb bet legte Saifet son SeutWmb, jlatB in SBtcn am 2. SKcivj 1835. 
 
 6. Sotl bet ®topc, bet et(le A'atfei »on S)eutfi|Ianb, flatt in Slad^en am 28. Sanuot 814, 
 
 7. SJie flie«s8ii9e bauetten tiom Enbe bc^ elften Hi gegen ba« Enbc im bvcise^nten 
 3a'§t^unberta. 8. gtcitag witb bet ctjle Sanuai fein. 9. ©onntag Wat bet fdltejle 
 Jug biefea 3)Jonat3- 10. SKitttuo^ witb bet tttjejle Sag bca 3a^vc« jein. 11. 3m» 
 manuel J?ant, bet gtogte 9)^Uofoi)5 bei aii^tje^nten 3al)tt)unbett«, flarD in fiijnigSktg 
 am 12. Settuat 1804. 12. Et war a^tjig Sa^te alt, aXi ef fiatt- 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 1. Oeorge SEBaf^ington flatS ju 2)lount SJeinon am 14. Sesemtcr 179?. 2. Senia= 
 win Stanllin fiat6 am 17. ge6t. 1790 i ct wat 84 Sa'^te alt. 3. 3fl '^eute ber bteipig|!e 
 ?io»emkt ? 4. 9Jcin, '^eut'e ifl bet etjle Scicmtet. 
 
 SJitruubjiDanjigjitc Scltion. 
 
 Exercise 47. 
 
 1. The soldier is binding his poclset-handkerchief around his arm. 2. Berlin 
 and Hamburg are connected by a railroad. 3. The surgeon has dressed the 
 wounds of the soldier. 4. The bookbinder has bound the book wrongly. 5.1 
 found the next to the last, but not the last, edition of the Dictionary in Mr. 
 Meyer's bookstore. 6. Christopher Gottlieb Schroter, an organist in Nordhau- 
 sen, invented the piano in 1717. 7. Do you prefer tea or coffee? 8. I prefer 
 tea. 9. The scholars have already begun their German exercises. 10. Mr. 
 gtrack bought the house last year for 8500 thalers ; he sold it day before yester- 
 day for 9100 thalers. 11. He gained 600, thalers thereby (^ he made 600 tha- 
 lers by the operation). 12. The peasant woman has spun the yarn very well (or 
 quite well). 13. The criminal has broken the laws of the land. 14. Oh, dear 
 Frederick! (oc tetter, oh, Frederick), you have broken these new vases all to 
 pieces. 15. Mr. Niedner is speaking to you. 16. The expenses of the govern- 
 ment were much too great j they did not correspond at all to the poverty of the 
 land. 17. The peasant is threshing the wheat. 18. The child has taken the 
 German Dictionary from the table. 19. We met Mr. Kirchhoff on the street 
 this morning. 20. We meet him very often in the Museum. 21. The hunter 
 did not hit the hare. 22. The child has thrown the ball over the house. 23. 
 The architect has designed a very beautiful plan for the new City Hall. 24. 
 Indeed! have you seen it? 25. No, but Mr. Voss said that it is very beautiful 
 {or finej. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. The German word 9SnU (Mid.-Ger., bal; Old-Ger.,pal) comes, as does the 
 English word ball, through the Italian ^afia=6aH, from the Greek TrdXk£ti;=io 
 thram. The native German word for ball is tie Susd. 
 
 Hem. The word Snn=o darwe, bdU, comes through the Italian iallare=io 
 dance, from the Greek verb /3a\\ij£u/=to dance, which was used in Grecia Mag- 
 na and Sicily, being a derivative oi PaXKuv=to throw. 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 35 
 
 2. The Gorman word 3B(i3cn, and the English word wjieat, are allied to the ad- 
 jective «>cifi=K)7i8te. 
 
 3. The words te9iercn=to govern, and SKcgicruiig= government, are derived 
 fi-om the latin regere. They were first used in the fifteenth century. 
 
 4. For other examples of oa in English for «i in German, as in Wttnic=wound, 
 see § -19, 1, 5. 
 
 5. In Germany, as in England, the word Sotn=corn is used generically for 
 all kinds of grain. Indian corn, is translated by tcr !9tai8. 
 
 St^tuttbUtcrsigfte Slufgak. 
 
 1. S)«« fiinb imbti iai fficinfe urn fetnen |)ut. 2. tiet SBuntxivit 'Oat t>ic Sunbcn in 
 ©olbaten setdunben. 3. Set Su($6inbet :^at bicfea SBkttxHH) mimim. 4. 9Jto= 
 feffot SKorfe $at ben eleteiWen Selcgraii'^en im Sa^te 1838 etfunben. 5. Srinfen ©te 
 lte5et 3;^ce ober Jtaffee (or jte^en ©te St^ee cbcr i?affee »ot)? 6. 3c& trtnfe liefer 
 flaffee. 7. S)ie Sciucrin fpintit baS ®ant. 8. 3e«er alfe SJetSvedjer ^(it bie (Sefege 
 be0 Sftnbe« fe$t oft gettoc^cn (or uerle^t). 9. ©etne Stuggakn entfpra^en feincm 
 ginlommen gar ni^t. 10. S3cr fflaucr brifi|t b(i« fiorn. 11. $ft6en ©te ntetnen SRe= 
 genWirm gettommen? 12. 2Dtl|eIm f«gt, baf er itjtt genommen ^it. is. 3c^ Uie 
 S^vefte^cim, ■geutt SRalti, gejlern in Scipjig getroffcn. 14. 2)cr Sciger '^at ben ^cifen 
 gcfroffen (or gefdjoffen). 15. 3)«3 .ffinb ^t fcinen BaU tn3 SBaffcr geworfen. 16. 
 S)cr Saumetflet (or Strc^iteft') Ijat cinen feit WBnen 3)I«n fur bie neue fiivSe entttor= 
 fen. 17. flati gtiebrid^ ©c[)intel, bet Berii'§nite|}e Saumeifiet beS neunje^nten 3a^v= 
 :^unbert3, tjat ben 3)tfln bti 9ltten SKufeum^ in Serlin cntwotfen. 18. 3)ot«bam wnb 
 Serlin finb buti% eine gifenta^n BctSunben. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. S)«3 SHot^e 3)Jeer unb ba? 3?lit'teIIanbifc^e 5Kcet (Mediterranean) finb burd) ben 
 ©ues=i?anftl setJunben. 2. 2)ev S.mal ifi lOO cnglif^e 3»eiten, or 25 beutfilje WltiUn 
 (see page 424) long, 126 gug iveit unb 20 Sug tief. 3. §ett Stioi? ©enefelbev, ein 
 (irmet ©cingei iaxi Si^eatev jn 5BJvin$cn, Tjat bie Stt^ograrttc im Saljvc 1798 erfunben. 
 4. .^enbrit .^ubfon ^at ben ^ubfon.glnp im Sft'^re 1608 entbccEt. 
 
 ?funfunbjti)flttjigfte Scltion, 
 Exercise 49. 
 
 1. Have you read to-day's paper? 2. No, I have not seen it yet. 3. The 
 merchant has measured the cloth. 4. Th^surveyor measures the field. 5. Do 
 you like fruit? 6. Yes, I like it very much. 7. The child is eating an apple. 
 8. It has eaten the bread and butter, and drunk the milk. 9. The horse is eating 
 the hay. 10. Charles has forgotten his book. 11. Ah! Freddy, thou art stepping 
 on the beautiful pinks and tulips. 12. Count von Bernsdorf represented the 
 King of Prussia at the European Congress in- Paris. 18. The peasant is dig- 
 ging a new well. 14. The hunter is striking his dog, because he has bitten the 
 man. 15. My servant will carry the apples and pears home. 16. Miss Franz 
 •wore a black silk dress yesterday evening. 17. One good turn deserves another. 
 
36 teachbe's companion. 
 
 10. This morning I oaugM fourteen trout. 19. Mr. Steinbaolier received us in 
 a very friendly manner. 20.1 considerhim an honest man. 21. The clerk 
 has received his salary. 22. The Library at Dresden contains 300,000 volumes 
 and 2800 manuscripts. 23. Where is Senry ? 24. He is sleeping yet. 25. He 
 has already slept too long. 26. Where is William ? 2T. He is in the garden ; 
 I will call him. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. ®ct aipfcl is an original Germanic word. For other examples of pf in 
 Grerman' in the place of p in English (or in words of Latin origin in German 
 language), see § 49, 2, 26. 
 
 2. The word ^DtnmiS' has been introduced into the German, from the French 
 within the last century. 
 
 3. Xcr Wteffct=the measurer, surveyor, is from incffcn=io measure (see p. 316). 
 i. The singular of tic 5Bicne is from the plural (die biiii) of the Middle-Ger. 
 
 singular die bir (yet used in some dialects); the Old-German bird,pird was de- 
 rived from the Italian pei'a, wliioh was also a singular formed from the Latin 
 i>lxiTBl ptrum. The French ^oire and English ^eac have the same origin.. 
 
 5. !S>ie ^clH is a modification of baS 9tagclein=a small nail (from tet Stagel= 
 jmll)f a name given during the Middle Ages to the dove. Under the influence 
 of the Dutch and Lower German dialects (§ 26), the form negelkin (ioi^igel- 
 c7tm=nagelein} was introduced. This was modified to Stelte, and the gender was 
 changed from the neuter to the feminine. From a similarity of odor of the 
 clove, the name Snelte was afterward applied to thepi7i7c, which had previously 
 been known by the name of (SraSIiluinc. 
 
 6. The Anglo-Saxon had an adverb geome^amu The English verb yearn is 
 from the same root. 
 
 7. ®o8 §eii, and the English hay, are from ^amn=to hew, cut, meaning orig- 
 inally grass that has been cut down. 
 
 S-iinfjigrtc 2lufoa6e. 
 
 1. .^o6m ©te bte ©cWic^te bet beutfc^cn Siteratur son §einric^ Surj gelefen ? 2. 3$ ■ 
 5aSe fie spv etntgen Wltmlm gelauft, akr ic^ Vo'e ftc no^ ni*t flclefen. s. ^aicti ©ie 
 baa Suc§ gemeffen ? 4. 3a, eS iji bveipig encn tang. 5. SBaS effcn bte Sndbm ? 6. 
 3o5flntt ipt einen Stufel, unb aBittjelm ifl cine SBtrne. 7. £)a« 3)fcrb $at baS ^cu ge* 
 freffcK. 8. 2)ie ©c^iiter tjatcn il;re 5lufga6cn (ober Ceftionen) Devgeffen. 9. ©ie tiaten 
 auf bte Suliie' getveten. ' . 10. 2)ev fflaucr $at einen tiefen SBvunnen gegraBcn. ii. 23cr 
 SnftJe ■^at ben §unb gcf(I)fa3en. 12. S)er Siener ^at bic Slepfel unb bie fflirnen nac& 
 ©aufe getwgen. l3.2Btt^etm ^at gefletn Sltenb einen Wwnrjen SBod unb cine wcipc 
 Sffiejle gctragen. 14. 3i$ '^aBe gejiern'tiinf Sorellcn gefangen. 15. 9)tofeffot Sauct 
 fcit fte fe:^r frcunbltcf) cmpfangen. 16. S)ie ffli6IiotI)ef in SBien cnt^flt liter (or nte^r 
 (iI8) 300,000 Soinbe unb i6,ooo ^anb^riften. 17. ^oitn ©ie 3^te ^eutige Seitung 
 et^atten ? 18. ^m SrauS ^at ^eule SiZotgcn einen fflrief »on feinem ©i^wager, §cvtn 
 Stumentl)a(, et'^alten. 19. ■^evv griebWnbct f«gt, bag ct fein neue« §au« ticrlaufen 
 wirb. 20. SBarum tsivb er ba« neue ^sai niiJ)t k'^alten ? 21. 2)a« altc $au« iji U= 
 quemcr unb ttSrmer aW ba« neue ^mi. 22.3ii ba8 j?inb Iran!? 23. 3a, «6ev bet 
 Sftjt fagt, bag eS lange genug gefi^tafcn I)af. 
 
KEY TO THE TIEST PART. 37 
 
 Additioual Sentences. 
 1. Iiatcn ®k 3t)ve Ijeutiije 3eitung fcftun trl)cilten? 2. Sflcitt, bet SBvieftrciuer I)(it fte 
 no^ nidjt seivac^t. 3. Sie Slflot-SSibliotljel' in 9^cm g)ov! etitljcilt 140,000 Sanbe.' 4. 
 2)ie fbniglidje S3iWtot|ct in 2)!itncl)cn cntl)aU ungefci|v 900,000 Scinfce, unb 22,000 
 §ant)f(^riften. 
 
 ©ctOSunbjUJiinsigfte Scllioit. 
 Exercise 51. 
 
 1. The hunter's dog has Ijitten the peasant's cow. 2. A rattlesnake bit the 
 peasant's son day before yesterday, while he was picking huckleberries (or 
 whortleberries) on the mountain. 3. The child is trying to take hold of (or is 
 grasping after) its image in , the looking-glass (mirror). 4. The policeman 
 caught the thief just (or immediately) after he. had stolen the money. 5. 1 do 
 not understand (or I can not imagine) why Frederick has not written to us, 
 6. Who was that that whistled (who has been whistling, or who whistled) ? 7. 
 Who has been cutting the book? 8. The tailor is cutting the cloth. 9. Mr. 
 Karfunkel has lent {or loaned) the merchant 800 thalers. 10. Mr. Raumer in 
 his letter has described his trip to the Eiesengebirge in a very brilliant {o^- live- 
 ly) manner. 11. The peasant is driving the cattle to pasture. 12. You- are 
 pouring oil into the fire. 13. The waiter has poured the wine into the glasses. 
 14. You did not hit the mark; you shot too high. 15. The Museum is closed to- 
 day. 16. Mr. Burckhardt lost his pocket-book yesterday. 17. Four horses are 
 drawing the wagon. 18. Mr. Braun has drawn upon Mr. Dietrich to-day for 
 600 thalers. 19. The clouds are moving toward the south. 20. The soldiers 
 fought very bravely. 21. The basket-maker is making a basket. 22. Mary has 
 made a beautiful wreath. 23. He lifted the basket upon his shoulders. ' 24. Ho 
 raised his voice and cried for help. 25. The thief lied and deceived (or cheated) 
 the merchant. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. S)cr Sorb is from the Latin corhis (masc. or fem.). 
 
 2. 3>er (Spiegel is from the Latin speculum, which is itself from specere=to see 
 (allied to the German verb fpat)en=to spy). 
 
 3. 'S^ ©rtjlnnge is derived from the imperfect tense of the verb f(I)lingcn 
 (fc^lang, gcfcOlungcn)=to slink, sneak. The gender changed from the masculine 
 (Old-German, der slango; Middle-German, del' slange) to the feminine during the 
 Middle-German period. - 
 
 Bern. The English word snake is from the Anglo-Saxon verb snican=to sneak. 
 _ 4. For many remarks concerning the relations between the irregular verbs 
 of the German with words in other branches of the Indo-European languages, 
 and for many derivatives in the German languaglpihat are formed from these 
 verbs, see § 145. 
 
 Sttietanbfiinfjioftc SlufgnSe. 
 
 1. 35cr $unb ^at iai Rinb flcMffen. 2. ©ne fflatvwWttns* W Me fflauerin ^eufc 
 SDIovgctt gcBiffen. 3. S)er 9)oli8ctbtener Jot ben 2)icS ergrtffen, gleii^ na^bem er bem 
 $errn 3Biclanb iai gjottemonnoie gejlo'^len tjatte. 4. gs tjfctft. 6. 55er So^ yd)npibtf 
 
38 
 
 teacher's companion. 
 
 bai ffitob. 6. 9)vofcffi)t $aufcr :^at in fcinei ©eWtdjte ©cutWIdnM bte ©c^Mjt 
 ict Setpjig -fe^r leb^aft tet^vtetm. 7. Sev Sauer '^at baa Siiiij auf bte Sffieibe getrietett. 
 8. Et Ijflt tiur Del in« Sew" Sfgoffen- 9-'^w SagEr ,$ftt I)eute jWei $afcn gEWoffcn. 
 10. ©ie fflt6Kot[)et unb bft3 2Rufcum fmb ^eute gefi^Ipffen. 11. So'^ann Ijat feme bcut= 
 fc^e (Stammatit gefievn serloten.' 12. 3a, aJ>er er ^at fie t)cute SSotgcn auf feinc« ffiru= 
 berS Sif(i^e gefunben. 13. S^uv ein 9)fetb jie^t ben SBagen. 14. S^ wevbe ^cute einen 
 SBedjfel »on 575 S£ij\x. «uf ^evvn Sliebner jie^cn. 15. S)ev fior6mai|ev Ijat ^cute 5Wov» 
 gen jttei .Sbi-Je gefli)(l)tcn. 16. SRarie 5«t einen fc^onen Svanj gefloc^ten. 17. ©ie 
 f(^teten urn §iilfc ! 18. 2)er Saf^enbiei :^at bem Saufmann 3430 S^lt. gcjlo'^Ien. 19. 
 Sic bctttfc()en ©olbaten ^akn in bev ©i^Iac^t fel)v tapfev gcfoc^ten. 
 
 <Siefienunbatoanjtg[te Seltion. 
 
 Exercise 53. 
 
 l.Do you know where Mr. Brinkenhofer resides? 2. No, I do not know 
 where he resides. 3. 1 did not know that Mr. Schoneberg was (is) in Berlin. 
 4. Do you know Mr. Trautmann ? 5. Oh, yes ! we knew him when we were in Ger- 
 many. 6. What are the names of these flowers (how do you name or call these 
 flowers)? 7. This is a hyacinth, and that one is a forget-me-not. 8. What is 
 burning? 9. The house opposite us is on fire. 10. The cook has roasted the 
 coffee. 11. Mr. Weissmandel has brought you a letter from Mr. Kramer in Vi- 
 enna. 12. Mr. Heidel brought (sonie) news from our uncle in Magdeburg. 
 13. Charles, do you know where my pencil is ? 14. No, I have not seen it to-day. 
 15. Have you read the news from America in to-day's paper ? 16. No, I have 
 not seen to-day's paper yet. . 
 
 NOTES. 
 1. The attention of the stndent may be called to the analogies and differences 
 between the changes in the German and English irregular verbs, as in 
 
 binben, 
 
 banb, 
 
 gebunben, 
 
 ^ bind, 
 
 bound. 
 
 bound. 
 
 pnben, 
 
 fanb. 
 
 gefunben. 
 
 find. 
 
 found. 
 
 found. 
 
 flngen. 
 
 fang, 
 
 gefungen, 
 
 sing. 
 
 sung or sang. 
 
 sung. 
 
 beginnen, 
 
 Segann, 
 
 begonnen. 
 
 begin. 
 
 Ijpgunoj'began, 
 
 begun 
 
 gewtttnen, 
 
 gewann. 
 
 gewonnen. 
 
 win, 
 
 won. 
 
 won. # 
 
 ft)tnncn, 
 
 ffann, 
 
 gefijonnen, 
 
 spin, 
 
 spun. 
 
 spun. 
 
 brei^en, 
 
 ixaii, 
 
 gebvoc^cm 
 
 break. 
 
 broke. 
 
 brolc-en. 
 
 fisrcc^cn, 
 
 f))ra*. 
 
 gcfpri)d|en. 
 
 speak. 
 
 spoke; 
 
 spok-en. 
 
 geben, 
 
 Ba5, 
 
 gegeben. 
 
 give. 
 
 gave. 
 
 give-n. 
 
 fe'^en, 
 
 fat), 
 
 flcfe'^en, 
 
 see. 
 
 saw. 
 
 see-n. 
 
 effen, 
 
 ai. 
 
 gegeffen. 
 
 eat. 
 
 ate. 
 
 eat-en. 
 
 fc^tagen, 
 
 f^tug. 
 
 glrolagen. 
 
 (slay. 
 
 ' slew. 
 
 slai-n). 
 
 tragen, 
 
 ttng, 
 
 getvagen. 
 
 (draw. 
 
 drew. 
 
 draw-n). 
 
 I) alien, 
 
 *ielt. 
 
 ge'^ alien, 
 
 hold. 
 
 held. 
 
 held. 
 
 bcigen. 
 
 big. 
 
 gebiffen, 
 
 bite, 
 
 bit. 
 
 bitt-euorbit. 
 
 fDleigcn, 
 
 fufie. 
 
 gefpliffen. 
 
 split. 
 
 split. 
 
 split. 
 
 trctten, 
 
 ttteb, 
 
 getticben. 
 
 drive. 
 
 drove. 
 
 drive-n. 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 
 
 39 
 
 fd)icpen, 
 
 fedjtcn, 
 
 Bvingen, 
 
 bentcn, 
 
 fcnnen. 
 
 foi^t, 
 lannte, 
 
 scfc^offcn, 
 gefoc^ten, 
 
 geSrac^t, 
 gctannt, 
 
 shoot, 
 
 fight, 
 
 bring, 
 think, 
 know, 
 
 shot, 
 
 fought, 
 
 brought, 
 
 thought, 
 
 knew. 
 
 shot. 
 
 fought. 
 
 brought. 
 
 thought. 
 
 know-n. 
 
 2. The attention of the student may be drawn also to the number of cases in 
 wliioh the English verb has become regular, while the German verb has re- 
 mained irregular, as : 
 
 gewinnen, 
 
 gcttann, 
 
 gcwotmcn, 
 
 gain, 
 
 gained. 
 
 gained. 
 
 flerbtn, 
 
 liart, 
 
 geflovten, 
 
 starve. 
 
 starved. 
 
 starved. 
 
 bveWcK, 
 
 bro|4, 
 
 getirofiJ)en, 
 
 thresh. 
 
 threshed. 
 
 threshed. 
 
 ttofdjen, 
 
 wuW, 
 
 gemaWm, 
 
 wash, * 
 
 washed. 
 
 washed. 
 
 fi^reicn, 
 
 Wtte,, 
 
 geWrtem, 
 
 0^7, 
 
 cried. 
 
 cried. 
 
 ^eim, 
 
 ^oi, 
 
 gci66en, 
 
 heave. 
 
 heaved. 
 
 heaved. 
 
 liigcn, 
 
 log- 
 
 getogen, 
 
 lie, . 
 
 lied. 
 
 lied. 
 
 3. In many cases the Germanic verbs have been replaced, in the English 
 language, by verbs of Romance or Latin origin, as : 
 
 evftntien, to invent. 
 SetflJVec^en, to promise, 
 entwevfen, to project.- 
 
 SevttetCtl, to represent. 
 
 ennjfangen, to receive, 
 entlalten, to contain. 
 
 6c|flten, to retain. 
 Begreifen, to comprehend, 
 tetvugetti to deceive. 
 
 -Bern. On the other hand, in the English is retained the Germanic verb to write 
 (Anglo-Saxon writan [allied to Old-German rizan, New-German r C t p e tl] =to 
 separate with violence^ to cut in, to write), while the German language has fdjtcis 
 belt (from the Latin scribere). 
 
 aSicntiibfitnfstgffc Stiifgafic. 
 
 1. Seitnen ©ie bett ^ertn ©cncral son 8i(l)fenjlctti ? 2. SJcin, id) fennc itjtt ntc[)t. 
 3. SBic nenncn ©ie biefen gifi) ? 4. Sicfer gif^ t|l cine gorcHe. 5. J)a« Seuer Iirennt 
 nt(^t. 6. 23er ^oi? ^ot ben fiaffee noc^ nii^t geJvnnnt. 7. 23aa $au3 be3 .Jien-n Kraft 
 6rennt. 8. SBiffen Sie, tso ^crt ai^jrec^t ifi ? 9. Sr i|^ jegt in SUiinc^en. 10. tol, 
 weipt bu, wo SKexftnbcr son |>um!ioIbt geilovSen i|i ? 11. Stleranbet son #umSolbt 
 |lav6 in Serltn am 6. SJJdi 1859. 12. J?inber, istffet (or wilt) 31)v, tsie alt SdjiHer 
 tsor, aK et jlarJ ? 13. Sr war 45 Sajre unb fecfes SKonate olt. 14. SBann '^aten Sie 
 •§etrn SRofenierg gettoffen ? 15. SSJiv ^aicn it)n (jeute SBJorgcn auf (or in) ber ©ttape 
 geh-iJffen. 16. SBo ^ajl bu bie bcutfc^e Ovammatit gefunbcn? 17. 3c!) I)»6e Pt a«f 
 meineS Stubera Sijc^e gefunben. 
 
 Wt^tunbjtoaitjigftc Seftion. 
 
 Exercise 55. 
 
 1. He is at home. 2. He was at home. 3. He has been at home. 4. He had 
 been at home. 5. He will have been at home. 6. The weather has now become 
 very hot. 7. Mr. Klein has become a merchant. 8. The weather had already 
 become very hot when we were in Italy. 9. How did you come from the city ? 
 10. We rode (in a carriage). 11. Frederick went to the city on foot, but Wil- 
 liam rode. 12. Tho horse sprang over the ditch. 13. The pencil lay on the 
 
40 teacher's companion. 
 
 table. 14. The books are lying on the tables. 15. The child was already dead 
 when the father came home. 16. The hunter's dog has followed him to the 
 forest. 17. 1 will go to the Museum, but Mr. Kranzler will probably already 
 have gone home. 
 
 ©ctftgunijfjiufstgftc Stitfgnie. 
 
 1. 3|1 $err granj fc&on Tjitx gewcfen? 2. Vidn, er ijl mdji ^k getBefca. 3. 
 ©«« ffiettet ii^ Mr Mt gctuorbcn. i. SBo t(l $erv ©tromJetg ? 5. Er ifi Ijcute n«d& 
 sOTflgbrturg sesanacn. 6. 3fl §evr 3)Je9erI)eim nai$ 3)oKi)am gefa'^vett? 7. Jleitt, cr 
 i|l gmtten. 8. SBit finb ^eute 3J!orgen ju Sug nci^ e^avlolteniurg gegangen. 9. ^ctt 
 SIBtEbnct ijl noil nii^t nac^ §auje gefommen. 10. Stoln liegt an bcm linten Ufcr beS 
 gJleinS. 11. Sire beutWe Seitung liegt auf bem S^ifc^e. 12. 2)te ^o^Ux iei ^ma 
 gviebMnber Wat Won gefior6en, e^e er mi) ^aufe fam. 13. SBen \u3jtn ©tc? 14. 
 Sdjfuc^e lievvn SBieganb. 15. Er t|l ^eutc nad) 2)re?bcn gegangen; morgen ttivb er 
 ^iet fcin. 
 
 SlcununbjiDanjigjte Settiott. 
 Exercise 57. 
 
 1. The tailor has promised to send the coat to me this morning. 2. It is my 
 intention to go to Erlangen the day after to-morrow. 3. 1 wish to speak with 
 Mr. Schnorr. 4. He is not at home just at this moment. 5. It is becoming late ; 
 it is high time to go home. C. This house is for sale immediately. 7. Here 
 are four furnished rooms to let. 8. A fine suite of apartments iu Friedrichs 
 Street, with gas and water, is to let. 0. Wb hare no time to lose. 10. Instead 
 of keeping the house, Mr. Sigel has sold it. 11. Frederick Kraft has gone to 
 Vienna to visit his grandfather. 12. Gustavus Muhlheimer has gone to Berlin, 
 to study at the university in thatplaoe. 13. Smoking is a bad habit. 14.'What 
 is to be done ? 15. Mary and Catharine are now learning to play the piano. 
 16. Have you taken » walk this morning? 17. No, I took a ride (on horse- 
 back). 18. To day we will go and take a walk. 19. Why do you remain 
 sitting {or do you keep your seat) ? 20. He praises the book without having 
 read it. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. ®«3 ©(i9 is related originally to bcr ©cifl (see § 49, 2, 7); it has been in- 
 troduced from the English into the German language within the last one hun- 
 dred years. 
 
 2. 9liigcnIi(icCIitI> is formed from in Wnambli^=moment (see § 86, 2, 6). 
 
 8td)tuitSfiiflf5i8ftc Stitfgak. 
 
 1. Dct Saufmann M^ftuS), mi iai XnSi gefletn ju WtiJen. 2. £3 ijl fctnc SMifi^t, 
 ntovgen naiJ) SlugSBurg ju geljen. 3. 3i$ ttiinWc ein beutf(J)e3 SBiJrtcrJu^ ju laufen. 
 4. S)a3 grope ^a\xi unS gegcniiter t|l ju Bettaufen. 5. ■&ier ifl einc ^crrWafrtiiJ^e aBo5= 
 nung ju sermicf^cn. 6. S)«« grope ^mi in ber aCillelm^fhape ifJ (oglet^ ju scrtaufen. 
 7. Slnllatt u6et ^iiln ju tommen, ifi er iiber grcinlfuvt gefommen. 8. 3c& '^ate leine Seit 
 8U serliercni id) geje Ijente Sl6enb nac& SeiMig. 9. „®ekn ifi feligcr aW nel^men." 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PAET. 41 
 
 10. SBatum Metit tot fi^tn. 11. SBaa ifl ju ttjun? 12. g« t|l bie '^iiillle Sett ju 
 flc^cn, unb bO(| ^at bcv Sijneibev mciticn UetervoS no^ nicl)t geivci^t. 13. ^ixx Xitixiclj 
 i(l fpasttvcn geaongcn. 14. 3i| wei-be ftastcven vcittn {or citim ©(jasievvitt mafteii). 
 iS.Sie fmb fpaitercn gcfatjvcn (oc fte ina^en tine ©iJdstcrfa^rt). 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 1. 2)ev Svief i|i nirocnbS (nowhere) ju pnben. 2. §evr JJii^lct le'^rte iticine (Bc&»c= 
 fier bci^ Slasicr ftieten. 3. 3^ :^btte gtciulein Sctked^t ein I5«(>r fc^v Wine Sieber fm^ 
 gen. 4. 33) ?a6e ^eute Sltenb fe'^r ijtel ju f^un. 5. SJorgen frii^ (early to-morrow 
 morning) wetbe id) fpasicveti 3cT)cn. 6. ■S)evt ^okrfleiii ttijntdjt mit |icvvn |)irsel ju 
 fprec^en. 
 
 Srcifigftc 8e!tton. 
 ' Exercise 59, 
 
 1. On the following day we went to Vienna. 2. From onr house we have a 
 very charming view. 3. Vienna is the largest and the most important city in 
 Anstria. 4. Nuremberg had a' brilliant history in the Middle Ages. 5. In its in- 
 dustrial relations (or with reference to its manufactures), Nuremberg is now 
 the most important city in Bavaria. 6. The thirteenth, enlarged, and fully and 
 newly revised edition of the History of German Literature is now to he had in 
 all bookstores. 7. New and second-hand books in ancient and modern lan- 
 guages are for sale very cheap in the bookstore of Kreischner and Kodenberg. 
 8. The treaty between the U-nited States and the North German Confederation is 
 now concluded. 9. The University of Berlin, founded in 1809, is now the most 
 frequented and the best in Germany. 10. The number of the professors is a 
 hundred and ninety-four j the number of the students is over 3000. 11. The 
 University of Bonn, which was founded in 1818, is the youngest university in 
 Germany. 12. The number of the students is over 1000; the number of the 
 professors is a hundred and six. 13. Professor Schmidt is professor of modern 
 languages in the university of this place. 14. Albert Durer was the most 
 famous German painter during the Middle Ages. 
 
 ©c^jigftc SfufooSe. 
 
 1. S(m fotgenbert Sage gingcn Tte uBev grantfutt naij fliiln. 2. S)er im So'^ve 1520 
 BoHenbete S)om in SKagbeliuvg \\t untcv (or get)ijtt ju) ben fd)onficn fiir^cn in 2)eutW= 
 lanb. 3. SJom S^uvme iei Somce Ijatcn mir etne gtinj Wiine SluiSjtc^t. 4. fflreSIau, 
 bie groite .unb IJcbeutenbjtc ©tabt in ©d)lcjtcn, |at J60,ooo Einwo^ncv. 5. S)ie im 
 3(i^»>l348 gcfliftetc Untsevfttot ju ^Jvag war bie erfle UniBcvruat in S)e«tWIanb. 6. 
 35ie Uniserfitoit inSeijjsig, wclc^e im 3a|v 1409 gcfliftct (or gcgviinbet) ttuvbe, war bie 
 8»eite Unitjerfttot in Deutfdjlanb. 7. S5ie jweiunhswanjigfle Dermeljrte unb DbHig ncu 
 bcavteitete StuSgate bcr bcutfc^cn ©rammatit son 23r. ^c^fe i|l jcjt ju $aSen. 8. Oe* 
 tvau^tc ffliic^cr in aUcn Sfixaijcn finb Ijier iitlig ju sevfaufen. 9. Ser am 24. Waxi 
 <\n ber ©i^winbfu^t tjliipd) serflortenc .^crr 3)vDfeffot a3el)t war ber altejJe spvofeffct 
 an bet I)icftgen Unisevrttot. lo. Sev SJetttag jwiWctt ben SSereinigten etaatcn unb 
 Oejlcrrcic^ tjl nod) nid)t tt6geyd)toffcn. 11. Scr im 3at)ve 1867 Bev|iDr6cne 9)ctev Bon 
 eornettua t»av ber Betii^mtejie SBJalev bea ncun5ct)ntcn Sa^v^unbcrt^. 
 
42 teacher's companion. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. 23a6 tm 3a|te 1640 gefttftcte ^atsarb EoUcgc ijl ba« attejle EoUese in l>ra 3Set= 
 cintgten ©taotcn *)on Slmettfa. 2. S)ie Ic^te Diittig neu SewBEitete, fet)v »evmel)tte unti 
 sevtefferte 5tuaga6c t>e3 SEBeSjler'^en aBovtevbuc^eS bet cn9tifiJ)en ©i)raa)e ifl (in ncum 
 unb oud) in gebrau^en gxemptocn) in biefct Sui|t)finbtuug iiUigji su I)akn. 3. Scr 
 am 15. SWai's 176T gejorene nnb dm 8. Suli 1845 Devflovticne Slnbrcw SaSfon W« bet 
 pefiente gtvaftbent bet SSeteinigten ©taaten. 
 
 ©inuttbbreiftgfte Seftion, 
 Exercise 61. 
 
 1. 1 can not read his letter at all; 2. Charles says that he can not find his 
 German grammar. 3. Can you go and take a walk with us ? i. No, we can 
 not take a walk with you to-day. 5. Mr. Kramer says that he could not read 
 the letter. 6. Mr. Karl Hartman knows German and Spanish. 7. Why did 
 Mary not sing the German song? S. She could not (sing it). 9. He will not 
 be able to read the letter. 10. 1 must write a letter to Mr. Massman to-day. 
 11. Mr. Dietrich told me that he must go to Hamburg to-day, in order to meet 
 some friends from America. 12. We could not remain any longer; we had to go 
 home. 13. 1 had to write so many letters this morning that I could not go to 
 the Museum. 14. To-morrow we will go to Dresden, and the day after to-morrow 
 we will go to Prague. 15. Mr. Sohnorr wishes a teacher for his two children ; 
 the teacher must be able to speak English, German, and French fluently. 16. 
 I have not been able to find the third edition of the History of Germany in the 
 entire city. 
 
 Buieimtbfetfjjigfte SlufoaSe* 
 
 1. 33) ton meinen SBIeiiltft nitljt pnben. 2. gtij, IcinnP bu mit mein beutWei? SBiit= 
 
 tev'6u($ tringcn? 3. Dei Sel)rer Idnn nii^t I)bren, Kdi wit fagcn. 4. fflit tonnten nid)t 
 
 Ijiiten, it)(il ei fngte. 5. ©ie ttctben bicjm Sticf ntc^t lefen liinncn. 6. tot, bein SSa= 
 
 let fagt, bap bu gleic^ nad) $aufe get)en muit. 1. SDir miiffcn bicfcn Sitef ffler S.im= 
 
 Ijool md) Slmerita Widen. 8.31$ 5aie ntd)t mit tijnen ftiajiften ge^n fBnncni ii) 
 
 mupte ju $aufe ilditn unb meine beutWe Stufgak fd)rei{en. 9. .^ett fli-aft Witb fein 
 
 neuea $au3 setlaufen muffen. 10. 2Bit fonnen mwgen ntc^t nci^ Stug^iutg gct)eni 
 
 Wit wetben motgen md) ?Jiitn6erg get)en, unb iitevmorgen wetben tutt md) Stug^turg 
 
 gc^en miiffcn. 11. .^ert Biafjn toiinfdjt cincn J?ommi3 i et mup SJeutW icUn\ii fct)rEt= 
 
 ten unb frtedjen Bnnen. 12. SBatum '^ftien ®ie ben Stief nid^t gclefcn? 13. SEBit 
 
 ^ftien ca nic^t getonnt. • 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. Siinnen Sie mit cine SteSnabel gcScn? 2. So, '^tet ijl einc. 3. SBit ge'^cn jefet 
 
 nac^ bem Eenttal 9)att, IBnnen ©ie mit mi getjen ? i. SZein, ti tint mit fc^t leib (see 
 
 page 161), bap ic^ ^eufe nic^t mit S^nen ge^en lann, id) mup '^eute nac^ 9?e»tttt getjen; 
 
 din iifietmotgen wcvbe t(^ nac^ bem 5>«tl grijcn IBnnen. 5. Iiakn ©ie bem 3immct» 
 
 man gefagt, ba? et bie genflctlaben (see page 426) vevatitcn mup? 6.3fl, abet ct 
 
 fagt, bap ct e« '^eutc ntcl)t rt)un tann. 7. 'Sn ^od) \)(d in bet ganjen ©tabt teinen ©d= 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PAET. 43 
 
 Btociuitbbrei^igfte Scftion. 
 Exercise 63. 
 
 1. Do you wish to ride to the city (to town) with us ? 2. 1 have no time to 
 go to the city this morning; I must write a letter to my parents. 3. 1 will not 
 remain longer here in Leipzig, the weather is so cold, wet, and disagreeable; I 
 shall go to Heidelberg the day after to-morrow, 4. We desired to go to Potsdam 
 yesterday to see the great parade, but it rained all day long, a^d we remained 
 at home the entire day. 5. Why did you not wish to sing the song yesterday 
 evening? 6. 1 was willing to sing it, but I could not; I have not learned the 
 song yet. 7. Mr. Kraft will not wish to buy the house. 8. Mother, I would 
 lilie very much to go with Henry Kurz to the Museum to-day. 9. Oh yes, you 
 may go with him if you wish it, but you must not stay too long; you have not 
 written your German exercises yet. 10. This cloth is much too dear ; we will 
 not buy it. 11. He may go and take a walk if he wishes to, but we will remain 
 at home. 12. Do you wish this book ? 13. No, I will take that (one). 14. 1 
 will send it to you, if you wish me to. 15. Where do you reside ? 16. We reside 
 in Zimmer Street, opposite the new house of Mr. Kiefstahl. 17. You may do 
 what you like. 
 
 ilOTBS. 
 
 1. In German the present tense is used for the future to a much greater 
 extent than in English (§ 132, 1). 
 
 2. Por derivates from miigcn, see page 316. 
 
 aSteruttbfctfjsigfte SfufgoJe. 
 
 1. SBcvbcn ©te tjeute mSj 3)ot«bam ge^tn (gedra ©ie Ijeute md) 9)otSbam)? 
 2. aBiinWcn ©ie ^eutc na* gjotsbam ju ge^cn ? 3. SBodert Sie iiefen Svief lefcn ? 
 4. aJon mm iji cv? 5. ®r i|l son wnfetm.Sveunb ■^crni tiin; cr iji jefct in Stem. 
 6. SBavum SDoIlen ©ie nti^t mil un« nad) im SJufeum ge^cn 7. Sd) mug ju $aufe Met» 
 ten unij einen 33vte( «n meincn SBrubct Wvei6en. 8. S'iinnen ©ie il)n ni^t tjeutc SlJcnb 
 fi^teiSen (or wevben ©ie i|m ^eute Sttenb nidjt f^tcikn tiinnen) ? 9. SJein, ^eute 
 Sttenb ttcrbe ii^ §cvrn ffic^t tefu^en miiffen (or mug ii$ ^ma Sct)t meine S[uftBar= 
 tung mai^e'n). 10. ©inb ©ie ^eute 3)?orgen nad) bent SKufeum gegongen (or gingcn 
 ©ie ^eute SKorgen nad) bem SWufeum) ? 11. 3a, (iter wiv Uitn bie Oemcilbe nic^t 
 fc|cn tiinnen, weil ba« SOTufeum geWIoffen war. 12. SBelc^ ®emcilbe ^aim ©ie fc'^en 
 woUen? 13. 3c& woUte baa 6erii|mte ®ematbe son ^ottcin fe^cn. 14.3* t)aBe ti 
 oft felen woDen, aBer id) ^(Ae ea W je|t nie fe^cn liinncn. 15. if art, bu fannjl fvajie= 
 ren ge'^en, mm bu wiDll. 16. 3d) wag biefc^ SBuc^ gat ntd)t C^aten) i eS ifl gat nid)t 
 tntcteffant. 17. $etv Se^ctlcin fagt, bag ct son fcincm §aufe ben'St^utm be« 2)ome« 
 JU gttidutg fe^en fantt. 
 
 S)rciuttbbrei|igfte Seftion. 
 Exercise ^. 
 
 1. What shall we do? 2. Who is to (or who shall) go to the city to get the 
 book, Henry or I? 3. Let Henry go (or Henry must go); you have not yet 
 
44 teachee's companion. 
 
 written your Grerman exercise. 4. 1 ought to have written a letter to Mr. Put- 
 kammer yesterday. 5. Mr. Rahn went to America in 1845 ; lie is supp'osed to 
 liave died there about four years ago. 6. Mr. Prenzler is supposed to be very 
 rich. 7. What is your (honored) name, if I may ask. 8. My name is Gustavus 
 Bendler. 9. Gentlemen, you must not smoke {or smoking is riot allowed) here. 
 10. He dare not come without his father's permission. 11. (Dear) mother, may 
 I go and take a, walk with William Ackermann and Henry Kuhnen? 12. 
 Have you finished all your lessons? 13. 1 have finished my German exercise, 
 but I have not finished my French exercise ; but I can finish it this evening. 
 14. Yes, you may go, but you must come home early. 15. The weather had be- 
 come so hot in Alexandria that we did not dare remain there longer. 16. From 
 Alexandria we went directly to Smyrna. 
 
 Secfjgunbfci^jiflfte STufgoDe. 
 
 1. SEBaS foU W) i|m fagen ? 2. 3($ werbe (i^m) fagen, iftf i$ ^cute nic^f ge'^eK fann. 
 3. ■geute Wstxi) foUte ii^ einen Srtef an mernm fflruber Wvcikn. 4. im JfeUe foU 
 •tcr reii^jle 3Kann in ber ©tabt fein. 5. ^m Sets'^ttu? ifi im Sfl^rt 1858 nac^ ZnoA 
 gegangen; et foU watjvEnt) be« Sttegea geflotkn fein. 6. S)«f id^ frogen tt)a« bicfcS 
 S3ut^ fojlete (or waS bet 9)tei3 biefe« Sua)e3 i^x) ? 7. 2)er 3)rei3 biefe« SudjeS war 
 7 SE^lr. 20 ©gr. 8. Er mag fagen waS cr will, ic& werbe ba« ©emaibe nic()t tafcn i ii$ 
 mag eS gar ni^t. 9. SEBaa i|l i^r geeT)rter S^ame, Wcnn id) ftagcn barf? 10. ffinbev, 
 ■^iet biitfet (or biivft) i^r nic^t ftjielen ; i^r tiinnet (or lonnt) in ben ®artcn ge^en, unb 
 ba fpielcn fo »iri (or fo lange) Wte i^r ttoKet (or-woBt)' 11. ■^cute fann er io.i Suc^ 
 nid)t '^akn; ti ifi nod^ nic^t geSunben. 12. SBoKen Sie |eute mit ima na# 9)ot«bam 
 fle'^cn ? 13. 23er Strjt fagt, bap ic^ ^cute ju ^aufe MeiScn mup. 
 
 SSicrunbbrcipgPe Seltion. 
 Exercise 67. 
 
 l.I must copy the letter. 2. Charles has copied his German exercise, 3. 
 You must copy your exercise before you go out. 4. He copied his exercise 
 before he went out. 5. He says that he has not copied his exercise. 6. 
 I did not have time to copy the letter.. 7. This word is very hard {or difficult) 
 to pronounce. 8. Mr. Klein expressed his opinion very (o)- quite) plainly. 9. 
 The painter has been exhibiting his paintings; he wishes to sell them. 10. 
 AVho has taken away my Grammar? 11. We are now going to the Museum; 
 will you go with us ? 12. Do you wish to take the book with you ? 13. The re- 
 nowned architect, Schinkel, designed the large paintings in the vestibule of the 
 Museum in Berlin, but his pupil, Cornelius, executed them. 14. It began to 
 rain. 15. It had begun to rain before we went out. 16. They went out be- 
 fore it had begun to rain. 17. 1 did not know that he wished to copy the let- 
 ter. 18. When did Mr. Brown arrive? 19. He arrived yesterday evening. 20. 
 When shall you come again? 21. We will come again day after to-morrow. 
 22. The election took place yesteiday. 23. They have acquitted him. 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PAET. 45 
 
 SldjtunbfccJstgfte Slufoafie. 
 
 1. -mm ©te 31)vc Stufgaie aSgeWrteten? 2. mm, tc^ '^nk fte n»c^ ntc^t aigc^ 
 fdjvieben, ater M) wcvbe fic :S)eute a6enl> a6Wrei6en. 3. Xk\t fB'ixin ftnb Wwtr mi= 
 jufpre^en. 4. SBann tomracn ©ie wicbet (Wftnn lommen ©ie sutuff, or wann fle:^cn 
 ©te SlU'UlJ ? — according to the meaning given to the verb return). 5. SKovgcit 
 obct utctniovgrn fommcn wit astEber (or fommm wit juritif). 6. SBir tiinnm nt^t ttu3= 
 9c^en. ea fanat an ju repen. 7. $trt ifranjto f«gt, bag bet Saumetilet ben 3)Ian 
 beS nenen ©tabtjaufea au«|lenen witb. 8. .Jieute geien Wit nac^ 9)ot«bami woHen ©ie 
 mit? o.fcute fann id) nii^^t selen; bet Sivjt fagt, bap iS) $cute nic^t auSge'^cn b«tf., 
 10. 2Bann witb bie SBa^l iiaftfinbcn ? ii. ©ie witb iitctmotgen jlottftnben. 12. 28et 
 |at mein beutfdieS 3EBottet6«(ft weggenommen ? 13. Et woUte ba3 iBuc^ nic()t anne^= 
 men. 14. 2Benn bu ie|t fpajieten gC^fi, fo witfl bu beine Slufgak $eute Sltenb alf^tct= 
 Jen miiffen. , 15. 3* I)«6e Tte Won atgefilrictcn. 
 
 giinfUBbiretjjigftc Scltion. 
 Exercise 69. 
 
 1. We could not understand at all what he was saying. 2. 1 have not read 
 the book, I have only looked it over very hastily. 8. Three soldiers have gone 
 over (deserted) to the enemy. 4. The sun will soon setj we must go home im- 
 mediately. 5. It has already set. 6. They have examined the accounts of the 
 merchants very carefully, but they did not find any mistakes. 7. The surgeon 
 has probed the wound of the soldier. 8. Mr. Krause has put a very fine fence 
 around his house. ' 9. General von Bernstein has revoked the order. 10. He 
 has looked over all of his exercises. 11. They will come again (or return) to- 
 morrow. 12. He is repeating what he said to us yesterday. 13. Did you come 
 by way of Hanover and Brunswick 1 14. Yes, but I only came right through, 
 because I must meet my father in Heidelberg to-morrow. 15. We have tra- 
 versed (traveled all through) Germany. 16. The fisherman took us over. 17. 
 Mr. Dietrich has translated the History of Germany. 18. Profesor Diefenbach 
 entertained us with an extremely interesting account of his last trip in Spain. 
 19. 1 must get the book again. 20. How does the new church please you ? 21. 
 It has pleased me very much (or I like it very much). 22. You went very 
 much out of your way. 23. We wished to avoid the mountain. 24 I have 
 been trying to read the letter, but have not been able to (do it). 25. Mr. 
 Fink'enstein visited us day before yesterday evening (night before last). 26. 
 Have you translated your German exercises? 27. The tree had fallen down. 
 
 ©icJjtgfte SlufgaJe. 
 
 1. 3$ ■^aJe ben Stief nut fe^t ftiic^tig bntii^gelefcn. 2. Ste ©olbaten geljeu 
 jum geinbe iiiet. 3. 3fl bet 3Konb Won nntergegangcn ? 4. ©ie ©onne war 
 fc^on untctgegangen di Wit antamen. 5. Der fiaufmann '^at bie SRec^nungen be« 
 ©t^ttelbeta u«tetfu§t. 6. ^ett Bxmi unb $ett SBIetJct^etm '^iim Btele Scinbet butiS= 
 tetji. 7. Set giWet ^at «n« iiJetgcfeftt. 8. iim ^Snig Ijot bie OeWWte bet beutWen 
 Citetfljut iiCetfcgt. 9. gt«tt gttebl«nbet':^«t un« mit einet ffieWreitog t^ret Sleifc Don 
 
46 teacher's companion. 
 
 ^ftffltavg md) ^Etbetttrg unterl)atten. lo. SBie geffflt 31)iKii bev tteue S)Dm ? 11. 
 S)ev ®attm t|l mtt Etnem Wiincn Sflun (or ^ede) umgctcn. 12. SBaram pnt ©ie fo 
 je|r uttigegangen? 13. SKtt woUtcn ben fflevg jwi^en ©i^ijnfdb unb Ciebenei urn- 
 ge^m. 14. Sr I)at oerfu^t baS Su^ ju Mevfejett, aitv ct t)at c0 nidjt getonnt. 
 
 •Se^suubbreipgftc Srition. 
 Exercise 71. 
 
 1. Have you seen the new school-house ? 2. During the last twenty years 
 the land has made extraordinary progress. 3. Here is the way out. 4. 1 can 
 not remain longer; I must go home immediately. 5. The fourth volume of the 
 History of Architecture by Dr. Franz Kugler is now to be had in all book- 
 stores. 6. Have you seen the famous windmill in Potsdam ? 7. Mary, have 
 you seen the thimble? 8. Dr. Schmidt is Professor of the German'Ianguage in 
 a Young Ladies' Seminary in Pittsburg. 9. The steamship "Germania" ar- 
 rived yesterday evening. 10. The camel is a beast of burden, and the tiger is 
 a beast of prey. 11. The word „@ramniati(" is a foreign word. 12. Is brealc- 
 fast ready? 13. Yes, brealifast is ready. 14. The golden wedding will take 
 place to-morrow evening. 15. The express train from Leipzic has just arrived. 
 16. Can you give me a needle? 17. This morning we took a very fine walk. 
 18. The colonnade of the Museum in Berlin is a masterpiece of modern archi- 
 tecture. 19. The mainspring of my watch is broken. 20. Berlin is the capital 
 of Prussia. 21. My grandfather resided formerly in Magdeburg; he resides at 
 present in Cologne. 22. 1 lost my penknife yesterday morning. 23. Twenty 
 is a numeral. 
 
 3>»tiKnbricfistoftc Stufgofie. 
 
 1. •©ftjcn Ste jc cittra GtStnren gefcljcn? 2. !Der SaWenbitl ^at rami •Sanbtdju^e 
 gejlo^tm (or Ijat mir bit ^nnbWu^c gcilollm). 3. ^en (Stem i|l Cc'^tcr in ber S3oIH» 
 Wule ju ®ktfclb. 4. Sc^ lann mein Scbtrmtfftr ntc^t finben. 6. 2!a« <SWiWi i|l 
 bem SWuycum gegcniiiev. 6. $ert ffit^'^off ^ot cine aBanbu|r unb cine S^laljnittWinc 
 gefouft. 7. Siinnett ©ie nrir cine ©tertnabcl gcBen? 8. |)tev i|l ber ffiingang unb ba 
 tfl bet Sln^gang. 9. 33ct Sn^It beS S«i|e3 i|i fel;r intcteffant «nb le^vteid). 10. 
 Stt? aSott „$aui$" i|^ eitt ^aufjtwort, unb baS SSott „tt)tt" i|l ein SuVwort. ii. £^ttt» 
 lottentutg tjl einc fflotPabt Don Setlin. 12. Sic .^auistavniee ij! gefletn S(6enb in 8eip= 
 jig angelommen; ftc njttb morgen in ffletlin anfommcn. 13. Set ©c^ncUjug son 
 ■JiamSuvg t|1 uot^ ni^t angelommen. 14. Iiett SluciBac^ tfl in bem Sefejtmmet. 15. 3^ 
 ttiinWe ein SBuct) ©cljtetdpaptet. 16. .giaBen ©ie ben .JiauiJtattitel (or Scitattilcl) in bet 
 l^eatigcn Beitung gelcfen ? 17. 28tcn tfl bte ^autjtflabt son Defletvcid). 
 
 (©ieienuttbbteipgftc Scitton, 
 Exercise 73. 
 
 1. Are you from Gotha? 2. No, I am a Berliner (or I am from Berlin). 3. 
 Is Mr. Dietrich from Frankfort?. 4. No. he is from Hamburs. Mr. Kranae 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 47 
 
 is from Mecklenburg, and Mr. Sohnorr is from Oldenburg. 5. Yesterday even- 
 ing I met an Englishman, a Dutchman, and a Swiss at the house of Mr. Stein (or 
 at Mr. Steiu's house). 6. Our teacher of the German language is from Schw^grin 
 in Mecklenburg. 7. Mr. Bornhoff is from Berlin, Miss Schmidt is from Meck- 
 lenburg, and Miss Van Dorn is from Holland (or is a Dutch lady). 8. The girl 
 sang a beautiful German sonnet. 9. 1 picked a beautiful little flower in the gar- 
 den. 10. The excellence of a poem does not depend solely upon the purity of 
 rhyme. 11. The sun roaches its greatest height and the days reach their 
 greatest length on the twenty-third of June. 12. The river has a depth here 
 of sixty feet, and a breadth of eight hundred feet. 13. The good man loves the 
 good, the wise man seeks the. true, the artist seeks the beautiful, and the true 
 philosopher seeks the good, the true, and the beautiful. 14. During his long 
 sickness William could not go out of the house at all. 15. The beauty of the 
 landscape in the neighborhood of Dresden charmed us so much that we re- 
 mained in Dresden during the whole summer. 16. The general praised the 
 bravery of the soldiers. 
 
 25icrun&rtcl)5iflfte SlufflaJe. 
 
 1. Ste erfte ©tfcung bet SJerfammlung luivi) movgra vm jc'^n Utjr jiattpntien. 2. |i«= 
 Sen ®ie bte ueucn 3eii^nunaEn 'tiii ifiinfllcr? gefe^en? 3. 2)ie ©ammlung i)o« 5lntt= 
 quitcitcn mi ®gwten (or son eg?p1ifd)en Stnttquitoiten) im 3)Jufeum ju Setlin tjl fe'^r 
 grog. 4. §crr 33veitfo))f I)at bte erjlcn fiinf fficinbe beS beutfc^en SBotterSui^eS Don ben 
 (Setrubern (Stimm (or beS ©rimm'fdSen bentfc^cn SBSvteviuile?) e6en gelauft. 5. SBie 
 Btete ®ef(|Wiflev ^afien ©tc ? 6. 3c^ '^aSe jwet Sriiber unb eine ©c^weper. 7. Q;* 
 tp fc^r fi^tout, toit wetben tBa^rfc^ctnli^ sov SJnfljt etn ©ewitter lietommen (or :^fl6cn). 
 8. 3)iefci3 33ui$ ent|dU bte fiejlcn ®ebic&te son ®i)t|e, ©c&iHer unb .^einc. 9. .gioJen 
 ©ie baa 3Ki69er^dItnig jWiWen ber ^'i^t unb bet Sieite beS ®ebaube« iemerit ? 10. 
 ©oilier Mnrintt tjl mtt uncr'^iitt (or ic^-^aie einen foIi$ett Unfmn nod) nie get)ijrt). 11. 
 Ste 93a))tete Itegen m\ bie[em Sif^e in bet gtogten llnotbnuitg. 12. ©eine Unct)tti4= 
 leit iDOt cin gtijgereS ttngliiS at« jetne Wnfci|ig!ett. is. 23ic UtctntDo^ner son Slmerita 
 tuaten bie Subianet. 14. .^aSen ©ie je einen Uttuatb gcfe^en ? 15. aBtffen ©ic ben 
 Utfptung be« SBotte^ „«nenbliil)feit" ? 16. Stffen ©ie ben ®tunb (or bte Xi.x\<\i)t) 
 fetner Unru^c (or Slng|l, or 3tengj^Itd&teiti) ? 17. S)er StjHfi|of son STOainj ifi 
 ■^eute Korgen n«c& fioln gegangen. 18. 2)ie ©c^bn'^ett biefet Seic^nung ij^ ganj aupet^ 
 otbentM (or tjl etwaS ganj ttugerovbentK^ei?). 19. Sttdulein ftveujct tjl cine SeutWe, 
 a6et grciuletn SRotelli i|l eine 3tfllienerin. 20. -gett glcinbet ip ein ©e^weijer, aBet 
 fcine grau t|l etne 3)eutWe. 21. S)te Ce^terin '^at in ttjret ©c^utc jtteiunijtBftnstg 
 ©^iiterinnen. 22. 3)Javta St^crejid, Saifetin uon iOellertetc^, (latS «m 13. SJJfli 1807.' 
 23. Soutfe Slugufle, flonigin son 9)teuien, flaiS am 19. Suli isio. 
 
 Stdjtunbhctjjigftc Scftion. 
 Exercise 75. 
 
 1. In this respect he is not (duly) thankful to his predecessors. 2. The soil 
 around Berlin is sandy and not very fertile. 3. 1 do not know whether the 
 bridge is passable (can be crossed) or not. 4. The plan is altogether impracti- 
 
48 teacher's companion. 
 
 cable. 6. During the whole day we have not been able to find any water that 
 is fit to drink. 6. Mr. Dorn is suffering from an incurable disease. 7. Mr. 
 Kie^ewetter lost his new gold watch this morning. . 8. "Only in the fairy land 
 of song (songs) live yet thy fabulous (mythical) traces." 9. The painter has 
 a very strong imagination. 10. This rocky region is full of rattlesnakes. 11. 
 "We are having very beautiful sunny weather to-day. 12. Why are you so 
 gloomy (sad)? 13. Have you seen the picturesque landscape between Dresden 
 and Prague ? 14. The city authorities have concluded to make a new loan of 
 500,000 thalers, in order to open (to make) a new street from Friedrichs-Platz 
 to Sadowa-Platz. 15. Only the first six volumes of Grimm's Dictionary have 
 yet appeared. 16. The Augsburger AUgemeine Zeitung is the best and largest 
 political newspaper in South Germany. 
 
 Exercise 76. 
 
 1. The Literarische Centralblatt (Literary Central Sheet), the best critical 
 journal in Germany, appears (is published) weekly. 2. The licipsic Illustrated 
 Gazette is published weekly also. 3. Mr. Hagemeyer is an honorable {or 
 honest) man. 4. 1 wish you a fortunate (happy or pleasant) journey. 6. By 
 the frightful calamity (or accident) in the mines at Freiberg forty persons lost 
 their lives. 6. Grimm's Dictionary will be the most extensive and complete 
 dictionary of the German language. 7. All the public schools are closed 
 during the holidays. 8. The Key al Library in Berlin is. in a part of the royal 
 palace (or of the king's palace). 9. The teacher (/.) says that the scholars (m.) 
 are very attentive. 10. This letter from Mr. Tiedemann is almost illegible. 
 11. The museum is a fire-proof building. 12. 1 find (consider) this new machine 
 very practical (useful, or that it accomplishes its purpose very successfully). 
 13. The magnificent Cologne Cathedral is the.masterpiece of German architec- 
 ture. 14. Mrs. Bernsdorf is a very amiable woman. 15. I will take three yards 
 (ells) of this dark blue ribbon, and' six yards of that broad orange-colored 
 ribbon. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. Seutc I)(>Bm tutv ganj I»uiit)cvfcl)ijne8 SBcttcr ge'^ait. 2. Swifc^en bcm SSctflc mi 
 bent SBlecre ip iex Sobm immltn, fanbtg unb unfru^ttar. 3. „|)anflctt" ifl tin uiire= 
 gelmcijigea, unb ..^togcn" ifl cin regcfaaiige^ Seitwort. 4. ©tefc Stantet gcfalten mi 
 mSjf, fte ftnb ju flein, ntcbvig unb bunW. 5. &tx ftnb geSraudjte SBitc^cr ju ben nieb= 
 rigflen 9)reifen ju sevfaufcn. 6. 33ie ueue ijrotefiantiWe (see page 434) Sir^e in 
 fflevgau i|l no^ nii)! soKenbct. ' 7. 2)ie 3»Jic|acli«tiva|e in Scrlin i|1 eine riJmiW=I(it^o» 
 lifc^e fijrc^e. 8. & pub breije'^n 3)vofcffwen in bcr t^eotogtfc^cn gwWtiit (faculty) 
 on bev Unisevfttat ju Setltn. 9- SaS geoIogtWc 2Hujeum ifl ie^t gcjc^loffen. 
 
 Sficununbbrcifjigftc Scltion. 
 Exercise 77. 
 
 1. It is indescribable what a longing I experienced to see a human being 
 again. 2. Count Eulenfels was rich in property (or estate), but poor in the en- 
 joyments of life {or, but he had but little enjoyment of life). 3. They were all 
 
 .f i.1-_: _:«».. /-^u t'W^^r ..11 ^».v...n.l^n»a,-l J-I^a^.. 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 49 
 
 capable of (making) any sacrifice. B. He is already sure of victory. 6. They 
 are free from all care (cares). 7. Mr. Thompson has no knowledge of the Ger- 
 man language (oris not acquainted with the German language). S.Without heart 
 {or affection), the world is destitute of happiness. 9. The trees are now empty 
 of fruit (». e., the trees have no friiit on them now). 10. The poem is full of 
 high-sounding phrases, but destitute of deep thoughts. 11. This tavern (or 
 hotel) is never without (or destitute of) guests. 12. Mr. Williams read the letter 
 very fluently (or read the letter right off ); he is a complete master of the Ger- 
 man language. 13. 1 am tired of the chattering. 14. 1 am tired of so many 
 vain (or fruitless, ineffectual) efforts (or struggles, or exertions); 15. He is sa- 
 tiated (or weary) with the world and its transitory (or fleeting) fame (or glory, 
 honor). 16. He is free (or released) from his oath (or he is no longer bound by 
 his oath). 17. And thou, too, boldest (or considerest) me guilty of the heinous 
 (or atrocious) sin (or crime) ! (Schiller.) 18. There they are not sure of their lives 
 (or there their lives are in danger). 19. The earth is full of the goodness of the 
 Lord. 20. The little book is full of the most charming remarks (or observa- 
 tions) (Goethe). 21. There is a basket full of ripe apples. 
 
 Exercise 78. 
 
 1. Mr. Eitelberghas become unfaithful to his party (or better, has deserted his 
 party). 2. These children are very similar to their parents (or better, these chil- 
 dren resemble their parents very much). 3. It is to me incomprehensible (or I 
 can not understand) how he can endure (or put up with) such nonsense, i. 
 Can I be of service to (or can I aid) you in any way ? 5. The condition of the 
 sick man is to the physician (or in the physician's mind) very critical (O)' better, 
 the physician considers the sick man in a very critical condition). 6. The cir- 
 cumstances of (or attending) the loss of the steamer are yet unknown to us (or 
 we do not yet know the circumstances, etc.). 7. 1 can not for the moment call to 
 mind on what day the battle of Jena took place. 8. Under such circumstances, 
 his presence was naturally very unwelcome (or disagreeable) to the company. 
 9. The merchant is in debt to the banker for eight hundred dollars (or owes 
 the banker eight hundred dollars). 10. His co-operation was more hindering 
 (or retarding, injurious) to them than it was promotive (or beneficial), (i. e., his 
 co-operation did them more hurt than good). 11. He has remained faithful to 
 his oath. 12. It is very dilEcult for Americans to pronounce the German lan- 
 guage correctly at the outset. 13. "VVe are going very slowly, because the wind 
 and the tide are against us. 14. This coat is too large for me. 15. It is very 
 cold to me here (i. e., I feel very cold here). 16. The cloth is an ell wide, and 
 thirty ells long. 17. This ball weighs only sixty-eight pounds, but those balls 
 weigh a hundred and twenty pounds (each). 18. He is almost a head taller 
 than I am. 19. William is twelve years, a month, and a day old. 
 
 Additional Seuteu' s. 
 
 1. 2)tcfe Svac^t (costume) if} kn SBcwotjncrn biefcS ST^ateS eigctitljiimli^. 2. Set 
 ©civtner ijl bem fflftuer 28 Sr^alet fdjulbig. 3. flcitt 2KenW i|i MIcrftct (or fret son 
 ge^Iern). 4. Ser Ce|vet ift mit ben ©i^ulevn jufticben. 5. Set Server i|l mit bet 
 Stttfmevlfamfcit unb bcm fjletp bcr ©cf)ijltt gunj juftiebcn. 6. ©ci Pe|t son Wijnra 
 
50 teacher's companion. 
 
 SBitrjtgftc Scltion. 
 Exercise 79. 
 
 1. Man is mortal. 2. Life is short. 3. Gold is the most costly metal. 4. Firo 
 and water are good servants, but bad masters. 5. Mr. Braumuller has to-day 
 bought the second yolume of Kugler's History of Painting, and the forth volume 
 qf Duncker's History of Antiquity. 6. Custom (or usage) is the lawgiver of 
 languages {or in language). 7. Friedrich Rahn is studying philology, and W. 
 "Weidman is studying medicine. 8. Professor Friedrichs is professor of classi- 
 cal archseology in the University of Berlin. 9. Mr. Braun will give an address 
 this evening'iipon the origin of the Gothic architecture. 10. Peace of mind is 
 worth more than riches (or wealth). 11. Breakfast is not yet ready. 12. After 
 supper we will go to the concert. 13. Tilly took " strong Magdeburg" by storm 
 'on the tenth of May, 1631 ; with the exception of two churches and a hundred 
 and thirty houses, he burnt the whole city to the ground, and he murdered thirty 
 thousand of the inhabitants; this horrible crime he called the "Magdeburg 
 wedding." 14. Last April was very cold and disagreeable. 15. Mr. Gieseler 
 and his family are now in Switzerland; a week from now we will go to Switzer- 
 land also. 16. Constantinople is the capital of Turkey. 17. This cloth costs 
 two thalers an ell. 18. He stood with his hat on his head. 19. He was not 
 master of his feelings (or he could not control his feelings). 20. The Imperial 
 Diet at Prague eieoted Frederick the Fifth to be king. 21. We sailed toward 
 the south and then toward the west. 22. Mr. Maurer has written an article 
 upon the rights of woman. 23. The father and the sons {or his sons) have gone 
 to take a walk. 
 
 Sttfjitsigftc SlufflttSe. 
 
 1. ©flS 9)tattn t|l b«a Wwevjlc SWetaU, unti bfl? SBW tfl b(i0 wctc^lic Wtm. 2. 
 aBHIctm 9)vcini^ PuWtt 9)WIofortte, unb So^onn 33veim| fluiitt Stflronomtc. 8. SBaS 
 lefen ®ic ? i. 'sk W 3«'6ti'« ®efc^tc&t£ i>cr Stfh'Dnomie. 5, §c« 3)ku fluWvt 3:^eo= 
 lofiie on ber UniBerptcit 8u Utt- 6. 9)to(cffor Hoffmann ifi gjrofeffot bcr E'^emie «it 
 ber Untocvruat ju fflertin. 7. 2)et ®ute fuvd)tet ben Sob nic^t. 8. 33ie SEugcnb fuljrt 
 jum ©liidE (or jut ®Iuc£feKgleit). 9. Set Stolj i|i swcic^rtW). 10. 2)tr sorigc ©i)m= 
 met WOT fe^r :^cti. ii. 3m wci^pen SBintct wcrbcn ttir ti)at)tWctnIic^ nad) Stalicn 
 gotjen. 12. 9J(ic^ bem Svut)Pu(I Wetben tttr auf ben m<aU iz%m. 13. Set SKittagS^ 
 tt[c() (or ba« SSittagcffen) ifl fettig. 14. 2>te 3{utnen bea altcn ®tiei*enl(inb« geljiircn 
 8U (11nb untct) ben fcfjonflen in bet SBctt. 15. S)ic ©cfewcii Itcgt jwiWcn 2>eutfa)Ianb 
 unb Stdlien. 16. ©m»ina ifl bie gtlipte ©tabt in bet artatifdjcn %Mtl 17. ffluftarcn 
 ifi bie ^awptjlabt bcr aBoDadjct. 18. SBit ^aien ©tunben in bet 2)?uflt (or sKupfjlun^ 
 ben) siietmd bie SBoi^e. 19. ®« Pel)t ct mit bcm $ut in bet |>«nb. 20. ©ie ^atcn 
 if)n einflimmig %\m gjtafibenten gettaljU. 21. Scflagtcr gicM ju, bag ct mitfc^ulbig m 
 aSctircc^cn t»«t. 22. 5)aa ©(^if^itb gegen SRotbcn unb bann gcgen Dpcn fegcln. 
 
 ginunbbtcrjigftc S?e!tion. 
 Exercise 81. 
 
 1. Ho did It on my account. 2. There were twenty of us in the company {or 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PAET. 51 
 
 midnight. 3. There was once a family in the land. 4. Who is there ? 5. 1 am 
 here. 6. Who was with you? 7. It was my brother and my sister. 8. 1 praise 
 myself. 9. Why dost thou praise thyself. 10. Have we praised ourselves. 11. 
 Yes, you have praised yourselves. 12. He praises himself. 13. She does not 
 praise herself. 14. They praise themselves. 15. He did it himself. 16. 1 can 
 do it myself. 17. Even his enemies respeo thim. 18. We understand each 
 other very well. 19. He sold his house for 2000 thalers; he gave 1500 for it. 
 aO. There were a hundred and twenty five votes in fayor of it, and eighty-seven 
 votes against it. 21. 1 have bought this new pen to-day; I have been writing 
 the letter with it. 22. 1 (have) brought the table into the room and laid the 
 books upon it. 23. The cloth pleased him very much; he had a coat and a 
 vest made from it. 24. Will you go with us to Dresden to-morrow ? 25. 1 will 
 speak to yon about it this evening. 26. Your brother has gone to take a walk 
 with mine. 27. He has packed up his books and sent them to America; I shall 
 also send mine to America; what shall you do with yours? 28. I shall leave 
 mine here in Berlin till I return from Italy. 29. You have done your part (or 
 your duty); the others must now do theirs. 
 
 3tociunl)fld)t5iBftc Stufoalic. 
 
 1.3d) fjoii ca feinctwegcrt grt^an. 2. ©ic tjatcn ca unferfmcgcn 0\)m. 3. & 
 ttaren t^rer je^n; siet son i()nEn tamcn mit un^ ; bic iiSvigen tlicteii in Ceipsia. i. & 
 war dnmal ein fetjr reiser aKann— . 5. SBer far im Stmmev ? 6. 3d) wax ei, 7. 
 & fmb (or eS gteiit) stele gvoie SBoiume in biefcm SBalbe. 8. 3i% serfieje mic^. 9. <Bx 
 (djabetft^ f'ttfi- lO.SBiv i)ev|lel)en una (or una cinanber. 11. Sic serpe^en ftc^. 
 12. ©ie setjle^en fid) (or fte »eriiet)en fi^ einanbev). 13. ©elbp; fetnc %dxCs>t ertenncn 
 feinen Sert^ an 14. .^evr S>ictvi(!^ ^nt jein 9)fevb fur S60, Scaler Oertauft ; tm. Bovigcn 
 I ika^xi |at er bofiit 400 Scaler bcja^tt. 15. Site SJcgievung wtvb glei^ (or fogletd)) eine 
 ncue 51nletl)e son 150,000,000 5rt)alevn mac^eni ea tsaren tm Songrep 250 ©ttmmen 
 bafiir unb nur 36 ©ttmmen bagegen. 16. aCirb..?>evt ©tetterg mit una mH) ®ot()a 
 get)cn? 17. ■gieute 3(benb isivb er :^tK'5Evtomracn unb mit 3t)nen barMer fprcdjcn. is. 
 SBarum $a6en ©ie SBtl^elm nic^t ge(agt, bag er Set bicfem fd)lec^ten SBcttet ni($t aua= 
 gel)en barf ? 19. 3c6 tjak ea ttjm f^on jweimal gefagt. 
 
 ^tuttunbtiicrjigfte Seltton. 
 Exercise 83. 
 
 1. Some of the books (I admit) are bound well, but the most of them are 
 bound very poorly. 2. One (of them) has written his exercise without any 
 mistake at all, the other has made many mistakes in his. 3. Some few poems of 
 the collection are good, quite a number of them are bad, but the most of them 
 are mediocre. 4. Of Roland he sang and many a pious hero (Schiller). 5. Of 
 many a lofty tree the roots are full of decay. 6. Mr. Diefenbach has lived sev- 
 eral years in Germany. 7. He has not sent me any book (at all). 8. His am- 
 bition knows no bounds. 9. No one of these books pleases me. 10. No one can 
 judge decisively upon the matter. 11. There was much ado about nothing; 
 much smoke, and little fire. 12. He only accomplished it through much labor. 
 13. 1 did it with great pleasure. 14. One can be very unhappy with much 
 money, and be very happy without much money. 15. Thou hast read much. 
 
52 . tbachek's companion. 
 
 but learned but little. 16. He tas trareled much and seen much. IT. Many 
 cooks spoil the broth. 18. Are many Americans studying in Berlin now? 19. 
 But few men are so uncommonly fortunate. 20. 1 must seek a little rest. 21. 
 1 bought the book for only a few groschens. 22. There are less exceptions than 
 you think. 23. A few have tried it, but less hare succeeded. 24. With much one 
 can keep house, with little one comes out {i. e., one can spend much' in 'living, 
 and still one can get along with but little). 25. He has less prudence than 
 bravery. 26. The secret is in the possession of but few persons. 27. He has the 
 least money and the fewest cares. 28. Only by a few animals do we find such 
 habits. 29. With eight yards you will have cloth enough for a coat and a vest. 
 30. 1 have heard enough about his bravery. 31. What did you write the letter 
 with? 32. 1 wrote it with a pencil, for I had no pen. 33. Upon what did Mr. 
 Schnorr speak? 34. He spoke upon his journey to Italy. 
 
 Exercise 84. 
 
 1. One can go from Berlin to Cologne by railroad in one day. 2. With us 
 also one hears of ghosts; but usually only "Somebody," or the invisible and 
 mythical " they" have seen them. 3. What do people say (or what is said) in 
 the city about the new loan ? 4. There is great dissatisfaction about it. 5. One 
 laughs usually when one meets with any thing comical. 6. One is happy (glad) 
 when one has finished a task. T^omebody is knocking. 8. It is Mr. Wedel. 
 9. Do you know any body in the company? 10. 1 know nobody except Mr. 
 Ruprecht and his wife. 11. Did any body tell (it to) you ? 12. No, nobody told 
 it to me; I read it this morning in the newspaper. 13. His hand is against 
 every body, and every body's hand is against him. 14. One should not open His 
 heart to every body. 15. Have you heard any thing of the late accident in the 
 mines ? 16. No, I have heard nothing about it. 17. Do you wish any thing 
 more? 18.1 will take some more butter. 19. This cloth is something quiti* 
 new. 20. He has meant something else. 21. Here is something quite new. 
 22. Have you any more gold? 23. Yes, I have some more. 24. Did you see 
 any apples in the market this morning? 25. Yes, I saw some, but they were 
 poor (bad), and very dear. 26. I do not know what you are talking about. 
 
 27. Can you tell me what Professor Schmidt will speak about this evening? 
 
 28. He will speak upon the history of Berlin before the fourteenth century. 
 
 Additional Sentences. 
 
 1. (Et I)at SSkki ieU^m aiet mijt SStel getcvnt (in this sentence SBiclcS means 
 much or many things, but Bid means much in quantity). 2. 5IJ?att ^«t ben S>iE6 
 evtdWt. 3. saJo pnbet man iai 9)etrolEum ? 4. SKan finbet baa 9)ctroIeum ^«uf)tfoid)Iic& 
 (especially) in 3li>iim^--9nn\^lianm, ater man finbet d mdj in utelen anbctn £a«- 
 bern. 5. SKan fa^rt je^t son ^am^utg mHi 3im 8)ovt mit S)ami)tWtffen in sterje^n 
 STagen. 6. $akn ©ie ^eute SKorgen etwaS SntercffanteS in bcr Scitung gffunbm ? 
 7.'9fein, bie Seitung ent^alt ^eute gar mcf)W son tefonberem Sntctcffe. 
 
 2)rciunbJ)iti*stgftc Seftion. 
 Exercise 85. 
 
 1. 1 bought these two books this morning; this one was very cheap, but that 
 one was very dear. 2. 1 have already read that book. S. I know this gentle- 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 53 
 
 man very well, but that gentleman {or that man) I have never seen before. 
 4. The ruins of Pompeii are larger and more'interesting than those of Hercu- 
 lanenm. 5. That {or he) is a very learned man. 6. When will Mr. Roth come 
 again 1 7. (That) I do not know. 8. That is the emperor's hand and seal. 
 9. These are all new houses in this street. 10. He was painting (the likeness) 
 of his. cousin and his (i. e., the cousin's) son. 11. The good name of him who 
 lies does not last long. 12. He is not (one) of those who are brave with words. 
 13. These are ripe apples. 14. The boolsi which you wish the bookbinder has 
 not yet brought back. 15. The gentleman {or man) whom we saw in the Mu- 
 seum yesterday is Mr. Liebreoht's brother. 16. There is the same gentleman 
 whom we met yesterday evening at Mr. Brunow's. 17. Who will not hear must 
 feel. 18. What you can do to-day do not put off till to-morrow. 19. All 
 that we saw in Potsdam pleased us very much. 20. 1 have found something 
 here in this book that I do not understand at^all. 21. The history is correct 
 upon the whole, still I found quite a number of things in it which I can not 
 approve of. 22. Whose bread you eat, his praise you sing. 23. There was 
 such a heat in the city that almost all of us were made sick by it. 24. By such 
 a heat one easily gets sick. 25. 1 have never seen such a man. 26. That know 
 we who (ourselves) hunt the chamois. 27. That know I who (myself) had seen 
 it. 28. Those are the houses of which I was speaking. 29. Here is the pen 
 with which I wrote the letter. 
 
 @cd)§uttbotf)tst8fte Stufpie. 
 
 1. Siefea Zxii^, wWi Sie Ijeute gefawft ^aBen, WM Diet ju tjcucr. 2. S)«« 3:u4 »»« 
 am bcr ©^neibct bicfe SRiicte gemai^t ^at, war fe^r gut, o6er ea war W '|ew«' ,3. 
 §ter ijl baS Su4 wosoit id) acftJtoc&en ^oie. 4. 3)ft fiiib bie Suc^ev, woDon i^ gtfijro^en 
 5a6e. 5. 2)er S)om ju fliiln t|l Kiel gvii^w al^ bet ju Ulm. 6. Sitefc Sii^et jlnb ntu, 
 (ifcr ienc Tmb nic^t neu. 7. S)ie« (Inb Mci ncue Sud)cr. 8. SSie »tcl ^at btefeS ©au« ge» 
 tojlet? 9. Saa weig tc& nic^t. 10. Iia« tami i^ wW fagra. 11. S)a ift berfelte 
 SBagm, weWjen wir ^eute SKorgm gcfe^en ^ntcn. 12. .^aten ©ic etwaS gefunbcn, was 
 etc nic^t sesflc^en? 13. 3lctn, 613 iefct :^aBc ic^ Ktc^ta gefunben, wa3 nt^t ganj tetd)t 
 jU Serjlc^ert til. 14. SBa« cr iitev bie Sc^Iac^t gefagt ^at tfi wo^t mogti*- a6cr ti ijl 
 ni^t wa^rfdjeinUcI). 15. aStt f ot^ ciner gebcr Wtc bieie faun t* md)t fc^rei6en. 16. 
 35a ijl bet km, in beffen §aua wit wo^nen. 17. S)a i|l ber Strjt, mit bem id) cine 
 ateife but^ ba3 SBiefengcWrge gemac^t ^aie. 
 
 SSierunbiJtcrsigfte Sdtioit. 
 Exercise 87. 
 
 1. How long did you stop {or stay) in Munich 1 2. Last year we only staid 
 three weeks in Munich; but four years ago we staid in Munich over four 
 months. 3. How do you do ? 4. 1 am very well, I thank (you). 5. Mr. Diefen- 
 bach and his whole family have gone to Heligoland to take sea-baths. 6. Why 
 do you trouble {or concern) yourself so much about his affairs ? 7. I have 
 finally concluded to go to Italy. 8. From the seed is developed the plant. 
 9. From that time forward the conspiracy developed itself very rapidly. 10. 
 
54 teachee's companion. 
 
 The earthquake at Lisbon took place on November 1, 1755. 11. He has made 
 himself very happy over his discovery. 12. After a long siege the fortress sur- 
 rendered at discretion. 13. He has had to support himself by giving lessons. 
 14. Accurate information was obtained very quietly as to where he was when 
 the murder took place. 15. 1 am not afraid of his vengeance. 16. It is very 
 difficult to accustom one's self to a new mode of life. 17. Are you not mistaken, 
 sir; have you not taken my hat ? 
 
 Stt0tmtba$t5iBftt atufgok. 
 1. SBte langj Wcvben Sie (i($ in ffievlin auf^aten ? 2. SBit tonlim un« wa^vfc^titt= 
 lid) jwet Mamit ba auf|(iltcn. 3. (Duten SWorgcn ! SBte Iiefitiben <Bie fid^ 1 (or in fa- 
 miliar language, \m gri)t c3 3^nm ?) 4. 3c& Iiefinbe mi^ ganj gut (or mit gt^t ei 
 gftni gui), id) banfe. 5. 2Bot)r£nb iii tjeipen fBtiihi kgekn ttir mi gcwB^ntic^ nftct) 
 Stettin ober Sanjtg, urn ©ecMbev ju tie^men, unb urn ber Wlci^ten Suft in biefer gropen 
 ©tabt jtt entge^en. 6. SBit tjakn unS entWloffen, im Dttobet nai^ Sevlin juriiiljule^= 
 ren. 7. Sie Emyevung ^at fi^ mit gans crjiaunli(|ev ©d)neUigteit enttutcfelt. 8. Eine 
 grope Uebetfc^wemmung beS SR^eina ^at im Dorigen gtiipng jlattgefunben. 9. Ev 
 fteute itc& liter bie Slntunft feineS Svubetg. 10. Sie :^«6cn bie ganje 9lvmee gejtDungen, 
 fi^ auf Snabe unb Ungnabc ju ergeBen. 11. Et $at feinen ttntet^olt but^ ©tunben= 
 gc6ert geminnen mitffen (or er ^dt fii^ buvc^ ©lunbengeBen erna^ten miiffen). 12. ES 
 ift ni$t Ieid)t, fid) an bie QddxmxSje unb Sitten anberer 8anber ju gelDo^nen. 13. Sic 
 irren un« (or wiv '^oten unS geirvt) ; iai ifl ^mn SRa'^n'S ^mi. 14. SBiv lonnen un3 
 (tuf feinen Seiflanb (or |iiilfe) ni($t sevlaffen. 15. 3iJ& fe^nc ntid), mcin ajfttcrlanb no$ 
 (inmal ju fe|en. 16. .ffftnn i^ mii| auf S^ven ffleiflanb in biefer ©ac^c scrtaffen ? 17. 
 a)a« Bcvfle^t fi(^. 18. SBii miiffcn un8 oft in bie Sujltobe fiiito tiinnen. 
 
 gitnfunbuicrjigftc Seltiou. 
 Exercise 89. 
 
 1. John is going to the city. 2. John and William are going to the city (or 
 to town). 3. There are many beautiful steel engravings In this book. 4. It 
 was not we who stepped on the flowers. 5. These are all new books on this 
 table, but those are all second-hand books. 6. His majesty, William the Fourth, 
 King of Prussia, has condescended to command that, etc, 7. You, your brother, 
 my father, and myself, can go in this coup6. 8. Thou, thy brother, and thy sis- 
 ter will (be able to) find places in the next car. 9. Thou and thy brother are 
 invited by Mr. Kobel to ride with him and his wife to Tegel, to see the graves 
 of the brothers Humboldt, and to see the treasures of art in the palace. 10. 
 The cold weather which we are now having has already lasted longer than an 
 hour. 11. How much do you weigh (or what is your weight) ? 12. 1 weigh a 
 hundred and thirty pounds; my brother John weighs a hundred and forty-four 
 pounds. 13. This cloth costs a dollar and a half a yard. 14. Hamburg lies 
 about thirty German (1 e., a hundred and twenty English) miles to' the northwest 
 of Berlin. 15. Mr. Roth will probably arrive with his family from Dijsseldorf 
 this evening. 16. Mr. Dietrich formerly came at ten o'clock in the forenoon to 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 55 
 
 We only went up Vesuvius toward evening, because we wiShed to see the splen- 
 did sunset from the top of the volcano. 18. Soon after the sun had set, the full 
 moon arose ; but the sky was soon covered with clouds, so that it was very dark 
 when we descended {or came down) the mountain. 19. Do you find it very cold 
 here ? 20. Yes, I am freezing. 21. 1 am very glad to hear that your health is 
 restored. 22. It does not concern him at all {or it is none of his business) 
 whether we buy the house or not. 23. There are many uncultivated (ignorant) 
 people in Grermany, especially in the country districts, who believe in ghosts 
 and spirits. 2i. Without saying any thing farther, he went, his way. 25. Mr. 
 Bernstein is teaching me music and drawing. 26. Do you know when Mr. Behr 
 came back {or returned) fromWeimar? 21. No, I asked him, but he could not 
 tell me. 28. He calls bini his friend, and still he treats him in this unkind way. 
 29. The number of inhabitants of the kingdom of Prussia is {or amounts to) 
 about 24,000,000. 30. After the banishment of the Emperor Napoleon, Prussia 
 enjoyed a jjeace which lasted more than fifty years. 31 . By the treaty of peace of ■ 
 Paris in the year 1815, Prussia received the Rhine provinces. 32. From the 
 beginning of the months of Ai>ril to the end of the month of September, we had 
 very dry weather. 33. The journeyman shoemaker has gone to the city with 
 two pairs of shoes and three pairs of boots. 34. With the best will {or the best 
 of intentions) the scholars could not learn such long lessons. 35. The name of 
 the city of Potsdam is of Slavic origin, ar^ signifies "under the oaks." 36. 
 The Werra and the Fulda receive after their union the name "Wcser." 
 
 Slcunjtflfte StitfgaJe. 
 
 1. SBpelm mi fcin SSatcr werbcn Bntb (or niiSj^mi) vnS) ©tuttgatt gc'^cn. 2. g3 
 fmi) in Mefem Wmm side fdjone g>$otD(iv«rticn son ben kiEUtenbjlm Somen unb 
 anbevn offentlidjen (SeBoiubcn in S)eutfc^tonb. 3. S)(i« fmb aUei 9)^ot09ra^^6iett son 
 ©emcitben in ben 3)Jufccn son ffietltn unb 9)ot3b<im. i. fflJein Svubet unb ic^ fmb 
 gePevn na$ 5Jot«bam gegangen. 5. ©ie unb 3^t Svuber jtnb son •Jicvtn Siiemc^cr 
 eingelaben, morjjen mil it)m ju gcljen, urn bic Sammtung son beutWen unb ftanbin(t= 
 Sili^cn Slnttquitdten, tsetdjc ®vaf son Eiteltevg son gjommcrn naUj fflerlin seStflc^t M^r 
 SU felen. 6. 3)fla ^eige Setter, KtlSjei wit im sorigen Sa'^ve geldtt I)akn, bauevte 
 fajl cinen SUonat. 7. fBtin'i SBeItgcWi(5te loflet jisei unb einen fatten Scaler ber 
 Sanb, ungeBunben; foli^er gtnSanb isic biefet lofiet anbettljaiten 3:|alet ber Sanb; 
 biefer EinBanb i|l fe'^r fiarl unb gut; cr tojlet nur einen 'fatten ST^ater ber Sunb. 8- 
 S)er ©^neHjug son Srantfurt an ber Dbet lowmt urn oc^t VLtjx be« SBJorgcmS on; ber 
 ©iitcrjug gc^t urn siet ll|r beS SItenbS a6. 9. Sa« Eoncett wtrb urn (i(I)t U^t biefcn 
 9l6enb |l«ttftnben. • 10. SBtt gingen ben Serg fe^r langfam I)in(iuf, aBer tsiv ftnb fe^r 
 fdjneH ^eruntergelommen. 11. £8 frcut un« vedjt fe^r ju I)i)rcn, bag feine (SJefunb'^eit 
 fail ganj tstebcvlergefieUt iji. 12. gg tsunbcrt mic^ ju prcn, bap ev noc^ nii^t fttge= 
 fommen i|l. 18. ea ftnb siele Wiine ©aufet {i. e:, SBo$nt)auyer=residences) in bet 
 Vta^e be8 Sl^iergavtenS. 14. & gel)t it)n gar ni^t an, o6 isir iai ^mi scrtaufen ober 
 ntc^t. 15. .^evr ^u'^n Ijat meine ©c^tseflet Wu[it geW)vt al« wit in Serlin waven. 16. 
 ffialb na4 bem Slobe Stleranbetg beS ®rof en gtng ba« gtie^i^e JJaiferreii^ ju ®tunbc. 
 17. aBit tsetben som Slnfang be3 SKonata SJosemtet iii jum Enbe bti SWonata SKoitj 
 (or som Slnfang 3?osemBer[3] M3 sum Enbe3Katj[ea]) in SKiinilen blci6en. is. S3cr 
 
56 teacher's companion. 
 
 SlflWE in ©tabt fiiilniii son latetmfc^cm Uvftvuttg (or tatcmiWen MrfsvungS)! cv k= 
 imtit uvyijtungliii) „floli)nie." 19. aSiffen ®ie ben' SJamen imeS glufftS ? 20. S;«8 
 i|l Me ^mt\. 
 
 ©edjSunbbierjigj'te 8e!lion. 
 Exercise 91. 
 
 1. In the calamities of war woman needs a protector. 2. He needed now 
 more than ever the good will of the states. 3. A charlatan needs only to have 
 a reputation. 4. Who makes sport of danger is mindful of it (or thinks about 
 it); but the true hero does not think of danger at all. 5. 1 can dispense with 
 your services. 6. Even the most favored talent can not dispense with the in- 
 fluence (or assistance) of a good school. 7. As we came on the ship, we found 
 that the crew were without even the most necessary means of life {or of sub- 
 sistence). 8. 1 deride (orlaugh at) your threats (m- threatening); tiey do not 
 frighten me at all, for, in case of need, I know how to defend myself. 9. You 
 are deriding me. Prince ! 10. All are not free who make sport of their chains. 
 
 11. A tottering building does not need an earthquake to make it tumble down. 
 
 12. You may take the book with you5 I am not using it now (also I do not need 
 it now). 13. The avaricious man is on the l»ok-out for every advantage. 14. 
 One can not respect a liar. 15. Iff. Sohnorr is so magnanimous that he will 
 forget that offense (i. e., that he will intentionally drive that offense from his 
 memory). 16. 1 have forgotten the number of the year (i. e., I have uninten- 
 tionally lost it from my memory, or it has escaped my memory). 17. All laugh 
 at his folly. 18. The good which one has, one should enjoy; and one should 
 learn to do without that which one does not need (orrequire). 19. 1 am of the 
 opinion that we shall not (or in my opinion we shall not) arrive before evening. 
 20. With all this misfortune he was of very good courage (or in very good 
 humor). 21. 1 was intending to write him a letter, when he quite unexpectedly 
 came into my room. 22. "Blessed are the pure in heart, for they shall see 
 God." 23. Mrs. Bindemann died a sudden death. 24. Did she die a natural 
 death? 25. No, she died of a broken heart, because her two sons have committed 
 a murder, and are condemned to death on account of it. 26. The poor beggar 
 died of hunger. 27. The high altar stood on the place where Albert of Austria 
 died. 28. Of what nationality are those merchants ? 29. One is a German, the 
 other is a Dutchman. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. ®aS SEBcib (M.-G., and O.-G., das wipe; compare with English wife, Anglo- 
 Saxon wif) means, in general, w'oma«, in distinction from lilan (tn SDlmtn); 
 it can not be applied (like bit Srau) to women of high rank ; it is sometimes used 
 by fltiters in the signification of tdfe : it is usually employed at present, how- 
 ever, to indicate an old woman of low social rank. 
 
 Mem. S)o9 Staumjimmct is also used to indicate the female sex: it may also 
 apply to persons of the lower ranks of society. 
 
 2. ®ci! Gt)atlata«t first used in the New-German period, has come (through 
 the French charlatan) from the Italian darlatano=a mountebank, from ciarlirc 
 (to chatter), a word of uncertain origin. 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 57 
 
 S. ®ie Oefoftr' is a modern derivative (with the prefix go, see § 155, i) of the 
 now antiquated He Snftt (M.-G., and 0.-G:.,fdra) which is allied to the English 
 fear {Anglo-Sa,s.on far=deceit, fear, danger). 
 
 Exercise 92. 
 
 1. They have accused {or indicted) General von Fischel of high treason (or 
 General von Fischel has been indicted for high treason). 2. Last night a thief 
 forced his way through the window into Mr. Both's room, and robbed him of his 
 gold watch and his pockfit-book (also with pronoun in the dative case unb ^«t 
 t^m fetne golbene U^t unb fcin gjortemcniwie geraulit). 3. Mr. Klein has charged 
 his coachman with stealing. 4. The policeman has been dismissed from his 
 office on account of oft repeated drunkenness. 5. Nothing can free him from his 
 oath. 6. 1 assure you of my esteem and friendship. 7. 1 am convinced of his 
 innocence. 8. The defendant has been acquitted of (the charge of) participating 
 in the murder. 9. Of what sin does thy conscience condemn thee? 10. The 
 judges have banished the criminftl ftom the land. 11. The bishop has removed 
 the priest from his office. 12. The righteous man is merciful to his beast. 13. 
 We could scarcely restrain (or keep) ourselves from laughing. 14. What is 
 man, that thou art mindful of him, or the son of man, that thou rememberest him 
 {or that thou takest such an interest in him) ! 15. 1 availed myself of the op- 
 portunity to see two paintings by Kaulbach. 16. Ealsehood has assumed (or 
 has arrogated to herself thy holy marks {or characteristics), oh truthi 17. Dur- 
 ing the last two years William Zahn has applied himself to {or has studied) ju- 
 risprudence {or law). 18. 1 have not been studying archseology. 19. After the 
 bloody contest the army conquered {or took possession of) the fortress. 20. 
 A deep sorrow took possession of my heart. 21. 1 can not remember his name. 
 22. Your majesty remembers perhaps the circumstance. 23. 1 hope to enjoy 
 his acquaintance for a long time. 24. We remember him very well. 25. 1 
 remember the circumstances now very well. 26. 1 remember having seen him 
 there. 27.You have no reason {or you ought not) to be ashamed of your choice. 
 28. He consoled himself over the loss of his mother. 29. How can a man boast 
 of such a shameful deed? 30. 1 am proud to be permitted to call him my friend. 
 31. 1 am right glad that he will visit me. 32. One should not be glad over the 
 sorrows {or misfortunes) of others. S3. 1 am ashamed of my negligence {or 
 that I have been so negligent). 
 
 SieknunbUtcrjigjite Scltion, 
 Exercise 93. 
 
 1. 1 thank you right heartily for the book which you sent me the day before 
 yesterday. 2. A man can not serve t*o masters. 3. 1 have served the Spanish 
 monarchy, and the Republic of Venice, and the kingdom of Naples. 4. These 
 verbs follow the paradigm in their application {or use). 5. This medicine did 
 not help him very much in his sickness. 6. The boy helped me over the stream. 
 
 7. He did not lack endurance {or persistence), but he lacked health and strength. 
 
 8. As we approached the city, it suddenly began to rain. 9. This coat does not 
 fit you very well. 10. How do you like this Swiss cheese {or how does this 
 Swiss cheese taste to you? 11. The soup tastes smoky (or of smoke). 12. His 
 
58 teacher's companion. 
 
 manner of treating the subject seems to me very masterly. 13. One can trust 
 him; he is true-hearted. 14. One seeks in vain {or one will seek in vain) to 
 remedy this evil (or this evil state of things) as long as the source of the evil 
 is not stopped. 15. His resemblance to his brother was to me very striking. 
 16. That is a very striking likeness {or comparison). 17. 1 met your brother 
 on the street this morning. 18. We agreed with them. 19. The thief escaped 
 from the policeman before they could get him to the prison. 20. We can not 
 escape death. 21. These insects are so small that they escape the naked eye 
 (i. e., that they can not be seen by the naked eye). 22. Ours {i.e., our sol- 
 diers) went out boldly to meet the enemy. 23. Austria seemed to be going to 
 decay {or to ruin). 2i. He will meet you half way. 25. False are the contents 
 if they contradict the truth; true, if they correspond {or agree) with it. 
 26. The first house pleased us very much, but we did not like the second house 
 at all. 27.. One should obey God more than {or rather than) man. 28. He fin- 
 ally succeeded in carrying out his excellent plan. 29. They succeeded in sav- 
 ing from the flames only a part of the houses'tn this street. 30. The ape imi- 
 tates man. 31. The painter is copying nature. 32. This painter competes in 
 vain {or tries in vain to rival) with the great artists of the Middle A gos ; but he 
 is in reality by far inferior to the second-class artists of ou. own time. 33. This 
 word occurs {or is found) already in the Gothic language. Si. That surely 
 must have occurred to you in a dream. 35. That seems very comical to me. 
 
 Exercise 94. 
 
 1. William brouglit me the letter. 2. Mrs. Keichenbach gave her niece 
 Schiller's Poems as a Christmas present. 3. Our long stay in Switzerland left 
 us no time to go to Italy. 4. Workmen seldom have their work ready at the 
 promised time. 5. The Eussian army gave battle to the enemy. 6. The work 
 appears in monthly numbers of ten sheets each. 7. The field rewards (or the, 
 soil rewards) the husbandman for his industry with rich blessings. 8. In 
 America labor is better paid for than in Germany. 9. That is not worth the 
 pains {or trouble) that it costs. 10. It is not worth the trouble to talk about 
 that. 11. My friend informs me of the arrival of my brother in Vienna. 12. 
 This accident {or misfortune) has taken from him all hope. 13. The pick- 
 pocket has taken from me my pocket-book. 14. The physician took the ban- 
 dage off from his eyes. 15. The (house) servant has stolen a gold watch and 
 300 thalers from Mr. lippard. 16. Mr". Siegel l»s dedicated his last work upon 
 the island of Beroland to his grandfather. 17. The letter-carrier delivered me 
 the letter at ten o'clock. 18. The Scriptures teach us, when one has struck us 
 upon the right cheek, to turn the other to him also ; while we generally offer 
 him blows in return, and, if we are strong enough to do so, we give them to 
 him too. 19. They snatched the dagger away from him. 20. 1 feel very sick; 
 I am dizzy. 21. 1 have a foreboding that we shall never see each other again. 
 22. 1 am not well to-day; I have a strong headache. 23. How do you like it 
 here in Berlin ? 24. How does this coat fit me?- 25. 1 am very sorry that they 
 can not remain longer in Berlin. 26. Mr. Prell has insured his brother in the 
 Germania Life Insurance Company. 27. 1 assure you of my esteem. 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. ,59 
 
 Slti^tUMbtsicrjigfte Se!tion, 
 Exercise 95. 
 
 1. The weather is heooming very hot. 2. The weather heoame very hot. S. 
 The weather has become very hot. 4. The weather will become hot. 5. The 
 house is now being built {or is now building). 6. The books are being printed. 
 
 7. The books were being printed when we were in the printing establishment. 
 
 8. The books are now all printed. 9. German is spoken here. 10. A magnificent 
 new church is now being built in Elmersdorf. 11. The New Museum in Berlin 
 was completed in 1853. 12. The Unirersity in Berlin was founded in 1809. 
 13. The art of printing was invented in the fifteenth century. 14. All the 
 imperial soldier's, who fell into the hands of the Pomeranian people, were mur- 
 dered without pity. 15. Under this pretense all was devastated and plundered. 
 16. The fortress was taken by storm. 17. General von Riegel was indicted for 
 high treason, but he has been acquitted of the charge. 18. The news of the 
 death of Mr. Bindemann has not yet been communicated to his wife. 19. When 
 will the work be completed? 20. The work will not be completed till three 
 years from now. 21. Johann Wolfgang von Goethe was bom August 28d, 
 17i9. 22. Johann Christoph Priedrioh von Schiller was born Nov. 10th, 1759. 
 23. A new' commercial treaty between the North Gorman Confedei;ation and 
 the United States is now much talked about. 24. Smoking is not allowed here. 
 25. (Has the same meaning as No. 24.) 26. They are now singing in the par- 
 lor (or in the hall). 27. They are now eating. 28. The physician did not allow 
 him to go into the room where his father lay sick of the typhus fever. 29. They 
 did not allow him to go into the room. 30. This riddle is very easily solved {or 
 is very easy to solve). 31. That is a matter of course {or of course). 32. What 
 is to be done ? 33. That is not easy to tell. 34. Mr. Prezlor says that this hos- 
 pital was founded in the last century. 35. The house was burnt entirely to 
 the ground. 
 
 ©ti!&§un&ne«natflfte SfitfGOie. 
 
 1. S)a3 Bud) iDtvb je^t ijetituiit. 2. S)ie ^au'\ei, woson ev gcfrro^en '^at, jinb noi^ 
 nic^t BoUmbet ; fte IBEi-bett ie|t gejaut. 3. Sie Slicker, ttetc^e ic^ laufte, finb iii($t 9C= 
 iunbm; fie werben jejt §c6«nben. 4. 2)ie UntKcrfttcit ju 3)vflg ttuvbe tm 3«^re 1348 
 gegtiitibet. 5. J>cr ©runbjlcin beg 23ome3 p flotn tturbe tm 3a|ve 1248 gelecit. 6. 
 Stefe Oebtc^te ftnb noi) nic^f ina Ehalifc^e iiJetfeJt worbert. 7. gvanjiSftfil unb ScutW 
 toivb ^ier geftiroc^en. 8. 2)te fjejlang wiib wa'^rf^einltc^ mil ©turm jenommeit aex= 
 ben. 9- Slfflerifa wuvbe tm 3at)te 1492 entbeSt. 10. $mn ©Bev^arb'a Entwuvf fiir 
 bte ncue Sriide wtrb tDft^rf^cinltc^ Don ben ©tabrte^iirben angenowmen Wetben. ii. 
 (See sentences 24 and 25 in Bxercioe 95.) 12. (£$ IDtvb je|t in bev ffirc^e gefutts 
 gen. IS. <£i toitb un« nti$t gejlattet werben bte neuen fi^jfet ju fe^en, o^ne Erlau6= 
 mf »om Sireftor be3 3Jtufeumg. 14. ©iefe gruge ifi fe^r %i^t ju liSfen. 15. Der 
 ©djliiffri W fii% gefunben. 
 
 Sleunuttbtjicrjigftc Seltion. 
 Exercise 97. 
 
 1. Diisseldorf lies on this side and Cologne lies on the other side of the Rhine. 
 
60 teacher's companion. 
 
 has many stately houses within and without the walls, i. Worms lies above and 
 Bingen lies below the fortified city of the German Confederation, Mainz. 5. 
 Along the middle Rhine (i.e., half way up the Rhine) stand many old castles. 
 6. AVe hunted the entire day along the forest-ooTered mountain. 7. Frederick 
 the Great justified his claims to Silesia by means of earlier treaties. 8. Steam- 
 ships are now moved by means of a screw. 9. Instead of goose-quills steel 
 pens are mostly used at present. 10. In spite of the enemies' guns, the provision- 
 ships were able to make their way to the city. 11. For the sake of peace he 
 did not do it. 12. The constellation of the Lyre is not far from the Milky "Way. 
 13. All bodies, by means of their gravity, tend toward the centre of the earth, 
 li. One could be banished by ostracism from Athens without detriment to his 
 fortune or his honor. 15. Mr. Kunz visited me often during my sickness. 16. 
 Iron-clad vessels are, by reason of their weight, not very sea-worthy. 17. In 
 consequence of rash speculations many a person has come to poverty. 18. Ac- 
 cording to the last news the steamer has not yet arrived. 19. In view of the 
 danger, the captain did not wish to start {or sail) in the heavy storm. 20. That 
 I know myself by experience. 21. He was beside himself for joy. 22. The 
 new City Hall will be completed within two years. 23. We went very slowly, 
 because the wind was against us. 24. We arose at break of day. 25. It does 
 not always go according to our wishes. 26. The crown prince rode next to the 
 king. 27. The city saw starvation, with its (fearful) consequences, draw near. 
 28. The ship, together with the entire crew and cargo, becaine a prey to the 
 waves. 29. How long have you been in Germany?. 30. Wo have been in fJer- 
 mauy since the first of April. 31. William Roth is small of stature. 32. To- 
 day I have visited the Museum for the first time. 83. What he says is contra- 
 ry to sound reason. 
 
 Exercise 98. 
 
 1. From Easter to Whitsuntide it is seven weeks. 2. We will go to (as far as) 
 Prague to-day. 3. 1 consider Mr. Roth a man of honor. 4. There were to- 
 ward five hundred persons present in the assembly. 5. There were sixty per- 
 sons on board, without (counting) the children. 6. The sun rises now at six 
 o'clock. 7. Here is a poem to the moon. 8. Mr. Gellert is now working on a 
 history of his native city. 9. There were about five hundred persons assembled. 
 10. 1 knew him by his voice. 11. Is Mr. Cohn at home? 12. No, he has gone 
 hunting to-day. ,13. Mary is sitting near (or by the side of) her sister. 14. 
 lledwig had taken her seat near her cousin. 15. Two weeks from to-day we 
 shall leave for Dresden. 16. The letter came by way of Vienna and Trieste. 
 17. Under such conditions I can naturally not accept the office. 18. She wept 
 for joy. 19. The steam-ship will probably arrive this evening between eight 
 aud nine o'clock. 
 
 Baphnis at the Spring. 
 
 (i 236, 06s.) 
 
 I pine for thee, I haste to thee, thou beloved spring! Thy waters I quaff (I 
 draw water from thee); by thee I rest, and watch the play of thy ripples (the 
 waves) ; with thee I sport, from thee I learn to move joyfully through life, 
 smiled upon (cheered) by the flowers of spring, and greeted by nightingales. 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 61 
 
 PMlemon to his Friend. 
 
 (§ 243, 06s.) 
 
 Through thee is the world beautiful to me; without thee I would hate it; for 
 
 thee alone I live, for thy sake will I gladly die; no slanderer shall ever offend 
 
 thee unpunished; no enemy shall arm himself against thee; I will stand by thy 
 
 side. 
 
 To the Moon. 
 (§ 253, Ois.) 
 To thee glances, on thee rests oft my eye in sweet delight;^o thee I cleave, 
 to thee I send many a feeling from my joyful breath; my fancy finds and places 
 in thee many scenes, in the midst of which she gladly dreams herself to be — 
 there in the midst of which the beautiful spirits, raised above this earth, ramble 
 above the graves; then before me comes, before me stands the resolution to act 
 right well. Among these bushes I sit, through them thy ray(B) steal their way. 
 Near me she sinks, near me she sits — she, the friend of my choice, quietly hav- 
 ing slipped behind me, stood laughing behind me ; and we spoke of the stars, our 
 love, and thee ! 
 
 g-unfjiofte Sc!tion. 
 Exercise 99. 
 
 1. The lark sings beautifully. 2. The author of that work has treated his sub- 
 ject in a very scientific manner. 3. The Canary bird sings more beautifully 
 than the lark. 4. In this Dictionary etymology is treated in a more scien- 
 tific manner than in that one. 5. Of all birds of song, the nightingale sings 
 the most beautifully. 
 
 6. "With highest esteem, I am 
 
 " Yours most obediently, 
 
 "William Both." 
 7. This Dictionary is most fully and conscientiously revised by the author. 
 8. 1 do not know whether we can go into the Museum to-day or not, but we 
 will at least make the atterapt. 9. The city has now at least sixty thousand 
 inhabitants. 10. When can Mr. Lindeman be seen (spoken to) ? 11. His hour for 
 receiving calls is from nine to ten o'clock in the morning. 12. We wished to 
 leave this forenoon, but unfortunately there is no express train for Stuttgart 
 before three o'clock in the afternoon. 13. Twelve years agrf" we were in Berlin ; 
 then the walls around the city had not yet been torn down. 14. They were 
 not torn down till the year 1867. 15. Palm-trees have ringed, sometimes thorny 
 trunks. 16. We will, for example, look up the origin of the verb „fcm." 17. 
 It is already beginning to rain. 18, Has Mr. Klein returned yet ? 19. Yes, 
 he returned the day before yesterday. 20. Where is William ? 21. He is up 
 stairs in his room. 22. He fell down stairs head foremost. 23. 1 hardly believe 
 that we shall have time for that. 24. The ground rises here gradually, until 
 it reaches a height of 2500 feet above the level of the sea. 25. These are mostly 
 German books. 26. Mr. J. F. Schmidt, a resident of this place, of Evangelical 
 (or Catholic, w Jewish) confession, is prosecuted by a „@tc(lbvicf" (i.e., an an- 
 nouncement in a public journal of the particulars of a crime) for a theft com- 
 mitted on the twentieth of July. 27. He is very much in favor of our starting 
 
62 teacher's companion. 
 
 before daybreak. 28. For tbe future the Museums will be open four days a 
 week without a charge for entrance. 29. From that time forward the Eepublio 
 of Venice gradually declined. 30. Thou must go forward, for thou tsanst not re- 
 treat. 31. Who told you that it rained so hard in Leipsic day before yester- 
 day? 32. The steamer from Hamburg only arrived this morning. 33. You 
 will go with us to the concert, will you not ? 34. Be he ever so learned, still 
 he does not know every thing. 35. You have read the dispatches from Amer- 
 ica, I hope, in to-day's paper. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 1. It is the custom in Germany, when a person is charged with a crime, 
 with clear evidence against him, and who runs away to avoid prosecution, 
 for the officers of justice to insert in the newspapers notice of the particulars 
 of the crime committed, and particulars about the personal appearance, the 
 age, occupation, the religious persuasion, and the residence of the fugitive from 
 iustice. 
 
 2. The walls which were formerly around the city of Berlin were only thin 
 walls of brick extending from gate to gate, and designed to prevent smuggling 
 articles into the city. In most European cities there is a duty upon nearly all 
 articles of consumption which are taken within the city limits. 
 
 Exercise 100. 
 
 1. As he was not at home yesterday, I was not able to tell it to him till this 
 morning. 2. While you are writing the letter I will pack- up {or I will pack 
 the things in the trunks). 3. "When all lay in the far distance, then thou 
 hadst decision and courage; and now, when success is assured, now thou be- 
 ginnest to tremble." 4. How can Mr. Flint go to Italy without taking his 
 wife with him? 5. The ostrich has wings, but he can not fly. 6. From two till 
 seven o'clock the storm became fiercer and fiercer. 7. We hoped that, with 
 the setting of the sun, the sea would become more quiet, but we found our- 
 selves mistaken. 8. On the contrary, at ten o'clock the danger became so 
 great that the captain had the life-boats provisioned. 9. He is too intelligent 
 to believe in ghosts. 10. Whose fault is it, except yours in Vienna? 11. "Be 
 wise as serpents and harmless as doves." 12. "We are going to the mountain; 
 we will come again when the cuckoo calls, when the songs awake." 13. " Thou 
 Shalt honor thy father and thy mother, that thy days may be long in the land.'' 
 14. He is too magnanimous to avenge himself. 15. Although the teacher was 
 upon the whole satisfied with the exercises of the scholars, still there was much 
 to find fault with in some of their exercises. 16. Although Mr. Stolberg is very 
 old, still he has the freshness of youth. 17. The snow on the mountain is be- 
 ginning to melt, so (we may expect that) the streams in the valley will soon 
 begin to rise. 18. He was no longer happy in human society, and so he has 
 retreated to solitude. 19. He did it himself, and so he has nobody but him- 
 self to blame. 20. William is indeed very smart for his age, and, moreover, 
 he is older than one would think. 21. 1 am visiting him now more as a friend 
 than as a physician. 
 
KEY TO THE FIRST PART. 
 
 63 
 
 (Sinuttbfunfjigfte Scltion, 
 Exercise 101. 
 
 1. Waiter, bring me, if you please (I beg you), another cup of coffee. 2. Some- 
 body is knocking. 3. Come in. 4. Take a seat, I pray you. 5. Select a book 
 that pleases you. 6. Keep still (be silent)! 7. (Give) honor to whom honor is 
 due. 8. Our Father, who art in heaven! 9. Hallowed be thy name! 10. Thy 
 kingdom come! 11. Give us this day our daily breadh 12. And lead us not 
 into temptation! 13. But deliver us from evil! 14. Charles, remain here till I 
 come again (or come back). 15. Do not rejoice over the misfortune of others. 
 16. Open the door. 17. Children, keep quiet! 18. Now let every one go his 
 own way. 19. We (will) remain here till Henry gets the tickets. 20. Take 
 charge of the Spanish regiments, keep making preparations and be never 
 ready, and if they urge you to move against me, say " yes," and remain motion- 
 less! 21. Beat the drums! 22. Look into the book; only do not read, but keep 
 singing! 23. Mr. Ludemann says that the army is already in motion. 24. 1 
 asked Mr. Eberlein when he will leave for Munich; he told me that he will 
 leave early to-morrow morning. 25. 1 doubted that she had already arrived in 
 Vienna. 26. Thou shalt honor thy father and thy mother, that thou mayst live 
 long in the land. 27. 1 advise you to be itiore industrious. 28. Oh, would that 
 my brother were well again ! 29. May he soon recover! 30. What the howling 
 deep there down below conceals, that no living human soul (can) tell. 31. 
 (Every) man, whoever he may be, experiences a last fortune and a last day. 
 
 NOTES. 
 Sem.We give below the Lord's Prayer in full. 
 
 The Lord's Prayer. 
 
 Our Father! 
 
 Who art in heaven ! 
 
 Hallowed be thy name ! 
 
 Thy kingdom come! 
 
 Thy will be done in earth as it is in 
 
 heaven ! 
 
 Give us this day our daily bread! 
 
 And forgive us our debts, as we forgive 
 
 our debtors ! 
 
 And lead us not into temptation ! 
 
 But deliver us from evil ! 
 
 For thine is the kingdom, and the 
 
 power, and the glory. 
 
 Forever and ever! 
 
 Amen! 
 
 <&a» Satcc UnfcT. 
 
 aJater unfer ! 
 
 2)cr 2)uMfltm|>intmel! 
 
 ©e^iligt WEtbe 25em JJamc! 
 
 25ein SReic^ f ommc ! 
 
 Scin aSille geWe^e tm ^limmri aU mi) 
 
 auf gvien! 
 
 ®te6 utt3 ^eute unfct tagli($«S5vob ! 
 
 aJcvgie6 un3 un[ere (Si^ulb, trie mij tvit 
 
 ScrgeScn unfeni ©^ulbtgern ! 
 
 Knb fii^re uni nic&t in aJcrfud^jing ! 
 
 ©onbern crtijfe «nS Bom UeBel ! 
 
 Denn SJein ifl bai fRnif, unb bie Si-a[li 
 
 unb bie $crrlt($tcit, 
 
 3n Emigleit! 
 
 SImeti! 
 
 Exercise 102. 
 
 1. Communicate the news to him before he learns it through others. 2. Do 
 as if yon were at home. 3. He lends to no one just for that reason, that he 
 may continually have some thing to give. 4. Aim well, that you may hit the 
 apple. 5. Remain not in England, so that the Briton may not feast his prond 
 
64 teacher's companion. 
 
 heart on thy misfortune! 6. Take care lest rengeance destroy thee. 1. Do 
 you desire all the chiefs (leaders) to be present? 8. Do you wish, then, that it 
 should be done immediately ? 9. 1 do not give my consent that it should be 
 done. 10. Order that an investigation shall be made again. 11. It was not to 
 be expected that he would come home so soon again. 12. Thereupon he cried 
 down into the streets {or lanes) that he was the scoundrel who had accused 
 Maria falsely, that he was a false witness. 13. Upon the assurance of the re- 
 gent that the provinces were in the enjoyment of complete quiet, and that from 
 no side was opposition to be feared, the duke had some German regiments dis- 
 banded. 14. The Prince of Orange had taken the precaution to have the bridg- 
 es destroyed, that, as he pretended, the Calvinists of the city might not make 
 the attempt to unite themselves with the army of Toulouse; but probably so 
 that the Catholics might not fall in the rear of the Netherlanders, or that Len- 
 noy, should he be victorious, might not press his way into the city. 15. Mr. 
 Weber looks as though ho were not at all well. 16. 1 can not give you the 
 apple, as I have promised it to your brother. 17. All reports about the lan- 
 guage of the Chinese say that it has contributed much to the moulding of this 
 people. 18. The avaricious (or miser) will never say that he has enough. 19. 
 He will see too late that he has done wrong. 20. Many men act as though they 
 would never have to die. 21. Under such circumstances I would not do it. 
 22. I would not have done that. '23. If you were industrious, you would 
 learn something. 24. Had you been more industrious you would have learned 
 more. 25. "If many a man knew who many a man was, many a man would 
 often do to many a man more honor. 26. Hadst thou always thought better 
 of the world, thou wouldst have acted better. 27. (Had I been) in his place, 
 I would not have bought the house. 28. If my grandfather were yet alive, he 
 would now be ninety years old. 29. 1 asked Mr. Cerold's advice. 30. (The 
 same as No. 29.) 31. The merchant has been accused of stealing. 32. The ex- 
 press train from Munich arrives at ten o'clock. 33. 1 was too much accustomed 
 to occupy myself with my own thoughts to be able to consider a work of art 
 with attention. 
 
II. NOTES TO PART SECOND. 
 
 1. CONVERSATIONS. 
 
 1. Salutation, „S[Bte ge'^t e^ ?" is also used in familiar conversation, instead of 
 „tl)ie fceftnben ©ie ftci)?"— 2. The pronoun S^ncn is usually omitted after tc^ 
 imle, thus : „ii^ tepntie mid) fe^r m% tc^ banlc." 
 
 Hem. 1. In replying to a question, „t(% b(m!e" indicates a refusal, thus : „Sn5oIIett 
 ®ie etttoS Stub?"— „3* tianIe"="no, I thank you." 
 
 Mem. 2. On the other hand, „id) ditte"— " yes, If you please" (see 2, 4, helpw). 
 
 3. „<£i tt)Ut mir (fcl)t) Ietb"="I am (very) sorry." „(£« frmt Itltl^ i^eW=" I am 
 (very) glad of it." — 4. The word grftU is used as a title of respect in speaking 
 of the female relations, especially of the wife or mother of the person addressed, 
 as : „3^te %t(M Oemapn", „3|tc %xm SWutter". The word'.^rtt is used simi- 
 larly in speaking of the husband or father of the person addressed, as : „3^r 
 §err OdtmaTjl", „3^r ^nt 3Jatet". — 5. Instead of „Oeffncit ©it bie S^iit" the ex- 
 pression „itl<i($en ©ie bie Sttjiir auf" (open the door) may be used. Analogous to 
 this is „m(li$en ©ie bie 2;pv jU"="shut the door." 
 
 2. At Breakfast in a Hotel. 1. „Um 3^nen ntcine Stufroovtung ju mo^en" signi- 
 fies also " to pay him my respects," i. e., to make a formal call. — 2. There are 
 many cases where entire sentences must be omitted in translating from one 
 language into another. Besides the examples given (Sejctt ©ie ttotjl, etc.) 
 may be added such as „©c^tafen ©ie i»ot)l" (analogous to "may you have pleas- 
 ant dreams"). — 3. In the word &t)oeela'be, d) retains its French sound of ch 
 (§41, ifem.). — 4. The pronoun id) is usually omitted before (ic^) Wttc when 
 used in the signification of " if you please." 
 
 Jiem. In Continental Europe, the first meal on rising is exceedingly simple, 
 usually consisting of a cup of coffee and a couple of rolls of bread. 
 
 3. Dinner. 1. „©ie Werben I)offentlic&"="you will hopingly," i. e., "I hope you 
 will," or, "it is to be hoped that you will." 
 
 Hem. 1. It is customary in Germany, on rising from the table at the end of a 
 meal, for the guests to bow to each other, or shake hands together and say „(3ie» 
 fegnete SBItt^tjett", or simply „Wltilfiint" —an abbreviation of „tc[) triinf^e 3^ncn eittc 
 gefegnete 3JZat)l8Eit"="I wish that the meal may be blessed to your good." 
 
 4. In a Confectionery Shop. Hem. In Germany the ffionbitorci'en correspond 
 to the Oafis of France and Italy. In them are served coffee, tea, and chocolate, 
 and also light refreshments. They frequently contain a large assortment of 
 newspapers and literary magazines from all countries, and thus they serve to a 
 great extent the purpose of reading-rooms. Pastry is rarely cooked in private 
 
 ' houses, but it is purchased at the Sonbitorci'cn, just as bread is at the baker's. 
 
66 teacher's companion. 
 
 5. The Hotel. Rem. The most usual pure German word for lioUl is ©afls 
 TjaiiS, although the French word lioUl (from the Latin word 7wspitaUs=!iospii- 
 ablej is frequently used for hotels of the larger class. The word @aft!)au§ is 
 also employed, though it more commonly- is -used to indicate -smaller hotels 
 (or taverns). " 
 
 1. The preposition in (not SOtt) is used in giving the names of hotels, as : „.&0s 
 tel sum f(|tt)arjcn Slbler", „§otet juc Sijmgiti son Ungavti".— 2. Table d'Adie signifies 
 a regular dinner, served in courses of dishes, and usually lasting from one to 
 two hours. — 3. In South Germany the term ^ia'fct (from the French, ^acre) is 
 usually employed to signify a- hackney-coach. In North Germany the term 
 S>rofd){e (from the Kussian droscliki) is generally used. 
 
 6. The Eailroad. 1. The word ffiiUct {=tieket) is from the French Ullet— 2. 
 In the European railroads the passenger cars are divided into throe or more 
 partitions or divisions, called (from the French) E o U)} 6 ^. The entrance to 
 the coupes is from the side of the oar. Persons can not pass out from one 
 coup6 to another while the train is in motion. A fourth class is added on 
 some trains to provide laborer's with passage at a cheap price. — 3. The system 
 of checks, adopted on all American roads, is not in voguo in Europe; but the 
 traveler's name, residence, and destination, with the number and weight of the 
 trunks, are inscribed in a book, and a ticket for the baggage is given, on tha 
 presentation of which the baggage is delivered. 
 
 7. The Steamer. In Europe the pattern of ocean steamers is adopted even in 
 building steam-boats for the smallest rivers. A steam-boat built after the 
 American fashion is now (1870) attracting much attention on the Rhine. 
 
 8. The Custom-house. 1. „3Jid)t roaljv?" is added in order to give an inter- 
 rogative character to botlf positive and negative statements, thus : 
 
 a)a3 fflui^ if! ne«, nii^t WCi^r ? The book is new, is it not? 
 
 S)a« fflud^ ifi nic&t tim, m4t lualjr? The book is not new, is it? 
 
 Bit ■^(ikn tia« SBuHj, nic|t roa^t ? You have the book, have you not? 
 
 ©ie lauften b«3 S3u^, nti|t Wd^r ? You bought the book, did you not? 
 
 ©ie ^aietl i«a Sud) md)t getauft, ni^t You did not buy the book, did you? 
 
 ©ie Wcrtien ta? Sttd) taufen, ntc[)t 1D(>T)V ? You will buy the book, will you not? 
 
 2. „S»i(l)t?" alone may be used after an affirmation? 
 
 ®te ?a6en Hi Suc^, nic^t ? You have the book, lime you not? 
 
 ©ie t)Cl6en Wi S3ui^ %tUv.% «td)t? Youhave bought thobook,Aae;cj/o«no<f 
 
 ©ie WHien boa Sui| tci«fen, nic^t ? You will buy the book, vM you not? 
 
 Bern. The passport regulations, which formerly -were so great an annoyance 
 to travelers, are now so modified that they cease to be burdensome. In simply 
 passing, as a traveler, through any German state, passports are not called for 
 at all. But when a person rents appartments for a long stay, it is yet neces- 
 sary to send the passports to the police headquarters, that the name may be 
 registered. 
 
 U. la a Bookstore. The book-trade is organized upon a plan more complete 
 than is to bo found in any other country. Any book-merchant can refer to 
 catalogues and tell the date, size, price, and place of publication of any book 
 that has been published in Germany during the present century. 
 
KEY ^O THE SECOND PART. 67 
 
 Owing to the large number of libraries that are constantly being sold, the 
 sale of second-hand books is an important branch of the book-trade. Many 
 books, being out of print, are only to be had at second-hand. A large portion 
 indeed of all the bookstores deal partly in second-hand books. 
 
 15. With a PhyBioian. 1. Instead of bnS ^o|)fmc^, &cr Ro()fWmErs may be 
 used. — 2. ISct iSc()iiii|>fcn refers to a cold in the head ; He CDttaltiing, to a cold 
 affecting any part of the body. — 3. Instead of He &id>t, ^(IS ^Potagro may 
 be used to signify "the gout." 
 
 Obs. These conversations may be varied greatly by-using the words in the 
 classified list given on pages 422-435. 
 
 II. GERMAN AND ENGLISH IDIOMS. 
 
 1. Idioms with Ijaittl and to have. 1. Instead of „$aJm Sie ^tSjt", we can 
 say „rte^men ©ie ftd) in Wt^t". — 2. "I am in haste" is rendered by „ic& l)tAt 
 ©le". — ,3. Instead of „ei.- :^at feine <BSj\xlii imtm", we can say „er ij^ nti^t ©cfeulb 
 batan". — 4. The word ouSiDcnbig means primarily " external, on the outside." 
 It is used figuratively in such expressions as the following : 
 
 S)ie Slufgale auSttenbig Icvnen/ To commit the exercise to memory. 
 
 Siefe ©^mis^onie lattn tii) tlii)t <mi= I can not play this symphony with- 
 
 IBcnbig flJtelett, out the notes. 
 
 S)(l« fann tc^ ntdjt auSWmbig, I do not know that by heart. 
 
 5. Among the many other Idioms with Ijabcn and to have, besides those given 
 on page 179, may be added the following : 
 
 S)«0 $aBe t(^ cv|l SKontag JU m«ii)en, I need not do that before Monday. 
 
 3l$ ^Cl6e Surp, hunger, I am thirsty, hungry. 
 
 <S.i \i<\.l feine ©efa^r, There is no danger. 
 
 §a6c nut SKut^ ! Only take courage (be bold) ! 
 
 What would you have me say to aB(>« WiinWtcn ®ic 'DO.i \i) t^m fftgtn 
 
 him? fo«te? 
 
 I have a mind to go with you, 3c^ tin gencigt mit S^ncn jtt gclcn. 
 
 2. Idioms witb fcitt and to be: 
 
 Site Viixt (or boS genfter) ifl JU, The door (or window) is shut. 
 
 Sa? fflnn WO^t fcin, That may be. 
 
 2Ba« t|l 8U t^un ? What is to .be done 1 
 
 SBaa fon baa fein ? -What does that mean ? 
 
 "This it is to be married" (Shak.), 2)a« tommt »om .^eirattjcn. [^en. 
 
 I was about to go to the city, 3c^ war tm Segriff naifi bev ©tobfju ge= 
 
 Is Mr. Klein in ? ^ 3|1 §erv ffletn ju ^aufe ? 
 
 Be off with you ! SKac^e, b«p bu f ortf omni jl ! 
 
 3. Idioms with loerbcit and to become: 
 
 3i^ tin anberS (or anbcrn) iginne^ bftv» I have changed my mind about that. 
 ii6er geworbcn, 
 
 3m ©d)Wct6 bcineg Stngcrid^tS foUfi bu In the sweat of thy face Shalt thou 
 
 bein Svob effen, M« ba§ bu JU Stbe eat bread, till thou return unto the 
 
 ttevbel^, bdijon bu gcnommen M|l. . ground; for out of it wast thou tak- 
 
 3)enn bu biP ®vbe, unb foUp jU Etbe en ; for dust thou art, and unto dust 
 
 tBevbcrt.— 1. aWBfeS, 3. 19. shalt thou return.— Cot. iii., 19. 
 
68 
 
 teacher's companion. 
 
 I am becoming sick of tlie thing. 
 ^ttilUjin Seutra fleibet 3ine«. 
 
 aBa3 ft* fur ben ©nen fi^Wt, f^Wt jt^ 
 ni^t imracr fiit tm ?ltiljern. 
 
 Sc^ ttctbe bet ©ai$e fott, 
 Every thing becomes handsome 
 ■ people. 
 
 What becomes one does not always 
 become another, 
 
 7. Idioms with piepositionsi 
 
 Hem. 1. aSci. In the expression „M StUe bcm", through a singular idiomatic 
 custom, „9lIIe" is not declined. It is also written „id allebeni". 
 Sent. 2. We add here a few of the idiomatic uses of English prepositions. 
 
 1. In. 
 At two o'clock in the afternoon. 
 In the forenoon, in the erening. 
 In the day time, 
 
 I heliere in one God, 
 
 Mr. Kraus is in the country, 
 
 In conclusion, 
 
 I see a house in the distance. 
 
 In former times. 
 
 In the mean time, 
 
 There is nothing in it, 
 
 He is in love with her. 
 
 In my opinion. 
 
 In all probability. 
 
 In this manner. 
 
 The book is in press. 
 
 In respect to that. 
 
 In short, 
 
 "In haste,'' 
 
 We will arrive in time. 
 
 An answer in writing, 
 
 He is a man advanced in years. 
 
 Come in ! 
 
 He is a German by birth. 
 
 By degrees; by force, 
 
 By the grace of God, 
 
 To learn by heart. 
 
 He informed us by letter. 
 
 By word of mouth. 
 
 By all means. 
 
 By no means. 
 
 By means of, 
 
 I know him by name only, 
 
 A man, by name of Schmidt, 
 
 By the pound, by the yard, 
 
 Wm sttet U^t 3!ac6mittttg«. 
 SJotmtttag?, bc« 9I6enb8.* 
 Set Sage. 
 
 3i^ glaulie an cinen Qictt. 
 ^err flroug ip auf bem Sanbe. 
 
 3i$ fe'^e eiit ^mi mi bcr gtme. 
 e^emaW, in frii'^crcn Bdten, »or 3citcit. 
 SnjwiWen, unterbeffen. 
 & ijl 3lim baran. 
 Et i^ serUeit in jie. - 
 SKeiner SReinung naSj. 
 SlUer SBa^rWeintic^teit na$. 
 9luf biefe SBcife. 
 S)a8 Sud^ ip untcr ber 3)rcffe. 
 SEBaS iai anbetrifft. 
 Surj, lurs unb gut, or luvjum. 
 5Ktt gile. [tommen. 
 
 SBir wtvben ju ved&tcr 3cU (or jtitig) an= 
 Sine fc^ttfflt^e Stntwort. 
 Et i|l ein beja'^rter 3)?ann. 
 (flommen ©ie) :^erein! 
 2. By. 
 
 ®r ijl ein SJeutfc^er Don (ScJurt. 
 
 SlDmtt^ltg i mtt ©ewolt. 
 
 3)ur^ Qiettei ffinobe. 
 
 SluSwenbig Icrnen. 
 
 Ev ■|at una bvieflid) JenaiJjric^tiat. 
 
 SKflnblic^. 
 
 9tuf jcben gaU, iebenfaM, fi-cilic^. 
 
 SctncSwega, bur^aul nid^t. 
 
 SBcrmittelft Dcrmbge, bur4 
 
 3c& tenne i^n nur bem SJamen nac^. 
 
 Ein Wmn, SJamcnS ©$mtbt. 
 
 9>funbttctfe, eHenweife. 
 
 * By a false analogy bie 
 sion .,be3 ^aAti"=at niaht. 
 
 is treated as a masculine noun in the expres- 
 
KEY TO THE SECOND PART. 
 
 69 
 
 Ten feet by three. 
 To travel by land (by water), 
 To perish by the sword. 
 By the side of, 
 
 3et)tt Sup lang mi bvet gug iuit. 
 3u Sanbc (ju Staffer) fatjrm. 
 3)uti^ iai Sdjwcvt |iett)en. 
 
 3. For. 
 
 To-morrow we leave for Dresden, 
 It is only for your interest to accept 
 
 his offer, 
 Here is a letter for you. 
 To write for fame. 
 That book is good for nothing. 
 That is all for nothing (of no use), 
 For lack of money. 
 He could not speak for joy (fear, 
 
 sorrow, courage), 
 To weep for joy, 
 He has left Gotha for good, 
 I tell you once for all. 
 For a while; forever. 
 For example, for instance. 
 As for me. 
 
 We will not leave for a fortnight;. 
 For the next three months we will 
 
 be in Frankfort, 
 For the benefit of the poor. 
 
 SWovgcn rcifen Wit n«c^ Steuben. 
 
 <S.i tann 3I)nen nut jum aSotrt)ett getet- 
 
 i$en, fein Slnetbicten mtsune^meit. 
 ^iet ijl eiii Stief fiit ©ie. 
 i)ei SRu^meS Ijalin Wtcibem 
 3ene3 Sud& taugt Ki)ti. 
 S)a« i|l 3iae« umfonjl. 
 mi SKangel (in ®elti. 
 Er fonnte sot Steuk (gntc^t, Summer, 
 
 5Kut|) nic^t fiJtec^en.. 
 fSex gteuk iDtittEn. 
 £t ^at ®ott)« fiit immcv Dcrlaff en. 
 3$ fagc e« S^nen tin fiir aUc Wat 
 Sluf tiniae Seit; flufimmet. 
 Sum Seifptcl. 
 
 aBa« mi^ anfiettifft. [retfen. 
 
 asit Wetben ctjl md) Bietje^n S:fl9en aJ= 
 aSciltenb bet ncic^flen btet Wmate ton' 
 
 ben wit in granffutt fein. 
 Sum Seflen bet Sltmen. 
 
 4, From. 
 
 I have received a letter from my 
 
 brother. 
 From now forward. 
 From a child (from my childhood). 
 He snatched the cane from my hand, 
 I know that from experience. 
 From what he told me. 
 He draws, paints from nature (from 
 
 life). 
 
 3c^ ?a6e einen ffltief son metnem Stubet 
 
 ev^ftltcn. 
 SSon jeit an. 
 ajon mctnct ffinbtjcit an. 
 Et rip ben ©toiJ taxi wetnet $anb. 
 S>a« weii id) auS cigcnet gtfaljtung. 
 9f a($ bem, was et mit fagtc. 
 Et jci^het, malt nac^ ber Sfatut (na^ 
 bem Seten). 
 
 5. To. 
 
 I gave the letter to the merchant, 
 We went to church, to the concert. 
 He told it to him to his face. 
 His duty to his parents, 
 He lived to a great age. 
 To the last penny, 
 I am almost tired to death. 
 That is nothing to what — 
 We walked to and fro (up and 
 down). 
 
 33) ga!6 bem flaufwann ben Stief. 
 SBit gingen in bic ^tta)c, in§ fioncett. 
 Et fagte tii^m ini ,®eric[)t. 
 ©eine 95fli^t gegen feine Ettctn. 
 Er ettei(ite ein ^o^ti 5llter. 
 Sis sum legeh 9)fennig. 
 3ii) bin fajl tobtmiibc. 
 2)a« iff ?Jt^t8 tm aJetgleic^ mit beni; mi— 
 2Dir gingeri ^in unb ^et (:^in unb Wieber, 
 or duf unS fl6). 
 
70 
 
 III. EXAMPLES OF SYNONYMS. 
 
 1. SlcEcr, ®tbe, SClb. l. Evbe -has S for th in earth (sec § 49, 10). Sie 
 Evbe (Middle-German, cj-de; Old-German, erda; Gothic, airtha; Old-Nordiah, 
 iord; Swedish and Danish, jo)'(Z; Anglo-Saxon, em'de anHeard; English, earth; 
 and Dutch, aarde) is feminine, because in the old Northern mythology J&rd 
 (the earth) was the daughter of Nott (night). It is derived, howevet from the 
 Old-German ero, of the same meaning (earth), which is allied to the Greek 
 'ipa, and the Sanscrit ird, both signifying earth. — 2. SCaffer has ff for t in 
 water (see % 49, 10). SaS SBaffct (Middle-German, wasser; Old-German, wazar; 
 Gothic, wato; Anglo-Saxon, water; Dutch, water) is allied to the Slavic, wad»; 
 Greek, idtup ; Latin, unda=wave; and Sanscrit, uda=^water, and und-=-tojlov}. — 
 3. ©egcn fol(|e (i. e., foWje %:lj!xle).— i. gclb has ie in field (see § 49, 2). 3)a« Sdi> 
 (Middle-German, «Z<; Old-German, /SW; Anglo-Saxon, /«M; Dutch, veld) is 
 allied to the Old-Saxon word die folda (Anglo-Saxon /oWe), which signified 
 cidtivated land, and is probably a participial derivative from a verbal root which 
 is now lost. 
 
 2. 8(ifcrginann, SanbtDtrtl), Sauer. i. Set Sauet (Middle-German, ur) 
 
 has dropped the original prefix syllable gc (in Middle-German, gibur; Old-Ger- 
 man, gipur; compare Anglo-Saxon, gebur=inhabitant ; English, boor; Dutch, 
 boer), the original signification of which (resident, inhabitant) was changed to 
 counti-yman, and finally to peasant. It is derived from baticn, which originally 
 Bigni&eS. to dwell, and which is allied to tin (see § 131, Hem.). Snuevisalso allied 
 to Sla^Bav (Middle-German, nachgebur; Old-German, nahgipur=near resident 
 =^neighbor; compare Anglo-Saxon, ne/i^cSiir', nehebur, from neh^nigh, anige- 
 6!ir=resident). The word ^aitx=peasant is now used both in a wide sense, 
 including all hired agricultural laborers or cultivators of the soil, and also 
 in a narrower sense, including owners of landed property to which none of the 
 ancient privileges of the nobility adheres, especially if the owner lives upon the 
 estate and assists in its cultivation. — 2. „Untet (t^ (tltb, c!c."="the Sailbwht'^ 
 and the SSctuev differ in this, that, etc." This is an example of the principle 
 which will be often met with in translating from English to German, that an 
 adjective construction in German must be rendered by a verbal one in En- 
 glish (see Lesson XXXIX., 3). 
 
 3. Slufftcljcn, crftcl)cn, oufcrfteftcn. „9t«« in Itegenfeen, etc." =" to pass 
 
 from a sitting to a standing position," the definite article in German is here ren- 
 dered by the indefinite in English. — 2. „'X>k SBeWcgung in We ^o^t"=" motion 
 upwards." — 3. „(St in erjle'^crt britdt biefelte (Semegimg) (iu8."-^-4. „Scttte Slf^c 
 ri;^Ct"="his ashes rest;" the German word 9Ifd)c is conceived as a collective 
 noun. In antiquated style the c was added in the termination (^et or =t, and 
 =efl or =jl) of the verb to a much greater extent than in the modern style. 
 
 4. 2lU§fitI)rClt> Uonfirtnoen, etc l. The a (as in blofi, l^eigt, Sofi) is changed 
 to sswhen German is printed in Roman or Italic type.^2. £rjl, as an adverb, 
 signifies only, used frequently in the sense of not until, not before, thus : 
 
 Sr ill evfl fec^gjeln Sa^ve alt, He is only sixteen years old. 
 
KEY TO THE SECOND PAET. 71 
 
 5. SRCCt, ©tt. 1. The compound adverb jufBvtierfl=m the ffrst place (also 
 written jubijl'berfl and jut)i)tt)er|i) is formed by joining the preposition jii to the 
 superlative »i)x'Dn^=foremost (see § 92, .and § 189, 12).— 2. ,,'BiC SSi'ixtn Sec, 
 efc."="the words <Sie and SSJicet are both applied primarily to the entire ocean; 
 but, in addition, sometimes one or the other, sometimes both together are ap- 
 plied to certain parts of the same." — 3. In English we use the plural of the 
 word, when referring to the great periods of history, as "in ancient times," 
 "in former times," "in modern times;" but we say "at the present time." — 
 4. ;,58enn iet sanje Ocean, etc."=" although the entire ocean is called both See 
 and SKeet." Settled is a demonstrative pronoun used in an indefinite way, 
 like biefe^ etc. (Lesson XLII., 4); but in the English translation ".both" is a 
 conjunction. 
 
 6. SfafCttCiS, etc. 1. „a}on Ctnet ©adje mttjUft)rc^en"="to join in conver- 
 sation about a thing."— 2. „S[Bcnn ftc iijcr Siele 3)i«ge uvt^eiteit"="when they 
 express opinions about many matters." — 3. „lE)£nen fie Sl(^tHng fl^wlbig finl)"= 
 "whom they ought to respeet." — 4. „2)iefe (Sutunft) ifi Cl, etc." 
 
 7. SBIiiacn, ttoKcn. i. „©ett|l aWbann, Weitn"="even if;" cUUm may be 
 omitted in translation. — 2. „©oIIen tBtr ti, fo mUtn, etc." =" should we inoacn it 
 in such a way (or in such degree) that we like to do it, it must in that case 
 either not displease us at all, eic." — 3. „©0 fern nun, «t<;."="in as far as that 
 which wo woDcit pleases us, in as far as it gives us happiness and pleasure, in 
 so far do we tniigen it." — „©o ttit Kan^e? isollen, efc."="as we tnpacn many a 
 thing, which we would not mogen, etc.," or "as we are willing to do many 
 things which we would not like to do if we were compelled to, so we may do 
 many things which we do not wish to do." 
 
 Sem. 1. Th? word fo is used in a very great variety of relations and sig- 
 nifications. 
 
 Sem. 2. The last example of synonyms (mogen unb IDoHen) shows how difficult 
 it often is to render from one language to another. It is especially diificult 
 when the writer is treating of significations and use of words. 
 
 Hem. S. Though the idioms may be better understood without trajislathig them, 
 it still may be well to have the translations given. In so doing, the verbs tnB« 
 gcit and iDoUen may be rendered by "may" and "wW," but it is better not to 
 translate these words. 
 
 IV. LETTERS AND BUSINESS FORMS. 
 
 1. Gilt StCfft intl&tf, etc. 1. The word "uncle" may be rendered into Ger- 
 man by the word Onttl of Latin origin, or by the pure German word Oftcim. — 
 
 2. „9fad^ nenntcigigcm Seiben, ei(;."=" after a painful sickness of nine days." — 
 
 3. „^ttnn|l 2)U 2)tr bcnfen"="you can easily imagine." — 4. It is not uncom- 
 mon in familiar correspondence to use capital letters with „®u" and „^i)X," — 
 5. „!X)<t S)tt ja ttO^l tt)etit"="as"you well know;" ia, as an adverb is intensive, 
 but it is often omitted in translating into English. — 6. „DI)ne irflcnb Well^e, etc." 
 ="without mentioning any of the attending circumstances;" ivgcnb frequently 
 means ••whatever," &&: „i(genb3em«nb"=" any ^ej-somwAaiei/e?-;" „trgenbfetn)a§" 
 
 'any thing whatever;" irgenb is often omitted in translation — 7. „9ll[e3 Stn» 
 
 _«„ 
 
72 ^teacher's companion. 
 
 beve"=" every Ming else;" 91tlc8 in this case is used collectively (see Lesson 
 XLIII., 4) ; Slnbcte is in the plural, and is in apposition with 9lttc& 
 
 2. ®IiitfM)Unf$, etc. 1. „®I«atl3Unfi$ jum elc."=" congratulation to a father 
 on his birthday."— 2. „®^ iuiit mx BCDIS We^ JU 3)JutT;e"="it mates me feel 
 right sad." — 3. „5Kit b« gtofett ®c6utt3t(»3atOrte"=".with.the great birthday 
 cake."— 4. „t)tx Sag ijl ItOi^, c«c."="it is scarcely daybreak." — 5. „aBe(in 3|v 
 ®uc^ an ben, ete."="just as you are taking your seats at the table." — 6. ,,5l6w 
 e? i|J gar fo fc|i)n,"="but it is so very charming." — 7. „®iuge 3)Juttcr, etc."= 
 "give my love to mother, and my brothers and sisters, and be assured of the 
 warm affection of " Tour obedient son 
 
 "Otto." 
 Sem. These forms of salutation are not capable of a literal translation. 
 
 3. SeientanicKe SOritt, etc. The students should be required to give both 
 a literal and a free translation of all these letters. This one may be translated 
 freely thus: "Mr. and Mrs. Eberhard send their compliments to Mr. and Mrs. 
 Prenzler, and respectfully ask the honor of their company at dinner at five 
 o'clock on Wednesday next." 
 
 ■ 4. SlntlOIIltt This may be translated freely thus : "Mr. and Mrs. Prenzler 
 Bead their compliments to Mr. and Mrs. Eberhard, and beg leave to state that 
 it will give them great pleasure to accept their kind invitation to dinner on 
 Wednesday next." 
 
 5. a3ettra«ti(!^C fjorm. l. "Dr. gjungc, c«e."="Dr. Eunge will be espe- 
 cially glad to make your acquaintance."— 2. „Wlit frmntifil)aftlii|em ©tuf, 3|r" 
 ="Yours most truly;" instead of „3l)t" the form „tier 3^ri3e"nie,y be used. — 
 3. „SWic^aeK ©trage Sto. 126"="No. 126 Michaels Street;" the number of the 
 house is placed after the name of the street in German. 
 
 6. SltttttOrt, 1. „ltnb fann bal)er, cte."="and therefore can not accept."— 
 2. ,,©0 fejt ii^ Scbaueve, ete."="however much I may regret not being able to 
 see Dr. Eunge." 
 
 7.§bfli$e 55orm. TMs may be translated freely thus: "Mr. and Mrs. 
 Dietrich send their compliments to Mr. and Mrs. Kiesewettpr, and beg them to 
 do them the favor to dine with them next Tuesday at six o'clock." 
 
 8. SttttttOlt. "Mr. and Mrs. Kiesewetter send their best respects to Mr. 
 and Mrs. Dietrich, and accept with pleasure their kind invitation to dine with 
 them on Monday next." 
 
 9. aBcd)fcI6ritf, "For 1500 Thalers." 
 
 "To the Disconto-Gesellsehaft in Berlin." 
 "Please pay at~sight by. this first bill of exchange to Mr. Friedrich Wilhelm 
 Lindemann the sum of fifteen hundred thalers '(in Prussian money), for value 
 received, and place the same to account as per advice. 
 
 "Tours truly, 
 " JOBN W . EiTBLBERe, Banker in Vienna. 
 "Vienna, Aug. 12, 1869." 
 
KEY TO THE SECOND PAET. 13 
 
 Hem. Dates are usually written on documents and in letters by placing the 
 number of the day as the numerator, and the number of the month as the de- 
 nominator of a fraction, thus : for Aug. 12, 1869, they would write "'Vs) '69-" 
 
 SlnlOCifunfl (note). 800 Thaler. 
 
 Four months after date (or on demand), I promise to pay Mr. Klein, or or- 
 der, for value received, the sum of eight hundred Prussian Thalers. 
 
 V. EEADINa LESgOKS. 
 
 S)ie ieitlfdje ©^rOt^C. l. „3^re miV.XimtW^i("="^^^ Mstory of its for- 
 mation or development."— 2. „®ie tji We urftriingTtc^e (©jjtad&e)." — s. , Knb 6e= 
 
 fonbev? beffetl"="and inhabited especially its northern and middle part." — 4. 
 iiSScx in Etftnber, obcr ioSj"="vras the inventor of, or at least the one who 
 prefeoted the German alphabet." — 5. „£tn t^citi3evSBefbrlierH"=:"an active pri- 
 moter of the German language." — 6. „3|i bic UrflJriinglic^t (SfWC^e) cineS."— .7. 
 „®to6en Qin^Vi^"="a groat influence." — 8. The Hohenstaufen reigned in 
 Swabia and JE'rancomania fjrom about A.D. 1056 to A.D. 1268; the dukes of 
 this house were noted for their spirit and enterprise, and their patronage of 
 science and literature ; several of the dukes of this house were elected emper- 
 ors, as Conrad III., Frederick Earbarossa, Henry VI., and Conrad IV. — 9. 
 „S)te et'^ij^te allgemetne SUbun3"="th6 higher general culture."— 10. „3luf 
 
 Ktl^e eini»irtteit"="upon which the following circumstances exercised 
 
 a favorable influence."— 11. Sefonicrg (EiuriJ) feine) 9xeU$tm unb Siebev.- 12. 
 
 „Sic ^eitttge aUgemcine ©^Vtftft)rac^e"="the present universal language of liter- 
 ature." — 13. ,.3n ben tatigett 2e6m«Iauf"="in the long history."— 14. 3« «n= 
 tex\iSjt\i)m (see §128, 3,Jlem. 2). — I5.„3n benen bet Strom, c«c."=" in which the 
 stream of its continuous change seems (to have been) arrested, and (in which) 
 it seems to have assumed a more or less fixed form." — 16. ,Mex ev|l tntt bcm 
 SlufBIu^ett efc."="but it first began to assume its present form with the com- 
 mencement of our new classic literature, which dates from the middle of the 
 eighteenth centary." 
 
 2)C8 SCUtfcftCtt SBlttCrlanb. l. This piece contains many poetic compounds 
 of names of countries, as: 9)tcugcnlanb=ba§8anb 3)reupen! <£iiit)alientonb=©c^toa= 
 ten; Saterl«nb=Satern; ©teterlttnb=©tetermart, cfc. — 2. The German empire 
 
 was divided in 1438 into four "circles:" Bavarian, Bhenish, Westphalian, and 
 Saxon ; their number was increased in 1521 to ten circles: the Austrian, Bava- 
 rian, Upper-Rhenish, Lower-Ehenish, Burgundian, Westphalian, Upper-Saxon, 
 and Lower-Saxon ; these were broken up, at the dissolution of the German 
 empire in 1806. — 3. Swabia covered what forms now the southern part of Ba- 
 den and "Wiirtemberg, and the southwestern part of Bavaria; it was composed, 
 as were the other circles, of many petty sovereign states.— 4. Westphalia ex- 
 tended from the German Ocean to the Ehine, covering all of Oldenburg, part 
 of Hanover, the present Prussian province of Westphalia, and part of the pres- 
 ent Ehinish province of Prussia ; there was also a Duchy of Westphalia, which 
 formed a part of the circle of Westphalia; the kingdom of Westphalia, formed 
 by Napoleon after the battle of Jena, 1806, extended from the Elbe nearly to 
 the Khine, through a part of central and northern Germany; the kingdom was 
 
74 teacher's companion. 
 
 dissolved after the battle of Leipsio, 1813. — 5. The Belt separates the islands 
 of Zealand and Filnen (belonging to Denmark) from the main land; or rather 
 the Grosse Belt separates Zealand from Funen, and the Kleine Belt separates 
 Filueri from the main land. — 6. The word He Wtaxt (Middle-German, marke; 
 Old-German, marka; Gothic, marka; Anglo-Saxon, mearc; English, mark) is 
 the original German word, for boundary, but it is now almost entirely displaced 
 by the Slavic word &ttnie, though Schiller uses it in the Rauber, 3, 2, ,,ijl Ijkr 
 bie Korl fetncr (be? 3J[mfi|ra) Scfiimmung?" ®ii! SSKnttis allied to the Latin 
 word margo=:boundary. The word tStati waa applied to a laud, a province, or 
 the border of a country, and tljpn to any province or district. The sovereign 
 of a SDIorB was called a SSlartgcaf (Markgrave, whence the English word Mark- 
 graviate for a district called a SBlorB). The Markgrave of Brandenburg, 
 Frederick III., was made the first king of Prussia, under the title of Frederick 
 I., by the Emperor of Germany, in 1701. The title mark (or rather marco) was 
 given to several districts of Italy, as Ancona, Bologna, etc., during the Middle 
 Ages. — 7. The word ®iine (=©«nbpBfO has come into the German (like the 
 French dune) from the Dutch word duin (=©anb'^iigel), which, like the English 
 down (from Anglo-Saxon dun=hiM), is from the Keltic dun=hill. The ISiiiien 
 are hills of sand, formed, either naturally or artifically, along the northern 
 coasts of Germany, through the actions of the waves on the sand along the 
 beach; they serve to protect the land along the coast from the invasion of the 
 sea, during high tide, or when the wind blows for a long time. From this word 
 is derived the proper name SiinHv^Ctt (Dunkirk).— 8. SBo bcr tmS btv ^mi 
 Elbe fc|tt)ijrt. 
 
 Gitt ^btnttUttt 1. „S!Bti: 5cta3ertm"="we were besieging;" the progress- 
 ive form of the English verb is almost always rendered by the simple form in 
 German (see Lesson IV.).— 2. „S)em gclbmatfl^ftll WOT, etc."="tbe field-mar- 
 shal was astonishingly anxious to know exactly what was the condition of 
 affairs in the fortification ;" gclcgcn can not be rendered literally into English 
 (see Lesson XXXIX., 5); it is the past participle of licgcn {to lie), but is used 
 here as an adjective; its idiomatic use is seen in such expressions as: „gut 
 gettgtnen 3eit"="in the very nick of time, or very opportunely;" „e8 t|l mir 
 wenig bavatt ^eXe$en"="l care little about that;" „c8 tfl KW iwm grtcgen" 
 =" that's nothing, or that is a matter of no consequence." — 3. „3Jor STilit^ unb 
 3)imflcifct"=" through boldness and zeal to be of service, almostalittle too rash." 
 — 4. „©ttegen wir ancrlet"=" all kinds of by no means trifling, anxious thoughts 
 rushed through my head." — 5, iDcr @t)ion' came into the German language as 
 early as the year 1650 ; it is derived directly from the French e^on (compare 
 Spanish, espion' ; Italian, splo'ne ; all of which signify a spy), from the Old- 
 French espie (compare Italian spia=a spy), which is itself derived from the 
 Middle-German die spejie=cartful examination. The German verb fpoljcit 
 (Middle-German, spgAcre; Old-German, spe7io»; Gothic, jspaiAaw) is allied to the 
 Latin verb specere, spicere (=io see), from which are derived many English 
 words, as inspect, expect, aspect, respect. — 6. „EnflI)lo§ td& mili^ rm'J';="I soon 
 made up my mind what to do." — 7. „?J«I)m bte glftiUc^c ©eicgen^ett tbft'^r"= 
 " availed myself of the favorable opportunity ;" tt)a|vne'^mcn=to observe, perceive, 
 profit by, avail one^s self, etc. ; thus : ©tic ®elegen^eit WaI)vne^nten=to embrace 
 an opportunity; feincn SJcvt^cil ltift^rne^mcn=to look out for one's own interest. 
 
KEY TO THE SECOND PART. 75 
 
 3iem. It will be noticed that in Munchhanaens quaint and extravagant tales 
 many expressions occur which would not be employed in ordinary writing or 
 speaking. 
 
 2)te ^linneit. l. „Wii^i foIgcnbE Sefc^veitUtl9"=" gives the following de- 
 scription." — 2. Scbiitfen fcincS geuhg (Gen.), see §178,1. — 3. SBcpc^t HXS (idio- 
 matic)=consiats of {see § 258). — 4. ®er Sort (Middle-German and Old-German, 
 hart ; Anglo-Saxon, beard; Dutch, board) is allied to Old-Slavic brada (Bohem- 
 ian and Servian, brada; Polish, broda; Bussian, boroda) ; Latin, barba, and 
 "Welsh, 6a)/. In Slavic ra often occurs for ar; in Latin rb not unfrequently oc- 
 curs for rt in German, as: barba=^att; verbum=WoH, — 5. S>fl8 Scuer — in- 
 stead of JJcur, as Luther wrote — (Middle-German, WMr; Old-German, ^»»"; 
 Anglo-Saxon, Danish, Swedish, dasfyr; Old-Nordisb, derfyr) is allied to Greek 
 irSp—Jire. — 6. „25on JEturebem S!tel)"="of cattle of all kinds." — 7. ®cr SBolb ■ 
 (Old-German, wait) occurs also in Anglo-Saxon, wcdd, weald, in the signification 
 ot a forest; tha Anglo-Saxon derivative 'Mai^a (English wood) signified either 
 a forest or wood (|)0lj) ; the tendency in the English language to drop the sound 
 of I before another consonant in words of either Teutonic or Komance origin, 
 appears in a large number of words, in which the I is yet retained in spelling, 
 as : aZms, psa^m, pa^m, ca?m, caZf, calves, ha?f, halves j chaZk, baZk, ta?k, waZk, 
 Fa^klandj folk, yolk, soMer, LincoZnj wouZd, shouZd (to which in modern En- 
 glish has been assimilated the word could; Old-English, coude). — 8. ^.^inbcrtt 
 fie am freira Oang, e((!."="prevent them from walking freely or easily, for the 
 reason that they can not march well on foot." — 9. ,,9luf ben 3f alien iti St)terC^ 
 gelc^nt"="feam'mj'(pres. part.)." — 10. „Sn 9)ferbe"="on horseback;" compare 
 „JU gu§"="on foot." — 11. .,!D5nc feflcS Sanb"="without any strong band of 
 union." — 12. „3n ben SanHJf, «te."="they go into battle arranged in the shape 
 of a wedge, and uttering horrid loud cries." — 13. 9)ftujje Ijflben fte ntd^t (i 280, 6). 
 — li. „®ie3 finb"="these (the wagons) are." — 15. „9[nberi3wo ge6i)ten"= 
 •'born elsewhere (i.e., away from where they are when grown up)." — 16. rfSBic 
 to8 unsernunfttse SSteV="like unreasoning or brute cattle." ■ 
 
 (Silttritt in bie btUff^e ©l^tnCiS. l. „$b^et Wlagt, e«(;."="Higher thrlUs 
 the pleasure of seclusion; It is peace that floa.ts hero, Softly penetrates to the 
 innermost heart. So that no anguish shall ever rage within it." — 2. ,,^i^ti 
 ©4tt)ei3en"="^cep silence."— 3. „aCtlbe3 ©ti'eBen, cte."="The wild strife (of 
 life; no longer sweeps by us."— 4. „SBo bev fevnen, efc."=" Where the snow of 
 the distant peaks,Which gives the clouds a golden hue. Streams down to us with 
 earnest feeling,;" bet femen ®t))fel (gen. pi.); fo is a relative pronoun (§ 114, 3). 
 —5. „Sinfam bet ?Jatut, etc."="lii solitude opening his heart to nature, Lives 
 only upon remembrance of the past. Is wholly lost in her (in nature). Thinks 
 only of the song. Which God has sunk deep into his heart."— 6. „2)er bcn Si(|= 
 ter, «te."="Who (i.e. God) has chosen the poet. That he should break forth 
 to the light, A remnant of the heroic spirit of ages past." — 7. „Sttnet ©^on^cit, 
 
 fite."="A flowery field of sweet beauty. Far from yonder desert world." 8. 
 
 Etefet f^iinen Serge (gen. pi.). 
 
 Sem. It is often impossible to translate poetry from one language into an- 
 other in a literal way, and at the same time retain any of the poetic spirit of 
 the original. 
 
76 teacher's companion. 
 
 ;30fjann aBnlfgttttB ""» ®Otfit. l. „2)ort Ictnte et, efc."="tliere he made 
 the acquaintance of Herder."— 2. SeS Si^tCtS SRuf=bet SRuf bti Stl^tfrS — 3. 
 /,Etnanntet^n sum Cegation3=9i«t^"=" appointed him Counselor of the Embassy." 
 —i. ,MaSjie er mtt bcm ^erjog im SElbjug mtt"="he took part with the Duke 
 of Weimar, in the Prussian army, in the campaign against the French;" the 
 compound verb „mitm«c^eil" (has the prefix at the end of the sentence). — 5. „St£9 Ct 
 fic^ feine^, etc."—" he had himself removed from his office of serving the state." 
 —6. „®ot5c gilt aW"="Gothe is considered."— 7. „$«t cr iftg 9Iu«3eseti$net|le 
 9elet|let"= " has he achieved the most distinguished success." — 8. „3tt jebcv ®ftt= 
 tttn9"="ip every kind (of poetry)." — 9. „(JSeIt£n aW 2)?uficr"="are considered 
 model productions." — 10. „®rcpe0 Wflete er"="he aehieYed great success." 
 
 2)Cg Siintgg ©roS. l. „JJe6et bie 3»aien"=" beyond all measure."— 2. „Se= 
 
 •ftatteten fte"="they buried."— 3. „2)amU We ©tatte"="so that the place."— 4. 
 
 SJon SJieraanb ; Grimm endeavored to diminish greatly the use of capital letters, 
 
 but many of his examples are not followed by any large portion of the best 
 
 German writers." 
 
 SlUfrUf i)C8 Siilttgg. 1. „<£0 Wcnig ffit tnetn, efc."="as little with my true- 
 hearted people (i.e., the Prussians)." — 2. „Sebatf cS, efc."="is there need of 
 giving an account of the causes." — 8. „Ste Itcgen jte,e!c."=" they lie clear be- 
 fore the eyes of nnblinded Europe." — i. „2)ft« 5Bfarl iti Sanfce«"="themar- 
 fow (i. e., the strength)."— 6. „S)urc| We jltcngjlc ©tfiillung, etc."=" hy the 
 most strict fulfillment of obligations made (by treaty) I hoped to procure a 
 lightening (of the burden) for my pepple." — 6. 3)reu5en (to Prussia). — 7. Ser 
 (Siitet (i. c, (SetoiffenSftei^eit, ^xe,etc.).—8, „3n ien Sorapf 8ejogen"="have 
 gone to battle." — 9. „9lDer ttel^E Dpfer <M(^i e«c."="but whatever sacrifices." 
 
 ^Urjttietnge i^tagen. l- .iSBcnn fiinf ©afle ftnii"="when there are five 
 
 guests."— 2. (rSufgcttagen mxitn"=" are served up."— 3. SIuS einem ©ad soli Rom; 
 
 ooU in such expressions is not declined. — 4. „Sugtetc^"="at the same time." — 
 5. „®in ®tof$eitB(Ob"="ii loaf of bread that sells for agroschen." 
 
 9JlCW£§flittC. 1. „ttnb BetUmmett, etc."="a,ni with anxious face the sailor 
 sees an unruffled surface all around."— 2. „3n bet wngeljeurcit S!BEite"="in the 
 vast expanse or distance." 
 
 Set Eirlni^Ct ©Ct. !• SSon ie5cr=»on je ■^er=from ever hither=from time 
 immemorial. — 2. Set ®picgcl (Middle-German, Spiegel; Old-German, spiegal) is 
 from the Latin speculum (=mirror), which is itself from spicere=to looK—Z. 
 „<S.m troigt felbf}"="and upon one of these is indeed (felbjl) the village (of) 
 Ottok."— 4. Sin Sluge gefliSaut (Jat).- 6. ,Mi bie 3eit"=" when the time returns." 
 
III. NOTES TO PART THIRD. 
 
 § 1. Indo-Enropean Languages, When advanced classes are reviewing 
 the Introduction, it may be of advantage for the teacher to present to them 
 on the blackboard the following 
 
 TABLE OF INDO-EUEOPEAN LANGUAGES. 
 Groups. Dead Languages. 
 
 Indian Sanscrit Prakrit. . . .Pali. 
 
 Persian 
 
 Greek. . 
 
 -I 
 
 Zend or ) 
 Bactrian j ' 
 
 .Pehlevi Pari . 
 
 iHindostanee (with 
 over thirty other 
 dialects). 
 Language of the 
 Gypsies. 
 
 i Modern Persian 
 (with the dialects 
 of Afghanlstafi, 
 Kourdistan, and 
 Bokhara). 
 
 ( Classic Greek Modern Greek. 
 
 ' ( (Allied to Greek) Albanian. 
 
 ( Oscan. 
 
 Italic < Latin 
 
 ( Umbrian. 
 
 Keltic. 
 
 (Cymric) . 
 (Gaelic) . . 
 
 Slavic J Old-Slavic. 
 
 I Italian 
 I Spanish 
 ) Portuguese 
 
 ■ "S French 
 
 / Proven gal 
 \ Wallachian 
 
 ( Welsh 
 
 ■ I Breton 
 ( Scotch 
 
 ■ I Irish 
 
 f Bussian 
 JPoHlh 
 
 ■ I Bohemian 
 [ Servian- 
 
 . . .Lithuanian 
 
 Teutonic 
 
 ■ Gothic Gothic (extinct). 
 
 {Icelandic 
 Norwegian 
 Swedish 
 
 Old-Friesan . .Friesan Dialects 
 
 Old-Saxon Dialects 
 
 Anglo-Saxon. Old-English .English 
 
 Old-Dutth. . .Dutch 
 
 Old-German .Middle-Ger. . .German 
 
 Eem. In Germany the term Indo-Germanic (3llt)i)?®ermamfii)) is usually ap- 
 plied to these languages. In other countries the term Indo-European is gener- 
 ally preferred. Some writers call thmi the "Aryan," and a few designate them 
 as the "Japhetic" languages. ,' 
 
78 teacher's companion. 
 
 flesides the dialects wMoh are descended from the Sanscrit, there are several 
 other languages spoken in IndiS, as : the Deccan language, which is spoken by 
 about one sixth of the population ; the Arabic language, spoken by many of 
 the Mohammedans ; and many Mongolian and other dialects, which are spoken 
 by those that have come from the mountainous regions to the north of India. 
 
 In Europe, also, there are other than Indo-European languages, as : the Mon- 
 golian languages of Finland, Lapland, and Hungary ; the Turkish language 
 and the Basque (descended from the ancient Iberian) language, spoken in 
 some Spanish and French provinces along the Bay of Biscay. 
 
 §2. Teutonic Languages. Some writers prefer the term " Germanic" for 
 the entire group of these languages. The terminology employed in the Ger- 
 man Course seems most appropriate, especially when spea|:ing of the fully de- 
 veloped languages. *f . 
 
 In treating of the dialects alone, we find a very gradual gradation of dialectic 
 differences in passing from the Alps on the south to Sweden on the north. 
 These dialects are therefore often classed into three groups : the Upper-German, 
 the Lower-German, and Scandinavian. The dialects of Germany alone, ex- 
 tending from the Alps to the Baltic, are also often classed into three groups : 
 those of South Germany, Central Germany, and North Germany. 
 
 Mem. The Gothic language was spoken by all of those tribes of Eastern Ger- 
 many which, on their first entrance into Europe, occupied the region lying be- 
 tween the Caspian Sea and the Baltic. It was thus spoken by the Gothi, 
 Gepidae, Heruli, Vandali, Quadi, and Bastarnffl. The chief monument of the 
 Gothic language extant is the " Codex argenteus" (silver manuscript) in the 
 library of the University of Upsala in Sweden. This manuscript dates from 
 the fifth or sixth century. It was probably written in Spain, during the do- 
 minion of the West Goths. It was discovered in the sixteenth century in the 
 library of a monastery in Verden (a small city near Bremen), which was found- 
 ed by Charlemagne, and was immediately recognized as the long lost transla- 
 tion of the Bible made by Ulfilas. The manuscript was taken to Prague in the 
 same century. When this city fell into the hands of the Swedes (1648) it was 
 carried to Stockholm; from this city it was abstracted in 1653 by a Dutch 
 traveler (Isaac Vossius) ; the Swedish chancellor. Count de la Gardie, purchased 
 it in 1662"for six hundred thalers, had it bound in silver (whence the name "Co- 
 dex argenteus"), and presented it to the University of Upsala. This precious 
 remnant of the Gothic language is a dark purple parchment: the letters are 
 of gold, as are the first three lines of each of the Gospels, and the first word of 
 each section (the present division of the Bible into chapters and verses not 
 having been made until the sixteenth century); of the original three hundred 
 and thirty leaves only a hundred and seventy seven are preserved. Small 
 fragments of the translation of the Bible are also in the libraries of Wolfen- 
 {luttel, Vienna, Milan, and the Vatican. The Calendar is in Naples. 
 
 § 8. Pre-Historic-Period. Beovulf was a hero, who, according to the legend, 
 overcame the wicked Grendel, and killed a powerful dragon who was devasting 
 the land. 
 
 § 9. Old-German-Period. The words ^om the Latin and Greek have under- 
 gone transformations as follows : 
 
NOTES TO THE THIED PABT. 
 
 79 
 
 Latin or Greet. 
 
 Gothic. 
 
 Old-German. 
 
 Mid.-Gor. 
 
 New-Ger. 
 
 Anglo-Saxon. English. 
 
 ay^eXo?, 
 
 aggilus, 
 
 angil, 
 
 engel. 
 
 Enaet, 
 
 sengel, angel. ■ 
 
 KvpiaKij, 
 
 
 ohirihha. 
 
 kirche. 
 
 Sti'dje, 
 
 circ, chureh. 
 
 claustrum, 
 
 
 ohloster, 
 
 kl6ster, 
 
 j^loflcv, 
 
 cloister. 
 
 fjLOva'^oSj 
 
 
 munich, 
 
 miinioh, 
 
 mu&, 
 
 muneo, monk. 
 
 KuXl^, 
 
 
 chelih, 
 
 kelioh. 
 
 Mii, 
 
 chalice. 
 
 irpza^VTipo^f 
 
 
 priestar, 
 
 priester, 
 
 5)vteflcv, 
 
 preost, priest. 
 
 CTrto-KoTros, 
 
 
 biseof, 
 
 bischof. 
 
 Sifc&of, . 
 
 bisceop, iUhop. 
 
 ^id^oXos, 
 
 diabulus, 
 
 tiufal. 
 
 tiuvel, 
 
 Seufel, 
 
 deofol, devil. 
 
 paraveredus. 
 
 
 parefrot. 
 
 pherit, 
 
 S)fevb, 
 
 horse. 
 
 soribere. 
 
 
 soripan, 
 
 schriben 
 
 WteiCctt, 
 
 mite. 
 
 diohtrse. 
 
 
 tiht6n. 
 
 tihten. 
 
 bic^teK, 
 
 towritepoetry. 
 
 § 10. Middle-German Period. Both the Elemisli poetry and the poetry of 
 
 the Minnesingers (singers of love) were influenced^ if not originaily inspired, by 
 the songs of the Troubadours of Provence. The number of the Minnesingers 
 must have been very large, as a hundred and fifty names of the chief ones have 
 been handed down. 'Walther von der Vogelweide is esteemed the greatest 
 genius among them. The songs of the Minnesingers did not treat of love 
 alone, but also of war, religion, and friendship. 
 
 The Niebelungenlied was written in the earliest part of the thirteenth cent- 
 ury. There are twenty four manuscripts containing the whole or part of the 
 poem. It was entirely lost out of sight from the seventeenth to the eighteenth 
 century, when a part of it was printed (1752), though the whole was not print- 
 ed till 1810. The plot is laid in the fifth century. It is worked up with much 
 grandeur, and is full of sad and even painful passages of grief. 
 
 § 20. Comparison of Grammar. A few English nouns change the radical 
 vowel in the plural, as : 
 
 Anglo-Saxon. 
 
 Old-English. 
 
 New-English. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. Flural. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Mann, 
 
 men. 
 
 
 man, men. 
 
 Vifmann, 
 
 vimmann. 
 
 
 woman, women. 
 
 f8t. 
 
 J6t. 
 
 
 foot, feet. 
 
 t6d. 
 
 t6d. 
 
 
 tooth, teeth. 
 
 mfts. 
 
 mys. 
 
 mens, mys. 
 
 mouse, mice. 
 
 gos, 
 
 ggs. 
 
 gos, gees. 
 
 goose, geese. 
 
 brodhor, 
 
 br6dhru. 
 
 broder, breder. 
 
 brother, brethren. 
 
 § 23. Formation of Dialects. The tendency to form dialects is constantly 
 manifesting itself in every country. It appears with more or less prominence 
 in every community, in- every social circle, in every trade or profession, in ev- 
 ery religious or political organization, and, indeed, in almost every family, and 
 with every individual person. It shows itself in the change of pronunciation, 
 accent, spelling, signification and use of words, in the dropping of old words ' 
 and the adding of new ones, and in the modification given to grammatical 
 forms and constructions. 
 
 Thus, in America, the pronunciation of Niagara (Nee-ah-gah'-rah) has been 
 changed to Niag'ara; Ohio (Oh'-ee-oh) haa been changed to OWo (Oh-high'-oh); 
 
80 teacher's companion. 
 
 Iowa (ee'-oh-ali) to Imia (T'-oh-way) ; Shaw'angunk to Shawng'-um ; Cadix (in 
 Ohio) to Cad'-iss. Similar changes in the pronunciation of proper namesAn Eu- 
 rope have been usually attended hy changes in spelling, thus : Londi'nium has 
 changed to Zon'don; Eboraoum, to York; Durover'num, to Do'ver; Colo'nia, to 
 i?oln (English and Frenoh,to Cologne); Vindobo'na, to SBieni Terges'te, to 
 Srte iVi Lug'dunum, to Lyons; Burdiga'la, to Bordeaux; Mediola'num, to Mila'- 
 no (English and French, Milan ; German, 3)J « i I « It b) ; Danu'bius, to S) o n a It 
 (English and French, i)areMJe) ; Ehe'nus, to 0ll)eitti Al'bis, to SlSej Kho- 
 da'nus, to Shone. ■ 
 
 This tendency to change the pronunciation and accent of proper names is 
 seen in the modification given to the names of places by brakemen and con- 
 ductors on railroads; thus they cry out: Mor'-rissee-ny for Morrisania; Al'- 
 laniic for Atlan'tic. The inhabitants of Allegheny City have thrown the ac- 
 cent back to the first syllable {Al'-legheny). And one hears in New-England 
 fopennap'penny (for four pence and half a penny) ; git for get. 
 
 Many words are used in certain parts of America with local significations. 
 Thus, in New-England, the word meadow is applied to rich, low, wet land along 
 the banks of rivers, upon which grass is grown; in most other parts of the 
 country a meadow is a piece of land of any kind upon which grass is grown for 
 the purpose of making hay. In the Western States the boys epeak of " throw- 
 ing TOcfe. (instead of stones) at a person." West of the AUeghanies the term 
 hucleetofcoal is used, but east of the AUeghanies the term scuttle or hod of coal 
 is employed. In tjie signification of / think, New-Englanders frequently say 
 I guess; Southerners say I reckon; and nearly all Americans say lexpect. The 
 demonstrative pronouns this and that are often used as adverbs in expressions 
 like "the cloth is that wide" (for "so wide"). 
 
 In some of the retired mountainous regions of Kentucky, Tennessee, and 
 North Carolina, the variations in pronunciation and use of words have accu- 
 mulated to almost a sufficient degree to form a distinct dialect of the English 
 language, similar to the many local dialects found in England and in all coun- 
 tries of Europe. It is only by constant intercourse between different parts 
 of the country and by the general education of the people that the growth of 
 dialects is checked in America. These dialects resemble water-plants, which 
 grow in swamps and stagnant pools, but not in flowing streams of pure water. 
 
 § 24. Upper-German Dialects. In these dialects the consonants are gener- 
 ally the same as in the High-German (§ 6); they are often strengthened by 
 being doubled, and the harsh sounds *, pf, i, fi, and id) predominate (the lat- 
 ter occurring after a vowel as well as before one — compare §40, 11, 3); thus, in 
 these dialects, the words f^Icift, ifl, tcjl, are pronounced fcftlSfft, ifdjt, I>efd)t; * 
 has the harsh sound in all positions (as in § 40, 17, 1) ; thus, in t4 re^t, fcui^t, dj 
 is as harsh as in dij, ioS), fflu^. The single vowels are changed into peculiar 
 combinations of diphthongs, with long and broad pronunciation; ^^attett/ gttr, 
 fltop/ flettt, id), Witi), JH, are pronounced as though spelled hoaben, goan (nearly 
 like haw-hen, gawn), groass, hloan, aich, ii>ia7-e, zua (or zue); the words aetcigt, 
 flCfreffen, l^itltcn, Cfien, longe, are pronounced g'saga, g'fressa, hinta, oba, longa. 
 
 § 25. Iiower-German Dialects. All the Germanic languages in their earlier 
 periods (i. e., the Gothic and Old-German, as well as the Old-Saxon, Anglo- 
 Saxon, Friesan) resembled the modern Lower-Gorman dialects much more than 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PART. 
 
 81 
 
 the Upper-Serman dialects, wUoli are indeed later developmentB, and which 
 rary from the character of the original Teutonic language more and more as 
 we go toward the Alps. The Lower-German dialects are richer in words and 
 are more expressive of tender and delicate feeling than are the Upper-German. 
 Latterly a number of Tery popular romances have appeared in these dialects. 
 Among the most brilliant of these are the works of Fritz Keuter, written in the 
 dialect of New Brandenburg, a village in Mecklenburg, near the city of Stettin, 
 on the Baltic. These dialects are usually termed Platt-Doutsob by the inhabit- 
 ants of North Germany. The following examples illustrate the differences be- 
 tween them and the High-German : 
 
 Plali-Deutsch: 
 
 ut, Hus, bruse, Lud, 
 
 hulen. 
 
 Duwel, 
 
 duern. 
 
 High-German : 
 
 mi. §«u^. Staufcn. Scute. 
 
 tjtvitn. 
 
 Xeufrt. 
 
 baucm. 
 
 PlaU-Deutsch: 
 
 auk (ok), goaen, spraken. 
 
 soken. 
 
 maken. 
 
 Kerke, 
 
 Sigh-German: 
 
 auc^. Bf^en- fpvec^m. 
 
 \\xi)m. 
 
 ma^cn. 
 
 fiitc^e. 
 
 Platt-Dmtsch: 
 
 up, helpen, Hulpe, 
 
 koopen. 
 
 supen. 
 
 loopen. 
 
 High-German: 
 
 auf. ^dfen. ■&ulfe. 
 
 laufen. 
 
 f«ufm. 
 
 laufcn. 
 
 PlaU-Deutsch: 
 
 Water, heten, laten. 
 
 Fot, 
 
 aten. 
 
 grout, 
 
 High-German: 
 
 aSaffct. ^etien. laffcn. 
 
 guB. 
 
 cffm. 
 
 8VD^. 
 
 They avoid t>f, d), fd), and 8 as much as possible ; in fp and fl, 8 has its pure 
 sound (not that of id), as in High-German, see § 4.0, 11, 3) : 
 P.-D.: Perd, Pand, Piepe, swart, small, snell, Swien, slapen, 
 H.-G.: 3>fetb.. SJfanb. ^^feife- fi^wats. Mmal. j^neU. ©d^wcin. fc^Iafen. 
 
 Rem. The following illustrates some peculiarities of the Berlin dialect : 
 .fierZw; juten Tak, janzjewit, datwetiknit, eine janz jut jebratene Janz, 
 
 H.-G.: juten Eag. gattj gEf'B- fc«8 wrip i($ nic^t. eine gang gut geSwtene ®an?. 
 
 § 28. Comparison of ludo-Enropean Languages. The words in related lan- 
 guages which resist most strongly the tendency to dialectic variation are nat- 
 urally those which are in most general use, as pronouns, cardinal numbers, 
 names of parts of the human body, and of objects of most immediate daily use. 
 
 The following examples further illustrate the relationship of the Indo-Euro- 
 pean languages: 
 
 Sanscrit, ^a(2a«; Greek, ttous (gen. •jtoSob); "LaXm, pes {gen. pedis); Gothic, 
 fotvs (Old-Nordisch, /"o^re; Old-Saxon, Anglo-Saxon, and Platt-Deutseh,yd< ; 
 English,/ooi; Dutch, voet; 01d-German,yaoz,- Middle-German, mioz). 
 
 Greek, KtipaXv; Latin, capnit (gen. capitis); Gothic, hauhith (Old-German, 
 houbith; Middle-German, Aoaii; New-German, ^aupt ; Anglo-Saxon, AeB/ed; 
 English, head; Dutch, hoqfd). 
 
 Sanscrit, dauta (from dauf=to bite) ; Greek, dSai^ (gen. oSoi/tos) ; Latin, dens 
 (gen. dentis); Gothie, tunthus (Old-German, zomS; Middle-German, zan; New- 
 German, 3o^n; Anglo-Saxon, idd/j [pi. tedh]; English, <oo(ft [j^l. teeth}). 
 
 § 32. The Geiman Alphabet. 1. The Teutonic nations originally employed 
 the Eunie letters (so called from the Old-Nordish word Bunin=a secret sign). 
 These letters were cut into pieces of bark, especially in that of the beech-tree 
 (SucOc, hence the word SucI)flobc=letter). These Siidjflobcn were attached to 
 swords, helmets, harnesses, the prows of ships, and other objects which it was 
 desirable to have endowed with special strengtU and power. The technical 
 
 D2 
 
82 teacher's companion. 
 
 word for cutting Kunio letters - was rista (an Old-Nordish verb, =rcificn, io 
 scratch), from which is derived the English verb to tvrite. The letters were also 
 out upon church bells, baptismal fonts, etc. Over three thousand examples of 
 the Kunic letters are preserved, all being either Scandinavian or Anglo-Saxon. 
 Bishop Ulfilas formed an alphabet for his translation of the Bible (see § 2) by 
 combining parts of the Eunio and of the Greek alphabets. 
 
 2. The German letters, called in English German text, are termed by German 
 printers Stottut'Wj'^ift. The English Mack letter, now called by us Old English 
 letter, is termed in German &eti)i^d)i Sdjrift. 
 
 § 31. Long Vowels. In less than one fourth of the radical vowels in the 
 German language is the length of the vowel marked (as by adding f), by 
 doubling the vowel, or by adding t after i). 
 
 1. In the Old-German all of the vowels were occasionally doubled (as in 
 iaar=3tif)^, see=:@ee, miin=mnn,root=XBtf), huus=^ani). In the early Middle- 
 German double vowels almost entirely disappeared. In the later Middle- 
 German ee and ii appear (as «eer=fet)r, 6u=bei). In the fifteenth century the 
 use of double vowels greatly increased. In the sixteenth and seventeenth 
 centuries nearly all long radical vowels were doubled (thus we find Quaal= 
 Sual, Raath—Matl), scA«)cer=fd)n>re, heeben=l)eben,Seegen=:Sesen, hooch— i)od), 
 Schooss=&dfo^, Bluut=SSh\t, Natuur=^atttt). 
 
 ■ Only the vowels a, e, and a are now ever doubled: 
 
 1. Only in the following words and their compounds is a found doubled: 
 
 Slal, Slar, 9la?, Snar (or Jar), •^um, ^mx, <SmI, ©«at, ©tuar, ©taat; and a 
 few proper names, as : Stamen, •^ttog, 5Waa?, ©aalc, ©flflr. 
 
 2. Doubling of the c is found in ffletre, Sect, ®cefl, ^nx, OTef, leer, SOIecr, 
 ©(^nee, ©ce, ©ectc.i and in some foreign words, as : Slllce, £|«uffee, ^et, 
 
 (Selee, 3iee..3:^eC' 
 
 3. Doubling of is found in SoDt, SKoDV, SBJooS. 
 
 2. The use of I) to indicate the long sound of the vowel first appeared in the 
 eleventh century, but it soon disappeared entirely (thus we find in Middle- 
 German Jar=2aift, m=if>n, {r=il)V, nemen=ntf)nKn, lam.=lal)m, Ere=(St)rt, 
 fro=itof), hol=f)0^l, erfur^a fu^r). In the fifteenth century its use was 
 introduced again and became very extensive, especially after 1 and r (thus we 
 find Walh=Wal}l, verrhaten=nnvatf)en, Jhar=Sai)r). This use then again 
 diminished. The I) is now used before I, m, n, t in the following words and 
 their compounds : 
 
 1. Sl^Ic, Sl^n, Sljne, aTjncti, oi^nlt*, Sa^tt, Sa'^re, Befa^rett, fa'^nben, fal)I, ^Ojm, 
 
 faircn, Oefa^t, gcwa^t, Saljr, fajl, Ia|m, nta|ncn, SRci^nc, SKa^r, 9)fft^I, fxdlj' 
 
 Icn, ata^m, SBaftl, SBa'^n, kOjx, Sa^l- ja^m, Sa'^it. 
 2.Se3C'|rcn, e^cHren, E^re, gene:^ni, ^e^en, ^eH Ri^Xt, feljten, Se'^nc, Ic^ticn, 
 
 Se^re, Mt% mejjx, tie^mcn, ©e'^nc, fe^t, fle^cn, fle^Ien, tue^e, weljren, sc^ten. 
 3. fflo^te, So^ne, Jo^ttett, W^xm, J)to1nen, brb^ncn, gotten; gvo^n, sctub'^nett, 
 
 ^0^1, |>bp, lio'^n, Si>% So^tt, Wle^n, O'^m, b'^nc, SRo^i,' ©o^Ie, ©o^it, tro^nen. 
 i.ffluile, Sii^ne, gulre, §ut)n, fu|l, SWiitjIe, SR^m, 3)fu|I, SRu^r, iWjren, ©tut)l, 
 
 3. The use of c to indicate the long sound of a preceding f (§ 38, 3, Bern.) first 
 appeared in the twelfth century. Its use has gradually increased since that 
 time. It is employed at present as follows : 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PART. 83 
 
 1. lamany irregular verbs of the sixth cla'ss, and in the imperfect of all 
 bm three" of the fourth class, and in the imperfect and past participles of 
 many in the fifth class (§ tH); and the second and third persons singu- 
 lar of the indicative and in the second person of the imperative of the 
 verbs 6efe^Ic«, cmijfe^Icn/ fleJciren (gef^E^en), lefen, fdjEten, fe'^en/ llelteit. 
 
 2. In the following native words : Slfcf^ieb, Meter, Stetie, Me, Siej, 2)iele, liie« 
 lien, Sicnjlag, biefet, Sinffebet, Sriebe, Ocpeber, QJejiefer, ®ie6el, ®ter, ®\iti, 
 Qixiti, ^tet, JJiefer, ffiel, fiieme, J?ien, ffie«, ^nie, Ite6, Sieb, liegen, miet^ett, nie, 
 SJiemanb, nteber, ttiebUi^, 3>friem, 0Jteb, SRtemen, Siiege, SRiegcl, SRiefe, ©c^tefer, 
 f(|ielen, ©fttene, f^ig, Wmiegen, 4ted), ©ieg, ©piel, ©pieg, ©tief (=»ater), 
 ©tiege, ©ttel, ©tier, i^tx, Zxitb, S5ic^, siel, sier, wie, wteber, tuiegen, Wiel^ern, 
 SEieye, 3iel, stemen, Sier. 
 
 3. In some foreign words, as: 1. those ending in it, as: Sljlvonomte', OeOflras 
 tj^ie', 9)i)iti)fortie', aWarie', ©ot)|ie' (but 5Wflti'fn«, ©ortt'en«) ; 2. those ending 
 in ier, as : Sarttev', ®ten«btet', Jltavier'/ Offtjiev', SJanict', 9J(iptet', Quartiet', 
 Sofejtet', 2:urmer'; 3. the following words: ffltief, gtejer, Stebel, StieS, 
 ©rie^e, ffiefet, 3Ktene, friejier, SRtemen, SRie?, ©piegel, ©tiefel, Siegel, 3i»xM. 
 
 Obs. The ending sicn (from Latin ia) in geographical proper names is not a 
 
 diphthong, as : 3ta'=Ii=en, ©i)a'=nt=en, 2)al=ma'=ItSft, ifro»a'=ti=en. 
 
 Bern. The long i is not followed by c in: 1. the German words mir, bir, ttir, 
 Stbet, Sgel, ttibet; 2. in most foreign words, as: Stpfeljt'ne, SSiitl, gttel, Cilie 
 (Ct'4t=e), SBJaWine, mine, Vlil^i, Stemtfe, SBmne, ©til, Siger. 
 
 § 38, 7. Custom was not yet fully settled whether a or c should be used in 
 • (SeMrbe, nSmlic^, ©i|emel, fitti, ■faring. 
 
 § 39. This is illustrated in the following words : 1. bet ©fel (Middle-German, 
 esel; Old-German, c«7; Gothic, njjite — ^from Latin, as!»as—a» ass); 2. bieSorcUc 
 (Middle-German, vorhen; 01d-German,/o)'AoKa=a trout); 3. bie Ocgcl (Middle- 
 German, orgel; Old-German, orgela and ergaiia — from Latin, 6rganum=an or- 
 gan) ; i. fnmmcln=f«mmelen (Middle-German, sammeaen; Old-German, samanon) ; 
 5. 6cr ^nobldtid; (Middle-German, Icnobelouch and Idobelouch; Old-German, cUo- 
 baloch)=garlic ; 6. emtifangcn (Middle-German, enpfdhen ; Old-German, inifahan) 
 =io receive; 7. empfitibcn (Middle-German, enpjmdeu; Old-German, infindan)= 
 to feel; S.ta <)5ilgrim [antiquated from ber 3)it9et] (Middle-German, ^s'Zyenre ; 
 Old-German, TJi'HATj'ffl ; from Latin, ^rfe<7ri)jMs)=pJi!yrim; 9. tcr fBIBrtel (Middle- 
 German, morler; from Latin, mortarium)=morlar; 10. tic spflaumc (Middle-Ger- 
 man, ^j/^ume; 01d-German,pArwma [and in dialects of Aix-la-Chapelle, Prwmm; 
 inWetterau, Bj-fflMme]; compare Anglo-Saxon,pZuma; English, ^fam; Swedish, 
 plommon; Danish, blomme; Dutch, prum— all from the Low-Latin pruna, from 
 plural of Latin praretim, which is allied to Greek Trpouuou [from -KpoviJivov] and 
 Keltic plurnbas); ll.bcnXagen [dat.pl.] (Middle-German, (?ere ia^'era; Old-Ger- 
 man, dim talcum; Gothic, thaim dagam); 12. roir fallen (Middle-German, to«V Ja- 
 ben) Old-German, wjV h'apemes; Gothic, iiii hdbam — allied to Latin, AoSemas); 
 13. fiinf (Middle-German, tob/"; 01d-German,/Mre/;/jn/; Goihia, fimf); 14. Su; 
 fen (Middle-German, Juoseii; Old-German, jjMosam; Anglo-Saxon, bosum)==hdsom, 
 
 Tfem. For changes of vowels, see tables on pages 234^239. 
 
 § 40. Consonants. 1. The b has been changed to m in such words as Scimm 
 (Middle-German, lamp; Old-German, lamp; Gothic, lamb; Anglo-Saxon, 'Old- 
 
84 
 
 teacheb's companion. 
 
 Nordish, and English, lamb; Dutch and Danish, lamm); bumm (Middle-Ger- 
 man, tump; Gothic, dumps; Anglo-Saxon and English, dumi)s=stupitf tciimm 
 (Middle-German, framp ; Old-German, cSram^; Anglo-Saxon, irumJ; English, 
 crumb [obsolete])=CTOofa(Z. ' • » 
 
 2. (§ 40, 4, Bern. 3.) It is not determined whether Ep^eu (=«»3') is derived from 
 the Latin word apium, or whether the two words are only distantly allied. In 
 all other cases, words having pft are of Greek origin. 
 
 3. (§ 40, 11, 3.) In the Upper-German dialects the fd) sound occurs before t 
 and 9, both before and after a rowel (as »crfcl)tefd)t tii ?=J)er jlel)|i iu? — I>efd)t 
 =6eP) ; in the Lower-German dialects Jthe fd) sound is avoided as far as pos- 
 sible (as fmnl^fdjmal i (ntU=^iSjntU ; flapcn=fc^Iafen) ; in New-High-German the 
 fd) sound is given before t and \>, even though it is not written. 
 
 § 42. Standard of German Pronunciation. Local dialects have so strong 
 a hold upon the speech of the inhabitants of every region of Germany, that 
 dialectic peculiarities affect the intonation and pronunciation of oven the most 
 highly educated classes among the native population of every city and province. 
 The tendency to establish a uniform national pronunciation is rapidly grow- 
 ing. The city of Berlin is eva^ vear becoming more and more the political, 
 commercial, social, literary, ana artistic metropolis of Germany. As such it is 
 drawing to itself persona of wealth and culture from all parts of Germany. 
 Indeed, the majority of persons in high literary and social circles in Berlin are 
 not natives of that city. As a result of this mingling together of persons from 
 all parts of Germany, there is being developed in the upper circles of society in 
 Berlin a pronunciation of the language that is more truly national than is to be 
 found in any other city. The pronunciation of the leading actors and singers 
 upon the stage in all parts of Germany conforms at present to the usage that 
 prevails in the upper literary and social circles' in the city of Berlin. 
 
 § 48. Capital Letters. During the Old and Middle German periods only 
 proper names began with capital letters (as is now the case in English). The 
 present extensive use of capitals is of late growth in the language. 
 
 Authorities vary greatly about the use and the omission of capital letters. 
 Thus : 
 
 1. Some writers use them with all indefinite pron., when used substantively. 
 
 2. Some always begin (Sin with a capital letter, when it is a numeral. 
 
 3. Some always begin 6u and iljr with capitals (though most authorities begin 
 these words with capitals only in correspondence). 
 
 § 49. Comparison of German and English Words. The following e:xamples 
 illustrate the historic development of words in the German and the English 
 language (with comparisons with the Dutch language) : * 
 
 eotuc. 
 
 Old-German. ] 
 
 Middlo-Ser. New-Germau. 
 
 Anglo-Saxon. 
 
 English. 
 
 Dulci. 
 
 Handus ; 
 
 hant. 
 
 hant, ^sitS; 
 
 hand, . 
 
 hatid; 
 
 hand.. 
 
 Gras; 
 
 gras. 
 
 gras, ®vaa ; 
 
 gras. 
 
 grass; 
 
 gras. 
 
 Figgus; 
 
 fingar. 
 
 vinger, Stnget; 
 
 finger, 
 
 Jmger; 
 
 finger. 
 
 Huhrus ; 
 
 hungar, 
 
 hunger, plunger; 
 
 hungur. 
 
 hunger; 
 
 honger. 
 
 Hfls; 
 
 hfls. 
 
 hfls, §(IU3 i 
 
 hfls. 
 
 house; 
 
 hfls. 
 
 Meins; 
 
 min. 
 
 min, nteUti 
 
 min. 
 
 mine ; 
 
 mijn. 
 
 H«r; 
 
 hiar. 
 
 hier, '^ter; 
 
 Ur, 
 
 here; 
 
 hier. 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PART. 
 
 85 
 
 Gothic. 
 
 old-German. 
 
 Middle-Gsr. 
 
 Nenr-Germaa. 
 
 Anglo-Saxon. 
 
 English. 
 
 Dutch. 
 
 
 fallan, 
 
 vallerij 
 
 fallen ; 
 
 feallan, 
 
 fall; 
 
 vallen. 
 
 finthan ; 
 
 fincLan, 
 
 vinden, 
 
 pnbeni 
 
 findan, 
 
 find; 
 
 vindenp 
 
 
 hraban, 
 
 rabe. 
 
 SRaSe; 
 
 brafen. 
 
 raven; 
 
 raaf. 
 
 hesC?); 
 
 bar, * 
 
 bar, 
 
 •paat; 
 
 bar. 
 
 hair; 
 
 haar. 
 
 Bleps;. 
 
 slaf, 
 
 sUf, 
 
 Si*Iaf; 
 
 slap. 
 
 sleep; 
 
 slap. 
 
 hairto ; 
 
 berza. 
 
 b5rze. 
 
 l>ets! 
 
 heorte. 
 
 heart; 
 
 bart. 
 
 Giban ; 
 
 gebanj 
 
 geben. 
 
 gefien; 
 
 gifan. 
 
 give; 
 
 geven. 
 bij. • 
 
 
 bia (pinij 
 
 1, bie (bine 
 
 ), SBiene; 
 
 beo. 
 
 iee; 
 
 Bauds; 
 
 r6t, 
 
 rot. 
 
 rot^i 
 
 read. 
 
 red; 
 
 rood. 
 
 Kuniggs; 
 
 kuninCj 
 
 kiinie. 
 
 jfbnia; 
 
 oyning, 
 
 ling; 
 
 koning. 
 
 Boka; 
 
 bouobS, 
 
 buoehe. 
 
 Sud)£ ; 
 
 beoe, 
 
 leech; 
 
 beuk. 
 
 
 obuo. 
 
 kuo. 
 
 J?u^; 
 
 cfl. 
 
 cow; 
 
 koe. 
 
 Ango; 
 
 ouga, 
 
 ougfi. 
 
 Sluge; 
 
 eage. 
 
 Wje; 
 
 oog. 
 
 Huaiti; 
 
 butiaizzij 
 
 weize. 
 
 SBctsen; 
 
 bwiite, 
 
 wheat; 
 
 "weit. 
 
 Aiks(?); 
 
 eib, 
 
 eicb. 
 
 eic^e; 
 
 ke, 
 
 oak; 
 
 elk. 
 
 Havi; 
 
 bewi, 
 
 houwe. 
 
 $eu; 
 
 t«g, 
 
 hay; 
 
 hooi. 
 
 Liban; 
 
 lebSn, 
 
 leben. 
 
 leSen; 
 
 libban, 
 
 live; 
 
 leven. 
 
 Haubitb; 
 
 houbit, 
 
 boubet. 
 
 $«HDti 
 
 heafod. 
 
 head; 
 
 hoofd. 
 
 Thagkjan; 
 
 dankjan, 
 
 denken. 
 
 bcntett ; 
 
 tbencan 
 
 , thinlc; 
 
 denkon. 
 
 
 segal, 
 
 segel, . 
 
 ©eoeli 
 
 segel, 
 
 sail; 
 
 zeil. 
 
 Jer; 
 
 jSr, 
 
 jar. 
 
 Sa^v! 
 
 gear. 
 
 year; 
 
 jaar. 
 
 
 pruoea, 
 
 brucke. 
 
 fBxaSr, 
 
 brycg, 
 
 bridge; 
 
 brug. 
 
 
 scirm. 
 
 scbirm. 
 
 ©ii)irm) 
 
 esorein,- 
 
 '* scj'een; 
 
 
 
 pnosum, 
 
 buosen. 
 
 Sufen; 
 
 bosum, 
 
 bosom; 
 
 boezem. 
 
 
 seltaiij 
 
 selten. 
 
 ftltCrti 
 
 seldan, 
 
 seldmn; 
 
 zelden. 
 
 Fairra; 
 
 ferri, 
 
 verne. 
 
 fern(e)i 
 
 feor. 
 
 far; 
 
 ver. 
 
 Letan; 
 
 lazan, 
 
 (lazen), 
 
 laffen; 
 
 latan. 
 
 let; 
 
 lateD. 
 
 Eisarn ; 
 
 isarn, 
 
 isen. 
 
 ©fen; 
 
 tsern. 
 
 iron; 
 
 ijsen. 
 
 Badi; 
 
 betti, 
 
 bette. 
 
 Sett! 
 
 bed. 
 
 led; 
 
 bed. 
 
 Leihts; 
 
 libti, 
 
 libte. 
 
 letc()ti 
 
 liht. 
 
 light; 
 
 ligt. 
 
 Leiks O)-: 
 Galeiks; 
 
 lib or > 
 glib, $ 
 
 gelisb, 
 
 gleii^i 
 
 'Ito or } 
 galio, S 
 
 like; 
 
 lijk. 
 
 Fauhs; 
 
 fuhs. 
 
 Tubs, 
 
 55«c^«; 
 
 fox, 
 
 fox; 
 
 TOSS. 
 
 SrairdC?); 
 
 suert, 
 
 swert. 
 
 ©c&wett; 
 
 sweord. 
 
 sword; 
 
 ZTTaard. 
 
 Apuls(?); 
 
 apbul, 
 
 appel. 
 
 9(pfel; 
 
 appel. 
 
 apple; 
 
 appel. 
 
 Rem. A few of tbe words under 1 and 2 are of foreign origin (as fein; ©HaSc, 
 gjegel, BxtW, Stride, Oel, U^r, SatoJ, 3o^ann, Suiie, Sunt, Orter, ituDfer, m-^W, 
 but they have been so long naturalized that their foreign origin is "no longer 
 felt." 
 
 * The French word eacrein U derived from the German acirm. From the French it passed into the Anglo- 
 Saxon. The Anglo-Saxon had about three thoosand words from the French. 
 
86 
 
 teacher's companion. - 
 
 ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX. 
 
 All the words whioh are dereloped from one root by derivation, or by com- 
 position with other words as prefixes, form, when taken together, a " family 
 of words." By way of illustration, we giro here many of the words that are 
 formed from the yerb tinb^en, bani, ge=bun&=en. 
 
 Sinben, to bmd. 
 
 Slttinbeit, to unbind. 
 
 Ste SliMnbung, unbinding. 
 
 StntmbeH/ to fasten on. 
 
 Stufbttlben, to unbind. 
 
 StuSbinien, " " 
 
 ©nBinben, to 8ind up. 
 
 Sntiinben, to loosen. 
 
 2)te EntMnbung, deliverance. 
 
 Um'Oinben, to bind around. 
 
 KmMn'bcn, to surround (with). 
 
 Sit Um'tinbKng, rebinding. 
 
 SSertmben, to unite (dress wounds). 
 
 J)EV SSerBinber, dresser (of wounds). 
 
 SJertinbltc^/ obligatory. 
 
 Ste SJcviinblic^Wt, obligation. 
 
 „ SSerttnbung, connection. 
 3u(ammmHnbctt, to bind together. 
 Sec fflinber, binder. 
 
 „ SefenBitlbet, broom-maker. 
 
 „ 33uii)btnber, bookbinder. 
 
 „ SBurftenMnbcr, brush-maker. 
 
 „ gaPinbev, barrel-maker. 
 IDte SBinberet, bindery. 
 
 „ Sinbe, band, string. 
 35«i3 Stabc^mi wristband. 
 
 „ ©etinbe, skein, bundle, row of 
 tiles or bricks. 
 
 „ SlngEjinbe,- birthday present. 
 S>a3 3Sanb, band, ribbon, 
 ISer „ volume. 
 Ste fflttnbe (pi), fetters. 
 'Zo.i Sltmtanb, bracelet. 
 
 „ Sltta86anb, satin ribbon. 
 
 „ E^etanb, conjugal tie. 
 2)er SinSaitb, binding of a book. 
 
 S)a8 §aavlanb, hair-band. 
 „ ^aWJanb, neck-band. 
 „ •^Uttaitb, hat-band. 
 
 „ ©titnJanb, fillet. 
 
 „ ©ttum))f6anb, garter. 
 Sie SBflnbt, border, edge; band, 
 company. 
 
 „ 3)tc6S6anbe, band of thieves. 
 ffiaS SBanbdjcn, small volume; small 
 Sdnbig/ tamable. [ribbon. 
 
 Un^tobtg, untamable. , 
 
 Scinbtgen, to tame. 
 S)ev fflcinbtgtv, tamer. 
 
 „ Siiwenlionbiget, lion-tamer. 
 3)ie ffloinbtgwng, taming. 
 !Scr Simb, league. 
 
 I, gttebenS6Mnb, league among 
 nations to maintain peace. 
 
 ,/ ©nobmSutlb, covenant of grace 
 
 „ SR^einliunb, Confederation of 
 the Ehine (formed 1806). 
 SaS Sunb, bundle. 
 
 „ gtftlI)3Bunb, bundle of flax. 
 
 „ ©tVOPutlbr bundle of straw. 
 
 „ SKeifebunbet, traveling pack. 
 2)te ffiunbclei/ participation in a 
 
 conspiracy, 
 ffluitbcln, to tie together, to plot, to 
 
 conspire. 
 Stuftiinbelrt, to unbind. 
 6trt6unbeln, to tie up. 
 S)er Siinbnev, ally. 
 1>o.i Sijnbnig, league. 
 Siinbig, obligatory. 
 S)tf Sunbiglett,' obligation, 
 ffliinbtfcl), belonging to a league. 
 
 ijem. Many of these words are also used as prefixes in forming other families 
 of words, as : 
 
 33cr StnbeBalten, architrave. 
 2)er Sinbfabm, twine. 
 35tc Sinbemauet, partition wall. 
 S)(i« Stnbemeffer, adze. 
 
 Sec SinbEJlttc^, hyphen. 
 S)a3 SinbEWOVt, conjunction. 
 S3«S SinbungSmittEl, cement, [link. 
 t)<xi fflEvMnbung^gliEb, connecting 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PAET. 
 
 87 
 
 2)ie SJertinB«n()«6flt)n, branch for con- 
 necting two main railroad lines. 
 
 Sev aJerMnbung^punft, point of union. 
 
 S)a3 Sanbeifen, hoop iron. 
 
 S)ie Satibfadrit, ribbon manufactory. 
 
 S)ie Sanb^onblung, a mercer's shop. 
 
 3)a^ Sanbma^, tape-measure. 
 
 Da3 fflunbca^Eer, army of the Confed- 
 eration. 
 
 23te SunbeSlftbe, ark of the covenant. 
 
 i 
 
 ally, confed- 
 erate. 
 
 Sev Sunbe^tvuber, 
 „ fflunbe^fvEunb, 
 „ SunbeggenoS, 
 „ Bmitmmmittt-' 
 
 2)cr fflunbeStog, the German Diet. 
 Ste Sunbe^truppen, federal troops. 
 S)a3 Sunbgarn, warp. 
 2)ie Su^timberlunfl/ art of binding 
 
 books. 
 Sunbelfovmtg, fasciculated. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The demonstrative pronoun bcr, tie, Sa8 was already used to a limited extent 
 during the Gothic and the Old-German period as a definite article. This use 
 increased more and more during the Middle and the New German periods. This 
 increase has been partly owing to the diminished use of terminations in the 
 declension of nouns. 
 
 § 55. Syntax of the Article. .There are many variations in the use of the 
 article, which can only be learned by long practice, as : 
 
 35a fe^en wit SBoffer unb <S^nn, There we see water and snow. 
 
 SKeiiie mir iai SBaffer, Hand me the water. 
 
 tin aWangel beS aUoffer?, The lack of water. 
 
 2Rtt SBaffet unb ©^nce, With water and snow'. 
 
 3u SBaffet Wetben, To turn to water. 
 
 aSom SBaffer feuc^t, Moist with water. 
 
 Eem. 1. Proper names frequently take the definite article when the case is 
 not indicated by inflection : 
 
 Scr Sob bea ©otvatea, 
 
 ©uil)i ben SSerrcitler in iei ®all«3 
 
 . ^ecr (©1^.), 
 
 25Em 3fo(flnt :^a|J bu auc^ gettaut, 
 
 ®te aJomane bet grtcbevife fflremcr, 
 
 2)ie SBevtc be8 Soljann ©eSapian S5ac^, 
 
 The death of Socrates. 
 
 Seek the traitor in Gallas' army. 
 
 Thou also hast trusted to Isolani. 
 The romances of Frederika Bremer. 
 The works of John Sebastian Bach. 
 
 Rem. 2. The definite article is frequently used in speaking of an author, to 
 signify his works : 
 
 Zij lefe ben ®bt^e (or tc^ lefc ©iitlje), I am reading Gothe. 
 
 Eem. 3. The definite article is frequently used, especially in South Germany, 
 in speaki»g of relations or near friends : 
 
 SBo ifl ber Solemn ? Where is John ? 
 
 ©tii^E bit SBJfltie, Kemember me to Mary. 
 
 3c& WiU'i nic^t gtauBcn, bag ber SKai: I will not believe that Maximilian 
 
 Wift Serlaffen ?at (©(!)•)> taa deserted me. 
 
■88 
 
 teacher's companion. 
 
 THE NOUN. 
 
 § G8. Changs of Gender of Toreign Nouns. 1. Greek feminine nouns in -os, 
 and Latin feminine nouns in -us, wlien introduced into tlie Grermaa language, 
 become masculine (after tlie analogy of masculine nouns in -os, as Xo'yos, and 
 in -us, as campus), as : ®cr 5)iatctt, S)t))'^t^ong, 9)aragra))^, giottito. 
 
 2. French masculine nouns in -age, or -e (without accent), become feminine in 
 German (after the analogy of such nouns as la cage, la direclrice), as : 
 
 !Eic Equipage, ©age, 3)affase, Eaijvtce. 
 
 3. Many nouns that have come into the German language through the Low- 
 Latin or the Komance languages (in which the neuter gender no longer exists) 
 have passed from the neuter to the masculine gender, as : 
 
 ®ci; Brief (from Ireve). 
 „ Efjlg ( " acetum). 
 „ glegel ( " flageUum). 
 „ Settt ( " linum). 
 „ W(i\i'C "- palatmrii). 
 I, SJtet^ ( " pi'Stium). 
 
 ®m9)untt (iiom puncium). 
 „ ©attet ( " sedUe). 
 „ ©l)icgel( " speculum). 
 „ 3;emj)el ( " iemplum). 
 „ SBeift' (' " rniium). 
 „ SucEet ( " saccharum). 
 
 4. The gender of some foreign nouns seems to hare been changed, to cor- 
 respond with the gender of native German nouns of similar significations: 
 ®cc SIctna, Sid (Lat./em.), compare with kr Serg. 
 
 „ ^ii^:t^et 
 
 (Lat. corpus, neut.). 
 
 it 
 
 " berSett. 
 
 „ SKftvmor 
 
 (Lat. marmor, m.). 
 
 tt 
 
 " berStetn. 
 
 „ 3Karfc|, 
 
 (Fr. marohe,/.). 
 
 It 
 
 " berSBeg. 
 
 ®ic SKouer, 
 
 (Lat. mUrus, m.), 
 
 tt 
 
 " bie SBanb. 
 
 „ SZummer, 
 
 (Lat. Humerus, m.). 
 
 tt 
 
 " bteSfl^. 
 
 ®nS Sftmeel, 
 
 (Lat. camelus, m.). 
 
 It 
 
 " ba«3:^ier. 
 
 ,, Srcuj, 
 
 (Lat. crucifixus, m.). 
 
 " 
 
 " b«3Ms- 
 
 5. A few nouns from foreign languages have changed their gender without 
 
 any apparent ground 
 
 or analogy, as : 
 
 
 
 ®ct StnTer (Lat 
 
 anohora,/em.). 
 
 ®a9 9t6cntcuer (Fr. aventure,/). 
 
 „ Oiettig ( " 
 
 radix,/.). 
 
 It 
 
 Sdmofcn 
 
 (Lat. eleemosyna, _/".). 
 
 „ Settel ( " 
 
 schedula, f.). 
 
 II 
 
 9)anier 
 
 (Fr. banniSre,/.). 
 
 ®ic gfvu^t ( " 
 
 fructus, masc). 
 
 It 
 
 3Jab 
 
 (Lat. rota,/em.). 
 
 6. In both the Romance languages and the German language a few feminine 
 nouns are formed from the plural in a of some Latin and Greek neuter nouns, as : 
 
 Sie SiW (Gr., /3i/3\ioi/ ; Low-Lat., 8i5&'a,- Ital., SiSiia,- Fr., to Wile; Mid.- 
 Ger., hihlie). , 
 
 Die ^iri^e (Gr., ku/jicikoV; Old-German, ciincAa). 
 
 Sie Sirne (Lat. piram,- Ital. and Span.,pero; 01d-Ger.,p»'a; Mid.-Ger., JiV 
 [pi. Urn\ ; New-Ger., bie Sime \_pl. bie Sivnen]). 
 
 2)te Stafc^e (Lat., smcMfem; Low.-Lat.,/asca; Ital.j^osoo; 01d-Ger.,./te(!o). 
 
 § 70. Change of Gender of German Nouns. The following Ger^n nouns 
 also, among others, have passed frofei one gender to another : 
 
 iSSic Slngel (Mid.-Ger., der angd). 
 I, ®eWttIt (Mid.-Ger., dergeuialt). 
 ,1 ©c^Iange (Mid.7Ger., der slange). 
 
 Sic ©J)ur (Mid.-Ger., der spor). 
 I, SBange (Mid.-Ger., das wange). . 
 ®ct S^eit (Gothic, die dails). 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PAET. 
 
 89 
 
 § 72. Declensions of Nouns (see page 24 of Teacher's Companion'). The 
 strcmg and weak declensions exist in all the Teutonic languages, including the 
 Anglo-Saxon. The following examples illustrate the historical development of 
 the declensions of nouns : 
 
 1. ®cr Xa^, a masculine noun of the old or strong declension: 
 
 
 
 Gothic. 
 
 Old-German. Mid.-Germau. 
 
 New-German. 
 
 AnglO'Sozon. 
 
 
 riVom. 
 
 dag-s, 
 
 tac, tao. 
 
 Sag, 
 
 dag, 
 
 p 
 
 J GeK. 
 
 dag-is. 
 
 tak-is, tag-es. 
 
 2:a()=ca, 
 
 dag-es, 
 
 a 
 
 xn 
 
 |^a«. 
 
 dag-a. 
 
 tak-a, tag-e, 
 
 2:a3=c, 
 
 dag-e. 
 
 ^Acc. 
 
 dag. 
 
 tac, tao. 
 
 3:03, 
 
 dag. 
 
 ^ 
 
 (Nom. 
 
 dag-OS, 
 
 tak-a, tag-e. 
 
 2:(i3=E, 
 
 dag-Ss, 
 
 •< 
 
 I Gen. 
 
 dag-g. 
 
 tak-6, tag-e. 
 
 JEag^e, 
 
 dag-a. 
 
 S 
 
 Dot. 
 
 dag-am, 
 
 tak-um, tag-en. 
 
 3:a3=Ett, 
 
 dag-um, 
 
 P4 
 
 ^Acc. 
 
 dag-ans. 
 
 tak-a. tag-e. 
 
 2:«3=e. 
 
 dag-as. 
 
 
 2, 
 
 . Sa^ aajott, 
 
 a neuter noun of the old or strong declension: 
 
 
 
 Qothic. 
 
 Old-Gerinan. Mid.-Germau. j 
 
 New-German. 
 
 Anglo-Saxon. 
 
 •< 
 
 'Nbm, 
 
 . vaurd. 
 
 wort, wort. 
 
 SBort, 
 
 vord. 
 
 ■J 
 p 
 
 , Oen. 
 
 Taurd-is, 
 
 wort-es, wort-es. 
 
 SBott=ca, 
 
 vord-es. 
 
 
 \I)at. 
 
 vaurd-as, 
 
 wort-a, wort-e. 
 
 SBorfce, 
 
 vord-e. 
 
 1 
 
 ^Acc. 
 
 raurd, 
 
 wort, wort, 
 
 SBovt, 
 
 vord. 
 
 J 
 
 ■Nbm. 
 
 , vaurd-a. 
 
 wort, wort, SBotI 
 
 :=e orSBiitt=cv,. 
 
 vord. 
 
 
 yOen. 
 
 vaurd-g. 
 
 wort-6, worte, SBotl 
 
 :=e "aBbrt-cr," 
 
 vord-S, 
 
 P 
 
 ' Bat. 
 
 vaurd-um, 
 
 wort-um, wort-en, SBoi'l 
 
 ;=m " aBiivt=ern, 
 
 vordum, 
 
 P4 
 
 ■ Ace. 
 
 vaurd-a. 
 
 'wort. wort. SEBorl 
 
 r-e "SBh-i=n. 
 
 vord. 
 
 
 8. 
 
 Sie 3uiisf> a 
 
 . feminine noun of the new 
 
 or weak declension: 
 
 
 
 Gotliic. 
 
 Old-German. Mid.-German. 
 
 New-German. 
 
 Anglo-Saxon. 
 
 < 
 
 'Nom. 
 
 tugg-6. 
 
 zunk-a, zung-e, 
 
 3un9=e, 
 
 tung-e. 
 
 g. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 tugg-ons. 
 
 zunk-un, zung-en. 
 
 3un9=e, 
 
 tung-an. 
 
 g 
 
 \Dat. 
 
 tugg-6n. 
 
 zunk-fln, zung-en. 
 
 Sung^e, 
 
 tung-an. 
 
 s 
 
 ^Acc. 
 
 tugg-6n. 
 
 zunk-un, zung-en. 
 
 3ung=f, 
 
 tung-an. 
 
 J 
 
 (Nom. 
 
 tugg-6ns, 
 
 zunk-fin, zung-en. 
 
 3«n9=en, 
 
 tung-an. 
 
 <5 
 
 J Gen. 
 
 tugg-6ns, 
 
 zunk-6n6, zung-en. 
 
 3un3=en, 
 
 tung-ena. 
 
 B 
 
 Dot. 
 '^Acc. 
 
 tugg-6m. 
 
 zunk-6m, zung-en, . 
 
 Sung^en, 
 
 tung-um. 
 
 h 
 
 tugg-6ns. 
 
 zunk-fln. zung-en. 
 
 3uns»en. 
 
 tung-en. 
 
 § 75. New Declension. (§ 75, 2, 2.) Under the polysyllables ending in »c 
 are included many national noiins, as : icr 9)tcu5e,<S(|t»aBe, Sac^fe, granTe, •gieffc, 
 S)ane, granjofe, ®vtE(|c, Sij^nte, ^iie, Subc, etc. (but not adjectives used as nouns, 
 as ; bet Scut((i&E,®eIe'§rte, 2Beife, Wi\eniii—pl. bie Seutfi^en, Qitleljxim, SBeifen, SRei= 
 ftnten). 
 
 § 75, 4. Herein are included only those names of nationality in 5Cr in which 
 the cr is organic, as ; bet 3)ommer, ffloter, Saffer (not those in which the et is a 
 termination, as : ber Dejleneic^er, aBiivtcmBcvger, ©c^Wctjev, Stmetifanct, Enslcitiber, 
 ©pdiitEir, Stditmcv, e<c.,— nor civic nouns, as: ber §«mti«rgcv, ffietlincr, ©ottjaer). 
 
 Hem. 1. A number of nouns have passed during the New or the Middle German 
 period from the new declension over to the old declension, as : bcr Sljjvtt, 5BJarj, 
 
 SKoi, Star, Stbler, Salfam, ^ersog, Scifev, 5?Jonb, S^atcl, Sfttif, S^won, ©i^clm, ©tern; 
 6a8 ©n^otrt. 
 
90 
 
 teacher's companion. 
 
 , Hem. S. Remnants of the former declension of some of these words are seen 
 yet in such oompoands as SReifenietj, M\tmt^(il, SJJontienfc^em, ©tetnenjlanj, 
 
 § 78. Declension of Proper Nouns. (§ 78, 1, 2.) Many j)roper nouns were 
 formerly declined according to the new declension. Bemnants of that declen- 
 sion are yet seen in such compound words as Sluguflcnluvg, S^orlottcnbuvg, S)i)= 
 vortjecniltflfc, Souifenflra^e, aJJarimMtber (SWafconnenlitlber), aJIatienButg. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 We give here illustrations of the historical development of the old and new 
 (or strong and weak) declensions of adjectives. 
 1. The Old or Strong Declension of the adjective Mill^ : 
 
 Gothic. OLD-G-ERitAN. 
 
 
 Masc, 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neutar. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 i 
 
 rir. blind-s, 
 
 blind-a, 
 
 blind-at4. 
 
 plint-fir. 
 
 plint-a, 
 
 plint-az. 
 
 
 1 G. blind-is, 
 
 blind-aizos 
 
 , blind-is. 
 
 plint-es. 
 
 plint-^ra 
 
 , plint-es. 
 
 C5 ^ 
 
 O. blind-amma, blind-ai. 
 
 blind-amma, 
 
 , plint-emu. 
 
 , plint-gru, plint-emu. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^A. blind-ana, 
 
 , blind-a, 
 
 blind-ata, 
 
 plint-an, 
 
 plint-a, 
 
 plint-az. 
 
 3 
 
 rN. blind-ai, 
 
 blind-OS, 
 
 blind-a. 
 
 plint-6. 
 
 plint-6, 
 
 plint-u. 
 
 
 1 G. blind-aizS, 
 
 , blind-aizo, 
 
 blind-aizg. 
 
 plint-gro, 
 
 plint-gr6, plint-gro, 
 
 P ^ 
 ^ 1 
 
 1 Z>. blind-aim, 
 
 blind-aim, 
 
 blind-aim. 
 
 pIint-6, 
 
 plirit-Sru, plint-fim. 
 
 Ph 1 
 
 ^A. blind-ans. 
 
 blind-OS. 
 
 blind-a. 
 
 plint-fi. 
 
 plint-6. 
 
 plint-u. 
 
 
 
 Middle-Gekman. 
 
 New-Geemau. 
 
 
 Ma«c. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 — \ 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 Maac. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 (i 
 
 N. blind-er, 
 
 blind-iu. 
 
 blind-ez. 
 
 Mini)»ev, 
 
 61inb«e, 
 
 Mtnb=e«, 
 
 
 G. hlind-es, 
 
 blind-er, 
 
 blind-es, 
 
 Jltnb^eg, 
 
 I)ltab=ev, 
 
 Wni^ei, 
 
 
 D. blind-em, 
 
 blind-er, 
 
 blind-em, 
 
 Winb=cm, 
 
 Hini=ev, 
 
 6Unb=cm, 
 
 
 ^.blind-en, 
 
 blind-e. 
 
 blind-es, 
 
 I)Iinb=cn, 
 
 Minb^e, 
 
 IiIuib«Ei3, 
 
 h4 
 
 rN. blind-e, 
 
 blind-e. 
 
 blind-iu, 
 
 l)Imi)=c, 
 
 Minb=t, 
 
 Minb=t, 
 
 »«< 
 
 1 G. blind-er, 
 
 blind-er. 
 
 blind-er. 
 
 Hinb^cr, 
 
 tlinbscr, 
 
 5Knb=ev, 
 
 
 I D. blind-en. 
 
 blind-en, 
 
 blind-en. 
 
 61tnb=m, 
 
 Winbscn, 
 
 Btinbscn, 
 
 p. 
 
 ^A. blind-e. 
 
 blind-e. 
 
 blind-iu. 
 
 6Knb=c. 
 
 Mmb=e. 
 
 Winbsc. 
 
 2 
 
 ;. The New or 
 
 Weak Declension of the adjective 6Iiiit 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 
 Gothic. 
 
 
 Old-German. 
 
 Masc. 
 rJV. blind-a, 
 ■ G. blind-ins, 
 D. blind-in, 
 A. blind-an, 
 JV. blind-ans, 
 G. blind-an§, 
 D. blind-am, 
 A . blind-ans. 
 
 Fern. 
 blind-6, 
 blind-ons, 
 blind-on, 
 blind-on, 
 blind-ons, 
 blink-6n6, 
 blind-6m, 
 blind-dns. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 blind-6, 
 
 blind-ins, 
 
 blind-in, 
 
 blind-6, 
 
 blind-ona, 
 
 blind-anS, 
 
 blind-am, 
 
 blind-6na. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 plint-o, 
 
 plint-in, 
 
 plint-in, 
 
 plinf-un,- 
 
 plint-un, 
 
 plint-ono, 
 
 plint-6m, 
 
 ulint-un. 
 
 Fern. Neuter. 
 
 plint-a, plint-a, 
 plint-fin, plint-in, 
 plint-fln, plint-in, 
 plint-{ln, plint-a, 
 plint-<ln, plint-fim, 
 plint-6n6, plint-6n6, 
 plint-6m, plint-6m, 
 plint-fln. nlint-flin. 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PART. 
 
 91 
 
 Middle-Sermah. 
 
 Masc. Fein. Neoter. 
 
 N. blind-e. blind-e, blind-e, 
 
 G. blind-en, blind-en, blind-en, 
 
 D. blind-en, blind-en, blind-en, 
 
 .i4. blind-en, blind-en, blind-en, 
 
 N. blind-en, blind-en, blind-en, 
 
 G. blind-en, blind-en, blind-en, 
 
 i>. blind-en, blind-en, blind-en, 
 
 4. blind-en. blind-en. blind-en. 
 
 New-Gbemas 
 
 I. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 6Knb=e, 
 
 Mtnb=e, 
 
 Mtnb=e, 
 
 Iilinb=en, 
 
 Mmb=eii, 
 
 Htnb=en, 
 
 6linb=ett, 
 
 Mmb=cn, 
 
 blinb^ett, 
 
 6Unb=en, 
 
 (iltnb=e, 
 
 iUnb=e, 
 
 Wmb»c(n,) 
 
 61inb=e(n), 
 
 Mtnb>e(n), 
 
 SUnbscti, 
 
 6Iinb=en, 
 
 SUnb=en, 
 
 Htnb»en, 
 
 ilinb=en, 
 
 JIinb=en, 
 
 61inb»e(n). 
 
 Wmb.e(n). 
 
 Blinb=e(n). 
 
 Sem. The same declensions existed originally in all the Teutonic languages. 
 They assumed the following form in the Anglo-Saxon: 
 
 Steono Declension. Weak Declension. 
 
 
 Msec. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 Maae. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 N 
 
 fN. blind. 
 
 blind-u, 
 
 blind. 
 
 blind-a. 
 
 blind-e, 
 
 blind-e. 
 
 tJ 
 
 G. blind-es. 
 
 blind-re. 
 
 blind-es. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 OS 
 
 j D. blind-um, 
 
 blind-re. 
 
 blind-um. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 GO 
 
 ^A. blind-ne, 
 
 blind-e. 
 
 blind. 
 
 bKnd-an, 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 blind-e. 
 
 . 
 
 (N. blind-e, 
 
 blind-e. 
 
 blind-u. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 blind-an/ 
 
 p 
 
 J G. blind-ra. 
 
 blind-ra. 
 
 blind-ra. 
 
 blind-ena. 
 
 blind-ena, 
 
 blind-ena. 
 
 ] D. blind-um. 
 
 blind-um, 
 
 blind-um. 
 
 blind-um. 
 
 blind-um. 
 
 blind-um. 
 
 h 
 
 U. blind-e. 
 
 blind-e. 
 
 blind-u. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 blind-an. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 For the historical development of some of the Cardinal Numbers, see the 
 tables of Comparative language (§ 28-80). 
 
 THE PRONOUN. 
 
 Rem. For the farther illustration of the variations of grammatical forms in 
 allied languages, we add the pronouns of the old Anglo-Saxon and of the pres- 
 ent Dutch language. The student's attention may be frequently drawn to the 
 remarks in § 28-30, § 99, Rem. 3, and § 106, Rem. 3. 
 
 §107. The Personal Pronouns have been developed as follows: 
 
 
 Gothic. 
 
 Old-Ger. Middle-Ger. 
 
 New-Ger. 
 
 Anglo-SazoD. 
 
 English. 
 
 Dutch. 
 
 a C Nom. 
 t Gen. 
 
 ik. 
 
 ik. 
 
 ich, 
 
 iH), 
 
 10, 
 
 /, 
 
 ik, 
 
 meina. 
 
 mtn. 
 
 mm. 
 
 meiner, 
 
 min. 
 
 mine, 
 
 mijns, 
 
 S [ Ace. 
 
 mis, 
 
 mir. 
 
 mir, 
 
 irnr, 
 
 me. 
 
 me,^ 
 
 mij, 
 
 mik, 
 
 mih. 
 
 mieh. 
 
 'miSj, 
 
 me(o). 
 
 me, 
 
 mij, 
 
 ^ f Nmn, 
 P ^ Dat. 
 
 veis. 
 
 wir. 
 
 wir. 
 
 un«, 
 
 ve. 
 
 w?e, 
 
 wij, 
 
 unsara, 
 
 unsar. 
 
 unser. 
 
 ttnfev, 
 
 user. 
 
 our, 
 
 onzer, 
 
 unsis. 
 
 uns. 
 
 uns, 
 
 «n«, 
 
 us. 
 
 us, 
 
 ous, 
 
 Ik [ Ace. 
 
 unsis. 
 
 unsich. 
 
 unsich. 
 
 mi. 
 
 usic. 
 
 us. 
 
 0D3. 
 
92 
 
 teacher's companion. 
 
 Gothic. 
 
 thu, 
 thiua^ 
 this, 
 tMk, 
 jus, 
 
 , izvara, 
 izirs, 
 izvis. • 
 
 is, 
 is, 
 
 imma, 
 ina, 
 
 (j f Nom. 
 3 J Gen. 
 
 B \acc. 
 . C Nom, 
 ■< J Gen. 
 p 1 Dat. 
 p. [ Ace. 
 
 (j f Nom, 
 t j ff«». 
 g j Dat. 
 
 . r JVoro. 
 :a Gere. ■ 
 
 (5 r iVom. si, 
 3 J Gen. iz6s, 
 § j Dat. izai, 
 5 {acc. ija, 
 
 iVom. ijos, 
 ffera. iz6, 
 Dat. im, 
 ylcc. ijos. 
 
 eis, 
 ize, 
 im, 
 ins. 
 
 Nom. ita. 
 Gen. is, 
 Z>a^ imma, 
 _ Acc. ita. 
 
 Old-Ger, Mid.-Ger. New-German. 
 
 dfl, dft, bu, 
 
 din, dan, bEtneir, 
 
 dir, dir, btr, 
 
 dih, dioh, M($, 
 
 ir, ir, i^r, 
 
 iwar, iuwer, euev, 
 
 iu, in, eu$, 
 
 iwih. iuoh. eu^. 
 
 ■ ( Nom. ija, 
 
 ^ ! Gen. izS, 
 
 P j Dat. im, 
 
 p< [ 4cc. ija. 
 
 (sin), 
 imii, 
 in an, 
 
 si§, 
 iro, 
 im, 
 
 siS. 
 
 siu, 
 ir^, 
 iru, 
 
 sia, 
 si6, 
 iro, 
 im, 
 
 sio. 
 
 iz, 
 es, 
 imu, 
 iz, 
 
 siu, 
 ir6, 
 im, 
 siu. 
 
 sie, 
 
 sie, 
 
 ir, 
 in, 
 
 sie. 
 
 ez, 
 es, 
 im. 
 
 in, 
 sie. 
 
 er, 
 feinet, 
 
 i^, 
 
 fte. 
 
 i^rer, 
 
 i^nen, 
 
 rtt- 
 
 i^tet, 
 
 i^rer, 
 
 fie. ■ 
 
 e«, 
 
 feiner, 
 i^m, 
 elf 
 
 r«, 
 
 i^nen, 
 fie. 
 
 Anglo-Saxon. 
 
 thu, 
 thin, 
 the, 
 the(o), 
 
 ge, 
 
 eover, 
 eov, 
 eoT(ic). 
 
 he, 
 Ms, 
 him, 
 hine, 
 
 M(g), 
 hira, 
 him, 
 
 ti(g). 
 
 heo, 
 hine, 
 hire, 
 he, 
 
 H(g), 
 
 hira, 
 
 him, 
 
 ti(g). 
 
 hit, 
 his, 
 him, 
 hit, 
 
 heo, 
 hira, 
 him, 
 heo. 
 
 English. 
 
 thou, 
 
 thine, 
 
 thee, 
 
 thee, 
 
 you, 
 
 you, 
 you. 
 
 he, 
 his, 
 him, 
 him, 
 
 they, 
 theirijs). 
 
 she, 
 
 her{s), 
 
 her, 
 
 heir, 
 
 they, 
 
 their {s), 
 
 them. 
 
 them, 
 
 it, 
 its, 
 it, 
 it, 
 
 they, 
 their(s), 
 them, 
 them. 
 
 Dutch. 
 
 gij, 
 
 UW8, 
 
 "l 
 
 gij> 
 uwer. 
 
 tij, 
 zijns, 
 hem, 
 hem, 
 
 zij, 
 
 hunner, 
 hun, 
 hen. 
 
 zij, 
 harer, 
 haar, 
 baar, 
 
 »j. 
 
 harer, 
 
 haar, 
 
 haar. 
 
 het, 
 
 (van het), 
 het, 
 • het, 
 
 zij, 
 
 hunner, 
 hun, 
 hen. 
 
 § 109. The PoEsessive Pronouns hare been developed as follows: 
 
 Gothic. Old-Ger. Mid.-Ger. New-German. Anglo-Sox. English. 
 
 meins, miner, miner, mein(et), min, my (mine), 
 
 meina, mlnu, miniu, mem, min, my (mine), 
 
 meinata. minaz. minez. meitt(c8). min. my (mine). 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut, 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Dutch. 
 mijn, 
 mijne, 
 mijn. 
 
 theins, dln§r, diner, tiem(et, 
 
 theina, dinu, diniu, %t\.M, 
 
 theinata. dinaz. dinez. betn(c§). 
 
 (seinis)(ff.), sin^r, slner, jcin(cr), 
 
 (sainaizos), sinu, siniu, feinc, 
 
 fseinis'). sinaz. sinez. fcinfc?). 
 
 thin, thy (thine), uw, 
 
 thin, thy (thine), * uwe, 
 
 thin, thy (thine). uw. 
 
 his, his, zijn, 
 
 his, his, .^^i^t 
 
 his. his. ziin. 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PAET. 
 
 93 
 
 Masc. 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Newt. 
 
 §111. 
 iai, has 
 
 Old-German. Mid.-6er. 
 
 unsar, 
 
 unsara, 
 
 unsar. 
 
 izvar, 
 
 izyara, 
 
 izvar. 
 
 unsarSr, 
 
 unsara, 
 
 unsaraz. 
 
 iwarfer, 
 
 iwaru, 
 
 iwaraz. 
 
 inu, 
 irz. 
 
 unser, 
 
 unserin, 
 
 unserz. 
 
 iuwer, 
 
 iuweriu, 
 
 iawerz. 
 
 New-German. 
 
 ijre, 
 
 unfcv(ev); 
 , «n|ete, 
 
 untet(e«). 
 
 cuter, 
 , eutc, 
 
 Anglo-Saz. English. 
 
 (hire), ( her or 
 (hire), \ tJieir, 
 (hire). 
 
 unoer, 
 
 uncer, 
 
 uncer. 
 
 ure, 
 
 ure, 
 
 ure. 
 
 our, 
 our, 
 our, 
 
 your, 
 your, 
 your. 
 
 Dutch. 
 
 haar, 
 hare, 
 haar. 
 
 ons, 
 
 onze, 
 
 ons. 
 
 uw, 
 
 uwe, 
 
 uw. 
 
 The declension of the Demonstrative Pronoun (and Article) tcr, tie, 
 been developed as follows : 
 
 GoTnic. Old-German. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neuter. 
 
 ^ r Nam. sa, th6, thata, 
 
 g I Gen, this, thizos, this, 
 
 g I Dot. thamma, thizai, thamma. 
 
 - Acc, thana. tho. 
 
 thata. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 der. 
 
 diu. 
 
 daz. 
 
 des. 
 
 dera, 
 
 des, 
 
 demu. 
 
 deru. 
 
 demu, 
 
 den. 
 
 dia. 
 
 daz. 
 
 J c Nom. thai, 
 2 J Gent, thize. 
 
 thos, tho, 
 
 thizo, thize, 
 
 ^ I Dat. thaim, thaim, thaim, 
 
 ^ *■ Acc. than. thos. tho. 
 
 Middle-Gebman. 
 
 di§, dio, diu, 
 
 derd, dero, dSro, 
 
 dSm, d6m, dfim, 
 
 di€. did. diu. 
 
 New-German. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 ^ r Nom. der, 
 
 g J Gen. des, 
 
 g I Dat. dem, 
 
 3 *- Acc. den. 
 
 diu, 
 der, 
 der, 
 die. 
 
 des, 
 
 dem, 
 
 daz. 
 
 - I- Nom. die, die, diu, 
 
 ■< J Gen. der, der, der, 
 
 g I Dat. den, den, den, 
 
 ^ '■ Acc. die. die. diu. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 ber, 
 
 iti, 
 
 bem, 
 
 ien. 
 
 We, 
 
 bcr, 
 
 ben, 
 
 bie. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 bie, 
 bcv, 
 bet, 
 bie. 
 
 bie, 
 ber, 
 ben, 
 bie. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 bag, 
 
 bc«, 
 
 bem, 
 
 Ui. 
 
 bie, 
 
 bev, 
 
 ben, 
 
 bie. 
 
 §112. The full declension of the Interrogative Pronoun has heen developed 
 thus : Gothic. Old-German. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neuter. 
 
 Nom. hvas, hyS, hva. 
 
 Gen. hvis, hvizos, hvis, 
 
 Dat. hvamma, hvizai, hyamma, 
 Acc. hvana. hvo. hva. 
 Middle-German. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 hwer, 
 hwes, 
 hwemu, 
 hwBman. 
 
 Fem. Neuter. 
 
 hwiu, hwaz, 
 
 hwera, hwez, 
 
 hweru, hwemu, 
 
 hwia. hwaz. 
 
 New-German. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 (and Fem.) 
 
 Nenter. 
 
 Nom. wer. 
 
 
 
 waz. 
 
 Gen. wes. 
 
 
 wSs, 
 
 Dat, weme. 
 
 J» 
 
 weme. 
 
 Acc, wen. 
 
 waz. 
 
 Masc. (and Fem.) Nenter. 
 
 wer, was, 
 
 weffen, Weffen, 
 
 went, — 
 
 wen. 'KoS. 
 
94 teacher's companion. 
 
 &m. 1. It is interesting, after grammatical forms have become fixed, to look 
 back and observe the variety of forma of the same word that have straggled 
 for supremacy. Thus : 
 ,1. The following forms have been used with the Demonstrative Pronoun bcr: 
 
 1. Nom. Sing. Maso. ba: Old-German, da; d'e, tide; Mid. -German, der. 
 
 2. Nom. Sing. Fern. Sic : Old-German, diu, d'eo, (tea, die, de; Mid.-German, diu, 
 die,di,de. 
 
 3.' Nom. Sing. Neut. baS: Old-German, daz; Mid.-German, daz, dez. 
 
 4. Nom. Plur. Masc. J f Old-German, die, die, de, dio; Mid.-Ger., die. 
 
 5. Nom. Plur. Fern. > tic ■? Old-Ger., did, deo, dia, dea, S; Mid.-Ger., die. 
 
 6. Nom. Plur. Neut. j [ Old-German, diu, dei; diu, dei, die. 
 
 2. With the pronoun 3ticf)t9, the following forms have been employed : 
 Old-German, neowiht, neowekt, niowilit, niwihf, nieht, met. 
 Middle-German, nieht, uiht, niwit, niwet, niut, niet. 
 
 Rem. 2. Similar struggles between the forms of a word have taken place to a 
 remarkable extent in the English language. Indeed, Sir Walter Kaleigh wrote 
 his own name in two ways in the same document. And even yet literary au- 
 thorities disagree as to the spelling of Shakespeare's name. In England the 
 u is yet retained in such words as colour, odour. The following are among the 
 striking examples of variation of form in the same word. 
 
 1. Each: Anglo-Saxon, &lc,ealc,elc; Old-English, illc,eche,ich. 
 
 2. Aught : Anglo-Saxon, aviht, avuht, auht, avht, dht; Old-English, aught, auht, 
 oght, ought. 
 
 3. Ahy :, Anglo-Saxon, dnig, &iug,&neg,&ng, &niht, ani, eneg, enig; Old-English, 
 ony, eny, any. 
 
 4. Many : Anglo-Sax., manig, maneg, mani, in^nig, m&neg, m&ni, monig, moneg, 
 nienig, meneg, Tneni ; Old-English, mony, many. '■ 
 
 5. Enough : Anglo-Saxon, gendh, genog, ginuog, noh; Old-English, yrumg, ynow, 
 now. 
 
 THE VEKB. 
 
 § 117, 2. Derivative Verbs. We give here a few additional examples, as: 
 1. Verbs derived from other verbs: 
 
 .^cftcn, to fasten ; from '^aftetl, to adhere. 
 
 Sle^en, to etch; from effen, to eat. 
 Seijen, to corrode; from iti^m, to bite. 
 Setcti, to pray; from Bitten, to ask. 
 Seugen, to bend; from tiegcn, to bow. 
 ffliiifen, to stoop; from Biegen, to bow. 
 ©tciltgett, to press ; from briitjjen, torush. 
 giSIIcn, to fell; from fallen, to fall. 
 55Umnietn, to sparkle; /win flammcn, to 
 flame. [follow. 
 
 SoIgctH, to conclude; from folgen, to 
 ga^ren, to conduot;/TOm fasten, to ride, 
 ■gicingcn, to hang (ir.); from '^(mgcn, to 
 
 Cegen, to lay; from liegen, to lie. 
 Semen, to learn; from lel)ren, to teach. 
 Seugnen, to deny; from liigen, to lie. 
 S'itlten, to nod; from neigcn, to incline. 
 SReijcn, to excite; from tciSen, to tear, 
 ©enfen, to sink (tr.); from finlew, to 
 
 sink (intr.). 
 ©egcn, to set; from jigen, to sit. 
 ©yrengen, to burst {tr.)-, from fijvtngen, 
 
 to leap. [mount, 
 
 ©feigcvn, to heighten; from (Icigcn, to 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PART. 
 
 95 
 
 2. Verbs derived from nouns: 
 Slt^men, to breathe; from bet Stt^em, 
 
 breath. 
 gtfd)en, to fish; from ber gifil, fish, 
 grmplfen, to breakfast;/™™ ba^ Stii^* 
 
 fliid, breakfast, 
 giittern, to feed; from bag Jfuttev, fodder, 
 gttttern, to line;/rombai3 gutter, lining, 
 ©rafen, to graze; /iwre bag Orag, grass, 
 ifiammern, to hammer; from ber .jammer, 
 
 hammer. 
 
 3. Verbs derived from adjectives : 
 Senbcrn, to change; /cobi anbet, other. 
 Steugern, to express; from auger, outer. 
 Sailbtgen, to tame; from, tattbtg, tame. 
 Seffcrn, to improve; /rom bcffev, better. 
 Seteiten, to prepare; from teteit, ready. 
 Sreiten, to extend; from breit, broad. 
 Einigcn, to unite; from einig, united. 
 goilfc^Elt, counterfeit; from falfi^, false, 
 gevtigen, to prepare; from fcrtig, ready. 
 Sorbetn, to promote; (0.-G.,/ii-dCT=froiit). 
 ®tij|ctn, to enlarge ;/j'om grower, larger. 
 Garten, to harden ; from I)att, hard. 
 lieiUgen, to sanctify ; /rom l^eilig, holy. 
 
 .&aufe«, to dwell; /rom bog ^aug, house, 
 ^erbetgen, to lodge; from bie .Jierterge, 
 shelter. 
 
 Soimmen, to comb ^from bet flamni, comb. 
 3)tugeltl, to flog ; from bet 9)tijgel, cudgel, 
 ©agett, to saw; from bie ©age, saw. 
 SBiinWen, to wish; from bet SBunW, 
 
 wish. 
 Seic^nen, to draw; from bag Seiclxi'' 
 
 sign. 
 
 Sii^len, to cool; from fii^I, cool, 
 ^iirsen, to shorten ; from futj, short. 
 Cangen, to lengthen ; from Jang, long. 
 Siiit^tgen, to necessitate; from nbt^tg, 
 
 necessary. 
 DeffneH, to open; from offett, open. 
 9leintgen, to purify ; from tettl, pure. 
 ©c^onen, to make beautiful; /rom fl^ijll, 
 
 beautiful. [black. 
 
 ©(^tDatjen, to blacken; from fi^Wotj, 
 Sijbtetl, to kill; from tobt, dead. 
 SBdimen, to warm; from warm, warm. 
 Sa^ttien, to tame; from gat;m, tame. 
 
 ifem. 1. In some oases verbs are formed from adjectives only by the aid of 
 
 the prefix syllables bes, crs, ocrs, as: 
 
 Segunjltgetl, to favor; from gunjlig, fa- 
 vorable, [densome. 
 
 Selafligen, to burden ; from lajlig, bur- 
 
 Seleibigen, to offend; from leibig, troub- 
 lesome, [rect. 
 
 Seitdjtigett, to correct; from riiijtig, cor- 
 
 Scru^igen, to quiet; from tu^ig, quiet. 
 
 SeflljWCtett, to burden; from fdjWet, 
 heav;. 
 
 SBcjlattgen, to confirm; from jiotig, firm. 
 
 Stgaitjen, to complete; from gatlj, com- 
 plete. 
 
 Er^ij'^cit, to elevate; from '^oc^, high. 
 
 Stlii^ncn, to embolden ; from futjn, bold. 
 
 Ermac^tigen, to empower; from madjtig, 
 powerful. [itary. 
 
 SJetcinfattien, to isolate; from einfam, soi- 
 SSetetDtgen, to immortalize; from eWtg, 
 
 eternal. 
 S5ctf))atctl, to make late; from f))at, late. 
 
 Hem, 2. In some cases, though both the simple and the compound form of a 
 verb derived from an adjective exist, the compound form is generally used, as: 
 
 Etftifi^en (or fttWen), to refresh, freshen ; 
 EttDeitetn {or ttettern), to enlarge, expand; 
 ©tletc^tetn {or letc^tettt), to lighten; 
 etmiiben (or miiben), to weary; 
 
 SJetme^ten (or nie^ten), to increase; 
 
 SJergroietn {or gtiigcm), to enlarge; 
 
 from frtfc^, fresh. 
 " tuciter, broader. 
 " Iei(|tet, lighter, easier. 
 " tttube, weary . 
 " me^t, more. 
 
 gtiipCt, greater, larger. 
 
 SSetfc^bnetn {or fc^iinern), to make move beautiful ; " fi^ijner, more beautiful. 
 
96 
 
 teacher's ■ COMPANION. 
 
 § 117, 3. Compound Verbs, As an illustration of the extent to wtich com- 
 pound verbs are formed in the German language, we give below a large portion 
 of the compounds which are formed with the verb ge^cn : 
 
 .^ittdufge^en, to go up. 
 
 ^mmi^t^tn, to go out, exceed. 
 
 4)tneirtge^en, to enter. 
 
 iimgc^en, to go thither. 
 
 ^mitxit'^m, to deceive. 
 
 So^ge^cn, to give way, explode. 
 
 SKipge^en {imp.), to succeed badly. 
 
 SRifge^en, to accompany. 
 
 Stfll^'gelen, to go behind, to be slow (as 
 [of a watch). 
 
 ^Jieberge^en, to walk down. 
 
 8iuilgel)ni, to return. 
 
 Hc'tergc^en, to overflow, go over. 
 
 Uctevge'^en, to transgress. 
 
 Um'ge^en, to go around, revolve. 
 
 Hmge'^en, to evade, elude. 
 
 ttntevge^cn, to go down, sink, perish. 
 
 SBergelett, to go astray, vanish. 
 
 aJorange'^en/ to go before, take the lead. 
 
 SJorkige^m, to pass by, to let slip. 
 
 3}ot'ge|en, to precede, take the lead; 
 go too fast (as of a watch). 
 
 aJotiiSergelen, to pass by, neglect. 
 
 SEBcggc^en, to go away, depart. 
 
 Sergc^ett, to melt, dissolve. 
 
 Suge^en, to shut, close. 
 
 Suviiffge^en, to go back, return. 
 
 Sufainmengc'^en, to go. together, shrink. 
 
 3tt)ty4engc$m, to go between. 
 
 ^Ett, to depart, 
 ^en, to ascend, 
 n, to go out. 
 ffletgc^En, to go with. 
 ®«'^erge'^en, to go about. 
 23tt'^tng4en/ to go along. 
 Satang^enf to set about. . 
 Saraufge'^en, to perish. 
 2)«»0ngel)en, to go away from. 
 Surc^'gelen, to go through. 
 Surftge'ien, to pierce. 
 Etnge^en, to enter, 
 ©in^^erge^cn, to go along. 
 Entge^en, to escape. 
 Entgegengc^en, to go toward. 
 Entstteige^^Ett, to fall to pieces. 
 ErgB^en, to overtake. 
 StB^lgE^EH, to go astray. 
 JJOttge^en, to depart, go forth. 
 ■^EtttigE^Ett, to go home. 
 ■5erfl6ge^E(t, to walk down (hither). 
 ■&£r«u3g£l^£tt,.to come out. 
 
 ^eraufgE^En, to walk up. 
 ■^erfiingE^En, to walk in. 
 ■^Etg^CIIf to walk hither. 
 liEruntge^En, to pass around. 
 ■^EruntEtgE'^en, to go down. 
 ^etKwge^Ett/ to go forth, proceed. 
 ■ginftigE^En, to go down (thither). 
 
 § 124. The Snbjtiactive Mood is frequently termed by German gramma- 
 rians the Conjunctive Mood. It is distinguished from the Indicative and Condi- 
 tional Moods by this characteristic difference, that, unlike those moods, it is not 
 med in etipressing the opinion of tM speaJeer. 
 
 ■giEintic^ SRotJ l^ttt mit ^EUtE SDJorgEn ge= Henry Both told me this morning 
 fagt, bap •Jievc son So^nEr gum ®e» that Mr. Von Kohner has been ap 
 
 fanWcit m fBknex §of crnantit tfi, 
 
 (but)§Eintic^ Otot^ ^t mit ^Eutc SOTorgEn g£= 
 fagt, bag ^tvc son So'^tiEt sum ®£= 
 fanbtEtt am aBiEKEr |iof frnannt fci, 
 
 SWir fagt eiue traurigE St^nuug, bap bu 
 bt£ SriiilE fein locrbcfl, iitiEr WeIc^e 
 bi£ ©ijaniEr in ba« 8anb fcecn ma-. 
 ten (©ft.), 
 
 pointed ambassador to the court of 
 
 Vienna. 
 Henry Eoth told me this morning that 
 
 (the report is that) Mr. Von Kohner 
 
 has been appointed ambassador to 
 
 the court of Vienna. 
 A sad foreboding tells me that you 
 
 will be the bridge over which the 
 
 Spaniards will move into the land. 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PAET. 
 
 97 
 
 Rem. 1. The Subjunctive Mood is generally used in subordinate sentences 
 which relate to a negative pronoun in the main sentence : 
 
 250^ jefet Wiit mir ju ^aufe 5Jt($t3, 
 
 was mti$ ngij^e (@.), 
 2>a lionet Icin 3fai$ctt Kom p^n'cn 
 
 ©ttanb, in .t^n fi^c an iaS ge? 
 
 wiinfi^tc Sanb (Sc^.), 
 
 There is nothing there to shook a 
 
 man. 
 And now nothing remains to me at 
 
 home wlilch delights me. 
 There no boat touches from thfi safe 
 
 shore which may bring him to the 
 
 desired land. 
 
 Rem. 2. The Subjunctive Mood is often employed in subordinate sentences, 
 after the conjunctions e^e and bi9, when referring to future time in an in- 
 definite or hypothetical way: 
 
 SBnvte 6i^ ex fontmc. Wait till he comes. 
 
 Wlelie t[)m bie 3Jac[)rid^t/ e^e ev fie bnxSj Communicate the news to him before 
 Slnkre ctfnJirc, he learns it from others. 
 
 Rem. 3. In speaking of one's self in indirect sentences, however, the Subjunc- 
 tive Mood is generally employed: 
 
 3* antttortetc, ii) fci tin ®oIbfi$mtlit, 
 3* Wrie6 i^m, bug t^ ttt bem iaufe 
 
 emi fe^t guten SKanntS anflenom= 
 
 men id, mi mil it)m gro^e unb 
 
 fc&one SftJeif fertigc; id) fudjc ©= 
 
 l»a3 ju levnm, unb ftoffe mit mctner 
 
 Qit\i)iSiiijMt i^m Jalb JJugcn unb 
 
 e^te stt Jringen (©-), 
 Site SRcgentin iciumt ein bag fie geftftlt 
 
 f)abe, unb burcS ben ©c^ein son 
 
 SRec^tWaffen'^ctt gcblenbct rooriicit 
 
 fei (©*.), 
 
 Rem.i. Sometimes ono subordinate sentence depends upon another one, 
 in neither of which does the speaker express his own opinion ; in this case, 
 both the subordinate sentences have the verbs in the Subjunctive Mood : 
 
 Sdfo 6cfa^l er Un3, X)tt jU mctben, ti So he commanded us to inform thee 
 
 fci betn ©O^n Son Ecfar, ber jle' that it is thy son Don Csesar who 
 
 fenbc (©ft.), sends them. 
 
 Rem. 5. The following examples also illustrate the use of the subjunctive 
 mood: , 
 
 emffteibe bu, oS ^ieg fei, cber griebe 
 
 (©*•), 
 gte'^t ®ott «tt, bag et euft crlmdjtc, 
 Er Will wtffen, wai biefe Sftiipung 6e= 
 
 teute, worauf fie i^m cnbltft gcjle'^t, 
 
 bag ftc ftie^en woUe (Sft.), 
 aCeWjct er fci (or welfter ct fdn ntag, 
 
 indie.), er "^ot metrt' $etj evfveut 
 
 (©ft.), 
 
 E 
 
 I answered that I was a goldsmith. 
 
 I wrote to him that I had been taken 
 by a very good man into his house, 
 and that I was assisting him to pre- 
 pare some important and beautiful 
 work; that I was striving to learn 
 something, and hoped soon to bring 
 him honor and proiit by my skill. 
 
 The Kegent admitted that she had 
 made a mistake, and been blinded 
 by an appearance of integrity. 
 
 Decide thou whether there shall be 
 war or peace. 
 
 Pray God that he may enlighten you. 
 
 He wishes to know what this equip- 
 ment signifies ; whereupon she final- 
 ly admits that she wishes to escape. 
 
 Whoeveii he may be, he has rejoiced 
 my heart. 
 
98 
 
 teacher's companion. 
 
 Er jlcl)t mi, «W o5 ev ttt bet BoUigm 
 ttefcetjeugung Ie6c/ er fci ■^crv unb 
 rooHc e8 una nut attS ©efciUigleit 
 «i^t ju^ten Iciffen (®.): 
 
 S^ geJc ni(|t wein 3a, ba^ e8 gcs 
 fdK^ie (®.)- 
 
 3^t glauM, bet -^etjog fei entfc^t,— bet 
 |>etjog t(l tii(|t cntfe^t (©^O- 
 
 6S tuat ni^t ju etwatten, ba^ et btn 
 iiBttgen Iat|i)Itf(Sen SWdc^tett bicfc^ 
 aiTujlet son SBibetfep^teit a«l>e« 
 rocrbe (©i|.)' 
 
 He seems as though he lives in the 
 full persuasion that he is master, 
 and as though out of pure good na- 
 ture he does not wish to let us feel it. 
 
 I do not give my consent that it 
 should be done. 
 
 You "believe that the duke is deposed 
 — he is not deposed. 
 
 It was not to be expected that he 
 would give the other Catholic pow- 
 ers this kind of opposition. 
 
 § 128. The Infinitive Hood, Use varies as to employing su after the verb 
 fcin, as : 
 
 g« ijl fo elenb 6efteln 5« muffctt (®.), 
 & x\l fo elenb in bet ©tembe f4wct= 
 
 fen (®.), 
 3(1 c8 teffet t«I)tg ju HeiBen ? (®.) 
 3fic«6effetrtc^juttei6en?(®.) 
 
 It is so miserable to have to beg. 
 It is so miserable to move about in 
 
 foreign lands. 
 Is it better to remain quiet? 
 Is it better to rove about ? 
 
 § 130. , The Present Participle. In the Indo-European languages the end- 
 ing of the present participle is characterized by the letters ~nt {-nd). Thus 
 the present participle in the verb to bear (see § 28) is as follows : 
 
 Sanscrit^ SAar-are<; Bactrian, 6ar-an(; Qieeb, <p(poiv (tpip-opTo!:) ; Latin, Jer- 
 ens (Jer-entis) ; Gothic, iair-amJs. 
 
 Rem. 1. The variations of the terminations of the present participle in the 
 Teutonic languages may be illustrated thus : 
 
 Gothic, hai-ands; Old-German, hap-ent (Middle-German, hah-end; New-Ger., 
 tfabteni); 01d-Nordish,Aa/'-and (Danish, Aaw-cmde; Swedish, Aa/b-a»de) ; Anglo- 
 Saxon, hdbh-ende (Old-English, hav-ende; New-Bng., hav-ing); Dutch, hebb-ende. 
 
 Eem. 2. The termination of the present participle in English (-iiig) was, dur- 
 ing the Anglo-Saxon periodj a substantive suffix (sometimes also an adjective 
 suflSx). During the Old-English period (A. D. 1250-1558) this nominal suffix 
 (■ing) supplanted the participial ending {-end), the two forms being frequently 
 employed with the same verb at the s^me time. At present there is scarcely 
 a trace of the original participial ending (-end), even in the many dialects of 
 England and Scotland. 
 
 %\ZO,Rem.Z. The following present participles also, among others, may be 
 rendered into English by adjectives: 
 
 Sltrat^enb, dissuasive. 
 SlnjleSenb, contagious. 
 Ste^enb/ corrosive. 
 SluffttHenb, striking, remarkable. 
 SluJfS^nenb, conciliatory, 
 ffiele^renb, instructive. • 
 Stiidenb, oppressive. 
 
 Entf^eibenb, decisive. 
 
 gitE^enb, fluent. 
 Sfott|d)teitenb, progressive.. 
 ®eniigcnb, sufficient. 
 
 ©Wnjenb, brilliant. 
 .^CtSorragcnb, prominent. 
 ^etsorfptingenb, salient. 
 3)affenb, appropriate. 
 Uejcitebenb, persuasive. 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PART. 99 
 
 Untct^nltenb, entertaining. SBibcvf))vei$enb, contradictory. 
 
 Untcnie^menb, enterprising. ^ SBiittjenb, furious. 
 
 SBor^Cn'Wenb, prevalent, predomnant. Swingenb, compulsory. 
 
 §131. The Perfect Participle. During the Old-German period the prefix 
 gcs was used in forming the perfect participle of some verbs j with other verbs 
 it was not employed. The use of gce became very general during the Middle- 
 German period. In the language of literature of the New-German period the 
 limitations of its use are. fixed as given in § 131. 
 
 Kern. 1. In poetry and in the Upper-German dialects gcs is often omitted, as : 
 23a^ SBcrt jutclt ifl bod) SoUenbEt l>lic= The work has finally been finished. 
 
 bcii (®.), 
 SSie feib it)V fo jutig geMicBetl, unb id) How have you remained so young, 
 bin fo Cllt iBortcu (Ullatlb), while I have become so old. 
 
 Rem. 2. In cases where gcs is omitted, it is to be considered as never having 
 been added, not as having added and then dropped. 
 
 Rem. 3. The Anglo-Saxon had the prefix gc= in the perfect participle; in Old- 
 English, the prefix was softened to y or i; it is occasionally found (in poetry) 
 in the New-English, as : 
 
 *' Spring y'clad in grassy die" (Byron). . 
 
 " And he that there liad unawares y^gazed" (Byeon). 
 
 Rem. i. The prefix gcs was first used only with verbs having the inseparable 
 prefix ge= (§ 155, 4). It is to be considered originally as a reduplication, simi- 
 lar to that which prevailed formerly in the past tenses of most the Indo-Euro- 
 pean languages, as : 
 
 ^jinsorit, pros, inf., da=to give; perf. indie. daddu=I have given. 
 
 Greek, " " ypenpEiv^^to write; " " yiypafpa=.IhavevmUen. 
 
 Latin, " '* dare=^io give ; " " dedi^I have given. 
 
 Gothic, " " fahan{\mitn)=to catch; " " faifah= I have caught. 
 
 § 131, Rem. 4. In some oases, participial adjectives have the ancient form of 
 the participle, while the verb from which it was formed has received another 
 participle in the New-German, as : 
 
 Scfd)etben (Mid.-Ger. part.), modest; New-Ger. part, befdjitbcn, allotted. 
 
 ©tiaten (Mid.-Ger. part.), sublime; " " " ev^obcn, raised. 
 
 Oebtegen (Mid.-Ger. part.), stm-ling; " " " o^tWiitn, flourished. 
 
 Octtanbt (Mid.-Ger. part.), c^^crt; " " " f "ewanbt, I *''™'''^" 
 
 § 132. Tenses. The Teutonic languages had originally but two tenses, the 
 present and the imperfect. All the other relations of time were expressed by 
 circumlocution. 
 
 Rem. 1. The first appearance of the forms of the perfect and pluperfect tenses, 
 as at present employed, was in the eighth and ninth centuries. By the tenth 
 century these forms had become fully established. 
 
 Rem. 2. During the Gothic, Old-German, and Middle-German periods, the po- 
 tentialjerbs follcn and looUcn were used to express future time (as shall and 
 will a^ryet employed in English). Many examples exist of the early use of 
 
100 
 
 teacher's COMPANIOlSr. 
 
 tDStbett with the present participle in expressing future time (from which soma 
 grammarians have concluded that the infinitiye form of the verbj as now used^ 
 is only a contraction fronv the present participle), as : 
 
 "Die werdent got sehende" (Berthold von Eegensburg, died in 1373), in 
 New-German, „bie Werbett ®ott ^t^m"=" thet/ shall see God." — "Ein volck wird 
 sitzend" (from" the fourth printed translation of the Bible, 1470-79), in New- 
 German „Eitt 25otE roirb ^\^exi"=" a people will be seated." 
 
 § 136. The verb ^abm 
 
 (Latin.Vj Gothic. 
 
 - (habes) habaj 
 
 (habes) habaith; 
 
 (habet) habaith; 
 
 '( habemus)habam ; 
 
 (habetis) habaith; 
 
 (habent.) haband. 
 ' habaida; 
 
 'habaides; 
 
 habaida; 
 
 habaid^dum; 
 
 habaidSduth; 
 
 habaidSdun. 
 
 Infinitive, haban. 
 Pres. Part, habands. 
 Perf. Part, habaiths. 
 
 has been developed as follows : 
 
 Old-Ger. Mid.-G6rmftn. New-Qer. Anglo-Sax. English. Dutch. 
 
 hapem, ban, date; habbe, * have; heb, 
 
 hSst, ^afti haefst, Jiast; hebt, 
 
 h&t, l^dt; hsefth, has; heeft, 
 
 hapfimfis, han, haben, X)d1>tn i habbath, have ; hebben, 
 
 hapSt, hat, habet, ijaitt; habbath, have; hebt, 
 
 hapSnt. hant.habent.^al^en. habbath. have, hebben. 
 
 hapgta, hate, ^otte; hfflfde, had; had, 
 
 hapetos, hatest, t)attc|li hffifdest, 7iadst ;'hiiit, 
 
 hapeta, h^te, t)atte; hsefde, had; had, 
 
 hapetumfis, haten, fatten; hsefdon, had; haddcn, 
 
 hapStut, hatet, '^attet; hasfdon, had; hadt, 
 
 haten. fatten- h^fdon. had. badden. 
 
 ban. Ijaien. habban. have, hebben. 
 
 I)a6cnb. habbend.Aawzny.hebbend 
 
 gehaht.* ge^att. hsefd. had. gehad. 
 
 hapStun. 
 
 hapen. 
 
 hapenti. 
 
 hapet. 
 
 § 137. The verb fciit has been developed as follows : 
 
 Gothic. Old-Ocrman. Mid,'German. New-Ger. Anglo-Sax. 
 
 i; pim, pin, bim,bin, bin, bin! eom, 
 
 ; pi3,pist, bist, U^; eart, 
 
 ist; ist, is, ist, . tfl; is, 
 
 sijkm; pirum, pirun, sin, birn, ftnb; 
 
 sijnth; pirut, birnt, bint, sit,sint,birt,fcib i 
 
 sind. sind. 
 
 sint. 
 
 vas ; was, was, 
 
 vast; wari, waere, 
 
 vas ; was, was, 
 
 v§sum; warumfes, warun, waren, 
 
 vSsuth; warut, warent. waret, 
 
 vSsun. warun, waron. waren. 
 
 Infin. visan. sin, wesan. sin, wBsen. 
 
 Pres. P. visands. wSsanti. wesende. 
 
 Perp.P. r- gawesan. gewesen.f 
 
 ftnb. 
 
 km; 
 
 ttatm; 
 
 ttatet! 
 
 waren. 
 
 fete. 
 
 fetmb. 
 
 sind, 
 sind, 
 sind. 
 
 WfflS, 
 
 wsere, 
 
 wseron, 
 
 waeron, 
 
 wseron, 
 
 waeren. 
 
 vesan. 
 
 English. 
 
 am; 
 
 art; 
 
 is; 
 
 are; 
 
 are; 
 
 are. 
 
 was; 
 
 wast; 
 
 was; 
 
 Dutch. 
 
 ben, 
 
 zijt,. 
 
 is, 
 
 zijn, 
 
 zijt, 
 
 zijn. 
 
 waart. 
 
 was, 
 wei'e; waren, 
 were; waart, 
 were., waren. 
 he. zijn. 
 vesende. ieing. zijnde, 
 
 fleWcfen. wesen. been, geweest. 
 
 § 139. Regular Verbs. During the Gothic and Old-German periods there 
 were three modes of conjugating the verba of the "Weak Conjugation" (which 
 
 * The forma gehahet, gehthel, gtheht, geltan, are also found. 
 
 * Ti>afA.m <T.ii>..c fa Ainn fnnnil. This fonu is sometimes used io tbo New-Gcrman, alsD, In a 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PART. 
 
 101 
 
 we term regular veris). .^flBen, given above, was a regular verb of the "weak 
 oonjugatlou" until the Middle-Gorman period, when it was contracted, as given 
 above. 
 
 We give below the development of the conjugation of the weak verb fucl)Cii ; 
 
 Gothic. 
 
 sokjaj 
 sokeis ; 
 sokeith; 
 sokjam; 
 s6keith,' 
 . sokjand. 
 
 sokida; 
 sokldes; 
 sokida; 
 
 Old-German, 
 
 s6hu, 
 
 sohis, 
 
 sohit, 
 
 sohamSs, 
 
 s6hat, 
 
 sohant. 
 
 Middle-Germeu. 
 
 suoche, 
 
 suochest, 
 
 suoch(s)t, 
 
 suochen, 
 
 suoch(e)t, 
 
 suochen. 
 
 sdhita, 
 sohitos, 
 sdhita. 
 
 suoch(e)te. 
 
 New-Ger. Anglo-Sai 
 
 fuc^e; s6ce, 
 fu^e^w sSoest, 
 
 fuc&et; 
 fu(|tn. 
 fu^te; 
 
 seek; 
 
 seek ; 
 
 Dutch. 
 
 zoek, 
 
 zoekt, 
 
 zoekt, 
 
 zoeken, 
 
 zoekt, 
 
 zoeken. 
 
 sought; zocht. 
 
 sSceth, 
 sficath, 
 sScath, 
 sScath. 
 sohte, 
 suoch(e)test, fu^ttjl; sohtest, soughtest; zocht, 
 suoch(e)te, fud^te; sohte, sought; zocht, 
 sukidedum; B6hitum6s, suoch(e)ten, fud&tetl ; sohton, sought 
 sokideduth; sohitut, suoch(e)tet, fu($tct; s6hton, sought; 
 . sokidedum. sohitun. suoch(e)ten. fui^tett. 
 
 Infin. sokjan. sohan.* suochen. fuc^eit. 
 Pre's. p. sokjands. sohantes. suochend. fu^cnb. 
 Perf. P.sdkeths. sohte. gasuochet. gefui|t. 
 
 sohton. sought. 
 s^can. seeh. 
 s^cende. seeking. 
 soht. sought. 
 
 zochten, 
 
 zocht, 
 
 zochten. 
 
 zoeken. 
 
 zoekende. 
 
 gezocht. 
 
 § Hi. Irregular Verbs. The verbs of the Strong Conjugation (which we term 
 irreguZav verbs, after the usual nomenclature of the English grammarians) in 
 the Gothic language are divided in various ways by different philologists. Some 
 make fourteen, others make, eight classes. During the history of the German 
 language, verbs haye frequently passed from one class to another. 
 
 Some verbs that formerly were irregular have become regular in the New- 
 German period, as-: Jauen, '^cifi^en, I)in!en, iBgEtt, neigcn, y^attcn, jiemcn; some 
 verbs that formerly were regular, have become irregular in the New-German 
 period, as : bmjjen, glEtcfien, iretfeii. 
 
 In the examples given below, illustrating the development of the principal 
 parts of the strong or irregular verbs, the following points, among others, are 
 deserving of attention : 
 
 1. The changes of vowels in the same principal part. 
 
 2. The changes of consonants in the verbs. 
 
 3. The reduplication in the imperfect tense of some Gothic verbs. 
 
 4. The irregular and gradual introduction of the prefix gc in the perf. part. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Perf. Participle. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Perf. Participle. 
 
 Goth., 
 
 bin dan. 
 
 band. 
 
 bandus. 
 
 Goth., 
 
 hilpan, 
 
 halp, 
 
 hulpans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 pindan. 
 
 pand, 
 
 gapundan. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 hilfan. 
 
 half. 
 
 'holfan. 
 
 M.-G. 
 
 binden, 
 
 band. 
 
 gebunden. 
 
 M.-G. 
 
 hilfen. 
 
 half. 
 
 geholfen. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 Mnben, 
 
 6anb, 
 
 geBunben. 
 
 N.-G. 
 
 ■^elfEn, 
 
 Dctlf- 
 
 ge^olfcn. 
 
 Goth., 
 
 rinnan. 
 
 rann. 
 
 runnans. 
 
 Goth., 
 
 brikan, 
 
 "brak, 
 
 brukans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 rinnan. 
 
 ran. 
 
 runnan. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 prihhan. 
 
 prah, 
 
 prohhan. 
 
 M.-G. 
 
 , rinnen. 
 
 ran. 
 
 gerunnen. 
 
 M.-G. 
 
 brechen. 
 
 brach, 
 
 gebrochen. 
 
 JV.-G., 
 
 tinnen, 
 
 rann, 
 
 geronnen. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 Svec&en, 
 
 bvfl(J), 
 
 3t- . 
 
 * The forms aChhatif auacheUf BuoJJian, suochan are also found. 
 
102 
 
 teacher's companion. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Perfect Part. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Perfect Part. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 nimaiij 
 
 nam. 
 
 numans. 
 
 Gothic. 
 
 IStan, 
 
 lailot. 
 
 letans. 
 
 0.^0., 
 
 XLiman, 
 
 nam, 
 
 noman. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 lazan. 
 
 liaz. 
 
 kil^zan.- 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 nemen, 
 
 nam, 
 
 genomen. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 Ian, 
 
 lies, 
 
 gelasen. 
 
 jsr.-G., 
 
 netjmen, 
 
 nal)m, 
 
 . senoramen. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 taffett. 
 
 licp, 
 
 gelaffeti. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 giban. 
 
 gab. 
 
 gibans. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 baban. 
 
 haibab. 
 
 babans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 kipan, 
 
 kap. 
 
 ^pans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 baban. 
 
 biano, 
 
 kibangan. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 giben. 
 
 gap, 
 
 gegeben. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 haben. 
 
 hieno. 
 
 gebangen. 
 
 N.-6., 
 
 fietm, 
 
 3Ci*/ 
 
 gegeScn. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 longen, 
 
 Wit 
 
 ge^angtn. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 itan, 
 
 at, 
 
 itans. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 gaggan,' 
 
 gaggida 
 
 , gaggans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 izan, 
 
 az. 
 
 ezau. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 gangaii. 
 
 giang. 
 
 kikankan. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 ezen, 
 
 az. 
 
 gessen. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 gan, g§n. 
 
 gienc. 
 
 gegangen. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 tffot, 
 
 ap, 
 
 Seacffcn. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 ge^n. 
 
 ging. 
 
 gegangcn. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 saihvan, 
 
 sahT, 
 
 saivhans. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 stautan. 
 
 staistaat,stautans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 sihan, 
 
 sah. 
 
 soban. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 stozan. 
 
 stioz, 
 
 stozan. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 siheu, 
 
 saob. 
 
 geseben. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 6t6zen, 
 
 stiez. 
 
 gestozen. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 Men, 
 
 M- 
 
 geWm. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 fiopcn, 
 
 m. 
 
 gejtopen. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 faran. 
 
 for. 
 
 farans. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 bttan. 
 
 bait. 
 
 bitans.- 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 faran. 
 
 fiior, 
 
 faran. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 pizan. 
 
 peiz. 
 
 pizan. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 faren. 
 
 fuor. 
 
 gefabrn. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 Mzen, 
 
 beiz. 
 
 gebizzen. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 fa^rm, 
 
 Mr, 
 
 sefttljren. 
 
 N.-O., 
 
 fieipcn. 
 
 m, 
 
 grttffm. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 graban, 
 
 grof. 
 
 grabans. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 greipan. 
 
 gvaip. 
 
 greipans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 krapaa, 
 
 kruop. 
 
 krapan. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 krifan. 
 
 kreif. 
 
 krifan. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 graben, 
 
 gruop, 
 
 gegraben. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 grffen. 
 
 greif. 
 
 gegriffen. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 graten, 
 
 gvut, 
 
 gcgvaiim. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 grcifcn, 
 
 SViff, 
 
 gcgviffm. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 slahan, 
 
 sloh. 
 
 slabans. 
 
 GothiCy 
 
 dreiban. 
 
 draif. 
 
 dribans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 slaban, 
 
 sluoh. 
 
 slagan. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 tripan. 
 
 treip. 
 
 tripan. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 slahen, 
 
 sluoo. 
 
 geslagen. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 triben. 
 
 treip. 
 
 ge triben. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 Wlagen, 
 
 Wlug, 
 
 8e(d)Iageit. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 tveifcen, 
 
 htcB, 
 
 gctvietcn. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 vahsjan, 
 
 v6hs, 
 
 vabsans. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 (be)leiban,(be)laif, (b6)libans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 wahsan, 
 
 ■vruohs. 
 
 wabsan. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 pilipan. 
 
 pileip. 
 
 pilipan. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 wahsen. 
 
 wnohs. 
 
 ge-vrabsen. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 bliben. 
 
 bleib. 
 
 bliben. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 tta^fen, 
 
 »U^«, 
 
 gewac^fen. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 MctJcn, 
 
 iltc6, 
 
 geSitetieii. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 haldan, 
 
 baihald, 
 
 baldans. 
 
 Gothic 
 
 
 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 haltan. 
 
 hialt. 
 
 gabalten. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 soripan. 
 
 soreip. 
 
 soripan. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 halten, 
 
 Melt, 
 
 gebalten. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 sobriben. 
 
 scbreib 
 
 gescbriben 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 ■^alten, 
 
 •^iclt, 
 
 gtljaltcn. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 ji^rrikn. 
 
 fd)tirt, 
 
 gefdjvieicn. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 redan, 
 
 rairoth. 
 
 redans. 
 
 Gothic 
 
 leihvan. 
 
 laihv. 
 
 laibrans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 redan, 
 
 riad. 
 
 garadan. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 lihan. 
 
 16h, 
 
 llBan. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 rathen. 
 
 rieth. 
 
 geratben. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 liben. 
 
 16oh, 
 
 gelihen. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 rat^cn, 
 
 rict^, 
 
 gevot^cn. 
 
 N.-G., 
 
 Ici^tn, 
 
 M, 
 
 grite^cii. 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 slfipan. 
 
 saizlSp, 
 
 slSpans. 
 
 Gothic 
 
 skeinan. 
 
 Bkain, 
 
 skinans. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 slafen, 
 
 sliaf, 
 
 gaslS-fan. 
 
 O.-G., 
 
 skinen, 
 
 gkein, 
 
 skinan. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 Iflafen, 
 
 slief. 
 
 geslafen. 
 
 M.-G., 
 
 sobinen, 
 
 sobein. 
 
 gescbinen. 
 
 
 
 fjf.«»C 
 
 .*«fAr.sfnM 
 
 M.a 
 
 fAprMpn 
 
 M«pn. 
 
 npffiifnm. 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PART. 
 
 103 
 
 Gothic, 
 Old-G., 
 
 Present. 
 
 haitan, 
 heizan, 
 , heizen, 
 Ijeigett, 
 giutan, 
 kiazan, 
 giuzen, 
 gieicn, 
 skiuban 
 sciupan 
 schiuten 
 
 haban, 
 haban, 
 han, 
 
 skulan, 
 sculan, 
 , suln, 
 
 foUen, 
 
 [mperfect. 
 
 baihait, 
 
 hiaz, 
 
 hiez, 
 
 gaut, 
 k6z, 
 gSz, 
 
 skauf, 
 scoup, 
 scboup, 
 
 im, 
 
 habaida 
 habeta, 
 hate, 
 
 5atte, 
 
 skulda, 
 scolta, 
 solte, 
 foUte, 
 
 Perfect Part. 
 
 haitans. 
 heizan. 
 geheizen. 
 
 gutans. 
 
 kozan. 
 
 gegozzen. 
 
 gegoffen. 
 
 skubans. 
 
 scopan. 
 
 gesohoben. 
 
 , habans. 
 kihapetl 
 geh^t. 
 
 skulds. 
 kescolet. 
 geschollt. 
 fiefoHt. 
 
 Gothic, 
 Old-G., 
 Mid.-G. 
 Mw-G., 
 
 Gothic,. 
 
 Old-G., 
 
 Mld.-G. 
 
 Mw-G., 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 Old-G., 
 
 Mid.-G. 
 
 Mw-G., 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 Old-G., 
 
 Mid.-G. 
 
 Mw-G., 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 Old-G., 
 
 Mid.-G. 
 
 Mw-G., 
 
 Preeeiit. Imperfect. P 
 
 kunnan, kuntha, 
 Chan, ohunda, 
 kan, kunde, 
 
 tiinnen, lonntc, 
 
 magan, mahta, 
 magan, mahta, 
 miigen, mohte, 
 mbgen, mo^te, 
 thaurban, thaurfta 
 durfan, dorfta, 
 durfen, dorfte, 
 bijrfm, htvfte, 
 motan, mosta, 
 muozan, muosa, 
 , muezen, muoste, 
 
 mitffen, mupte, 
 
 briggan, brahte, 
 
 prinkan, prank, 
 
 , bringen, brahte, 
 
 bringen, Sra^te, 
 
 erfect Part. 
 
 kunths. 
 
 Mid.-G. 
 
 
 Beui-G., 
 Gothic, 
 Old-G., 
 Mid.-G. 
 
 gefonnt. 
 mahts. 
 
 Ifew-G., 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 Old-G., 
 
 Oemo^t. 
 , thaurfts. 
 
 Mid.-G. 
 
 New-G., 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 Old-G., 
 
 Mid.-G. 
 
 gedorft. 
 geiuvft. 
 mdsts. 
 
 
 New-G.', 
 
 Gothic, 
 
 Old-G., 
 
 Mid.-G. 
 
 Mw-G., 
 
 gentupt. 
 briggans 
 praht. 
 braht. 
 
 gcJra^t. 
 
 § 145. Alphabetical List of Irregular Verbs. The attention of the student 
 may be drawn to the fact that, when the stem of any verb, that modifies the 
 vowel in the singular number of the present indicative, ends in t (as fcc^t^en, 
 gefeen, l^att»en, fd^efeen), the third Person singular does not add another =t 
 (thus we have ficl)t, not pc^tt ; ^(ilt, not ^dftt). 
 
 Rem. In Now-German the verb fragen is regular, though the irregular forms 
 frfigfl, fraflt, in the pros, ind., and frug in the imperf., are ocasionally met with. 
 
 § ]47 .The development of the Conjugation of strong (or irregular) verbs 
 may be illustrated by the following paradigms of the verb Ijaltcn : 
 
 
 Gothic. Old-German. 
 
 Mid.-Gcr. New-German, 
 
 Anglo-Sai. 
 
 Ensllsh. 
 
 Dutch. 
 
 6 
 
 ■ halda; 
 
 haltu. 
 
 halte. 
 
 :^(lUci 
 
 bealde, 
 
 hoU; 
 
 houd. 
 
 g 
 
 haldis; 
 
 haltSs, 
 
 haltest. 
 
 %mi 
 
 healdest. 
 
 holdesl; 
 
 houdt. 
 
 f 
 
 haldith; 
 
 halte, 
 
 haltet. 
 
 Wfti 
 
 healdeth. 
 
 holds; 
 
 houdt. 
 
 15 " 
 
 heldam ; 
 
 hialtumgs, halten. 
 
 Ijalten; 
 
 healdath. 
 
 hold; 
 
 houden, 
 
 D3 
 
 haldith; 
 
 halts t. 
 
 haltet. 
 
 ■^alteti 
 
 healdath. 
 
 hoU; 
 
 houdt, 
 
 P4 
 
 ^ haldand. 
 
 haltfin. 
 
 halten. 
 
 jatten. 
 
 healdath 
 
 hold. 
 
 houden. 
 
 o 
 
 r haihald; 
 
 Malt, 
 
 hielt. 
 
 ^telt; 
 
 heold. 
 
 held; 
 
 Held, 
 
 
 haihalst; 
 
 hialti. 
 
 hielte. 
 
 ^telt(e)ili 
 
 heolde, 
 
 heldest; 
 
 hieldt. 
 
 ^ 
 
 haihald; 
 
 hialt,. 
 
 hielt, 
 
 :^ielt! 
 
 heold. 
 
 held; 
 
 hield. 
 
 b ■ 
 
 haihaldum ; 
 
 hialtumes 
 
 , hielten. 
 
 jielten; 
 
 heoldon, 
 
 held; 
 
 hidden, . 
 
 g 
 
 haihalduth ; 
 
 hialtut. 
 
 hieltet. 
 
 Jieltct! 
 
 heoldon, 
 
 held; 
 
 hieldt. 
 
 S 
 
 haihaldum. 
 
 hialtun. 
 
 hielten. 
 
 Jieltcn. 
 
 heoldon. 
 
 held. 
 
 hidden. 
 
 Inb 
 
 vs. baldan. 
 
 haitan. 
 
 haitan. 
 
 fatten. 
 
 healdan. 
 
 hold. 
 
 houden. 
 
 Pe 
 
 ES. P. haldands. haltant. 
 
 haltend. 
 
 I;altenl). 
 
 healdend 
 
 holding. 
 
 houdendo 
 
 Pe 
 
 BF. P. haldans 
 
 gahaltan 
 
 gehalten 
 
 . gehalten. 
 
 healden. 
 
 heU. 
 
 gehouden 
 
104 
 
 teacher's companion. 
 
 § 150. Compound Verbs. We add here a few other examples, illustrating the 
 placing of the prefix of separable verbs at the end of sentences : 
 
 S)t. i?arl goUett, e^emaliget 9)vofeffot 
 bcv beutWen ©fto'^e «ai liMDavb 
 EoHege, tarn im So^te 1841 id bcm 
 SSxmie einea 2)omt)f6ooK steiWen 
 SJcw Woxt mi Sojlon ura, 
 
 2)te gteube utct ben ervuitgenen ©teg 
 ptagte fid) in bet ■^altung iinb ben 
 ©eft^tern bet ©olbaten «n»ettenn» 
 Jar ani, 
 
 ©ie gmgen mi) ben SJorpojleni «uf 
 :^attem fflege tnbeg fam t^nen fii^on, 
 son jmet 9)i)ilen gefii^rt, ber Untet= 
 ofpitev ©^mibt unb bet Beftette 
 ^binet, mil bem '^alitobten i)|ieitei= 
 ($ifd)en §ufaren cntgcgcn. 
 
 Dr. Kad FoUen, formerly the profess- 
 or of the German language in Har- 
 vard College, perished by the burn- 
 ing of a steam-boat between New 
 York and Boston in the year 1841. 
 
 The joy over the victory which they 
 had achieved was plainly expressed 
 in the bearing and in the faces of 
 the brave soldiers. 
 
 They were going toward the advanced 
 line of pickets; when they liad got 
 half way there, there came toward 
 them the Corporal Schmidt and 
 Korner, who had been rescued from 
 the tnjmy, with the half-dead Aus- 
 
 trian hussar. 
 
 Sen?.. For other examples, see the Beading Lessons in Part Second of the Ger- 
 man Course, as : on page 204, „T)ei- 3l(mt 2) e u t f i^ |}«mmt ai;" page 207, 
 
 „9incin giiebtiil Wic3 i^n tii ;" at bottom of page 206, „D|nc §of unb $crb, 
 
 f^weifen fie um|er;" page 211, „33a ^uJen fie an, unb leitcten ..... aB i" page 
 
 214, „bttnn t.itt ba« Oewciffct Ijetauf." 
 
 § 157, 2, Rem. 3. The following verbs also, among others, have the appearance 
 of being doubly compounded : 
 
 from bet Slntragi proposition, 
 bie S(uffid)t, oversight. 
 
 •Seanttagen, to propose; 
 Seauffic^tigen, to oversee; 
 ffleftuftragen, to commission ; 
 SeontWDttcn, to answer; 
 
 Scnact'tic&ttgen, to inform; 
 Sena^'^tiKflf, to injure; 
 IBeuntu^igen, to disturb; 
 Seurlunbigen, to authenticate; 
 ffleurlautien, to give a furlough; 
 fflesorjugen, to favor; 
 ajetaiifc^ieben, to discharge; 
 SSerungnaben, to disgrace; 
 SSetunteinigcn, to soil; 
 ajeturfa^en, to cause; 
 
 bet Sluftrag, commission. 
 
 bie SlntWort, answer. 
 
 bie Sfadjticfet, information. 
 
 ber Slac^t^eil, injury. 
 
 Unru'^ig, uneasy. 
 
 bie ttrfunbe, original document. 
 
 bet Krtau6, furlough. 
 
 ber SJorjugi favor. 
 
 ber 9l6f(|iebA departure. 
 
 bie Ungnabe, disgrace. 
 
 unrein, unclean. 
 
 bie Urfa^e, cause. 
 
 § 158. Eeflexive Verbs. For many other examples of verbs which are re- 
 flexive in German, but which are not translated into English by reflexive verbs, 
 see §178, 3, and Less.XLIV.,3; see also on page 199, „6c5ie5t fic^,".„baEi ei fl^ 
 
 me^t Iiejie^t ;" page 202, „|)ett unb SWabame 3)te^tet teeilcn fti) ;" „S)t. SfJunge 
 
 freut p^;" page 203, „unb ernvfe^Ien fid)!" page 204, „Untet ben ^o'^enjlaufenct^oB 
 U) i" puge 205, „3|1'« wo ber sKarfcn SRinb fti^ prctft;" page 206, „©ne ©efcflWaft 
 
 WoUte fid) . . . .■ . Ittflig m«d)en ;" page 207, „23ct SScttter wcHte fid) tcf^weren ;" 
 
 „9tac^ biefcn .... Settac^tungen cntfWop ic^ mid) ;" page 210, „3m So^tc 1788 ... . 
 
NOTES TO THE THIKD PART. 105 
 
 t»o ct ft^ auf ^ielt ;" „Iieg cv i[iiSj enf^cfien i" „m " W JwiicE i" „St« 8« feincm 
 
 Sobe $atte er fti$ ju trfvtuen;" page 213, „8t£get feine SBeUe f4;" „lircitet fit* 
 
 bet munbevf^bne ©ee . . . «ua ;" „3iorbItc^ etljett ft* i" «9Jci«t ©orfct — ret^en M." 
 
 § 160. Impersonal Verbs. For some of the verbs expressing natural phe- 
 nomena, see the Vocabulary in Lesson VI. We add here a few others : 
 
 di ftiett, it is freezing. E^ bammert, it is twilight, it is grow- 
 
 (Bi t^aut, it is thawing. ing dnslij (said alike of morning 
 
 35er 9ltienb boimmett, it is getting or evening), 
 
 dusliy; the evening is setting in. & tagt, the day is brealiing. 
 
 § 160, Bern, 3. The following examples, also, Illustrate the use of active verbs 
 as impersonal verbs : 
 
 & Wirb jc^t tm ©aale gefungen, There is singing now in the parlor. 
 
 ®^ ttirb geftJtelt, There is playing going on. 
 
 (Si foi^rt ftd^ fe^r gut In biefem SBagen, This carriage rides very well. 
 
 60 fl^Idft itc^ gut <m bem SBaffetfatIc, One sleeps easily by a cascade. 
 
 Rem. Tor further examples of Impersonal Verbs, see § 177, 8 ; and § 179, 2, 
 
 Rem.S; see also on page 191, „S0 wttb talb mnim;" „& tterbe Cicj)t;" 
 
 page 201, i,3um Hjlen SKale tft ei mit seifagt !" „unb d ttitb mit .... we^ ... . ;" 
 page 202, „aitt c3 ijl . . . ;" page 207, „e3 Jc^ictt ciugerjl j^wcr ;" „tDte fann bit ti 
 
 etge^en ;" page 208, at bottom, „aBenrt ti ttti^t ge^t;" page 211, „©o toentg 
 
 Sebatf ti ;" page 214, „ti \ftit bte Untctwelt." 
 
 § 161. The Passive Voice; The Gothic language had a passive form for the 
 present tense of the iifdicative and subjunctive moods, and also scanty re- 
 mains of a middle voice for the same tense. The passive voice is used in Part 
 Second as follows: on page 180, „Ei3 toilb gcijfiffcn ;" page 185, „^<Mn et juge= 
 fnoijft wetben?" page 188, „§ctr 3R. i|l . . . . getu^tt wotbeiti" page 189, „. . . bet 
 Srief .... gefc^tdt ttutbc ;" page 191, „bet ®tn«b|letn .... witb .... gelegt wetben ;" 
 page 192, ,,©011 et Selo^nt wetben?" page 197, „.&eute witb .... ge^alten;" „®t 
 ifl . . . . etnonnt wotben;" page 198, „»on Slufetjle'^ttng . . . . geitouc^t witb;" 
 page 199, „®ntwi]tfe wetben au^gefii^tt;" page 200, „butd) bie EngWnbet iefunnt 
 Wotben finb;" page 204, „wutben bie SeutWen. . ..Betonnti" page 205, „gin 
 ©ttagenjunge . . . . wutbe gefragt;" page 210, >,boc^ wutbe et ftjoitet jum ctjlen SDJt» 
 niflet. . . . etnonnt;" page 211, „bie ©tatte settat^cn wiitbe;" page 212, „®to6e 
 Dpfer wetben . . . • gefotbcrt Wetben ;" page 214, „anbete Si^tet mugten angeJtannt 
 Wetben." 
 
 § 162. The Potential Verbs. Examples of the use of these verbs are found 
 in Part Second as follows : 
 
 1. iSoKcn; on page 116, „^$ foK g«nj ge^e^eni" page 206, „S)a3 ?on ci 
 
 fein ;" page 209, „wo et fiubiten foKte;" page 214, „3Kotgen foU^ bu . . . . au^ge^en." 
 
 2. asoOen; on page 178, „SEBolIen ©ic n»^ etwa« Stob (^a6en)?" page 200 
 
 (No. 7); page 202, „ft)eifert ju WoUen;" page 203, ,,ben ©ic jlcHen woUenj" 
 
 page 206, „wottte .... lufltg mac^en ;" page 207, „tto!Ite teWweten;" „wonte 
 
 i^ setjitten;" page 208, at bottom, „wie man wiH." 
 
 8. sanitcn ; on page 178, „Sonnen ©ie emijfc'^Ien ; " page 181, „5!Bic siel fann 
 
 man mitne'^men ;" page 185, „©te tiinncn .... setlaffen ;" page 201, „aBie 
 
 E2 
 
106 teacher's companion. 
 
 gevn urn ... . bavBvinsen ju !iintien ;" page 202, „25r. SRunge nii^t fe^en ju liin^ 
 
 nen;" page 207, „$intmtommcn fannil bui" page 210, „iDit>meit ju tijnnen." 
 
 4. SBIBgcii; page 177, tc^ mftg ei getocfjt (5a6en)!" page 188, „t(5 moi^te 
 
 gern .... faufen i" page 199, „2)iefet Sejdjtu^ mag .... feiit ;" page 200 (No. 7); 
 page 201, „9ltle3 Slnbere .... fein wag;" page 201, „)tio(i)te bet Sag .... tt!ii;ber= 
 fe^ven;" page 212, ;,gefotbevt lierben miigen;" page 214, „6arfup Wtafen mijc^te." 
 
 5. ©iirfcn; page 177, „tt)mn i$ titten batf!" „2)atf ic^ . . . Wtten;" page 181, 
 „2l?an bavf .... fptei^eni" page 209, „miic^te i(^ . . . . jetn." 
 
 6. SKufTcn; page 176, „©te mug '^utcn;" page 190, „3c& mug ... . mtt= 
 
 ^ett !" page 193, „til) mug nnWaffcn;" page 205, „Btin SSatcrianb mug 
 
 fein." 
 
 7. Saffcii; page 175, „©ie laffen fti| fe'^en;" page 181, „2)te SJtafc^ine Ijat 
 
 mi* fc^Iafen laffcn;" page 185, „3)ai3 lagt ftc^ anbevnj" page 137, „Sof» 
 
 fen Sic mi^ .... fe|eni" page 193, „i(| mug . . . (jljotog^rtiren taffenj" page 207, 
 „mic^ ^ineinttagen ju laffen." 
 
 Syntax of the Verb. § 178. The following examples of the gorernment of 
 the genitive case by verbs occur in Part Second; page 202, ,§err unb SItabame 
 Etet^arb i)evftc^etn|)evmunb2Jtabame9)ren8ter (aco.) i^ter ganjlic^en ■&o^= 
 (li^ t u n g ;" page 204, ,;b e r e n fic^ bie SKinnefoingct tcbienten ;" page 206, „fte 6e= 
 biivfcn leineS geuerg;" page 209, ,,l)ex ©vtnnetung nur lett;" page 210, 
 „Ueg et fii% fcinc^ ©t aa t a b.ienjleS ent^eScn;" „ ber »i)nfommen = 
 (len ®efunb^eit unb....ju etfrcuen !" page 211, „fat ©cutfc^e Scbatf ei ei = 
 net Kei^enfa^af ti" „®ebcntt beS grogen Seifvieia.... bev ©iianier." 
 
 § 179. Among the many examples of the government of the dative case by 
 verbs, which occur in Part Second, may be mentioned the following: page 
 175, „M wiinfi^e Sljnen;" „ic&banle S^nen;" „S)aa t|iut mir Icibi" „aBaa 
 fep i^r;" page 176, „Stingen ©ic mit jwci. . . . Eier;" page 177, „®teb bcm 
 ■&errn!" page 178, „fiBnncn ©ic un3 einen .... ©ofl^of .... cmyfetjlen ?" 
 page 190, „©i)»ielan mtr til;" page 201, (.jwingtmii^ Sir juf^teilJeni" „3tt 
 
 leS Slnbcte.... etf^eint mtr;" „um Sir meinen ©lijtounfc^ batitingen ju 
 
 tiinnen;" page 202, „imbemt)fe^lenftd) ^ervn unb SBiabame ®6et^arb;" 
 „-&crr Scvn^atb unb 25r. Olungc I)aten un« »erft)ro^en;" „3^rcr ginlabung 
 
 naii^tommen ;" page 203, „ber Etnlabung golge ju leipen ;" page 
 
 206, „ber i ^ n e n sorfpiclte;" page 207, „Iieg i1jm ber ^aifcr .... getcn;" „Stie= 
 gen mtr aUerlei . . . . SBcbenflic^ieitert ju Jto))fe!" „ein folc^eg Sette . . . . WoUte id) 
 mir....»erl)itten;"page208, „fiefolgeni^ren $au piling en;" „jeber|ioff= 
 nung ■^ingegeien;" page 210, „um fii^.... ber 9)»cfie. ... tuibmen ju ton= 
 
 nen ;" page 211, „ber bie ■^atfte m i r enWg ;" „5offte i^ meinem SJolfe 
 
 ertei*letung ju uerfi^affeni" page 212, „m(i} bief em Mjfttbet i^r . . . . entgcgcn. 
 flet)eni"-»crben unferer geredjten ©ac^e ben ©ieg mlei^en." 
 
 THE ADVERB. 
 
 The teacher may often find it to be a profitable exercise, especially with class- 
 es that are not very advanced, to have the students take a page of Part Second 
 and picli out all the adverbs that are employed on that page. The attention 
 of the student may be drawn especially to the oases where an adjective is used 
 
NOTES TO THE THIRD PAET. 107 
 
 adverbially. Thus, on page 175, adverbs occur a3 follows: „3c6 ficpnie mtc^ 
 fe^r aaW >'U^i gut; fo jiemltiS! nt$t fe'^r 3ut,"„iflfie nic^tie^t 
 mix," „rte $at ftc^ flavt cvKttet," „t)a6 Jte ian wic.ber IjcvgejlElIt fcin wirb," 
 „3*i)ttiite3Wn rt*' fe'5r,"„ftewu6 tmmev,"„trcteti©iettft'^er,"„fEgm©tc 
 fi^ 8 ef oiUi 3 |i," „©ie taffen Tt* ? e 1 1 e n (e^cn," „3* 6m 1 a n g e sevreifl gewtfctt." 
 
 Eem. 1. The attention of the student may be drawn to the difference that is 
 given to the style of composition by using adverbs sparingly or profusely. Com- 
 pare, for example, the piece upon „®ie ®eutfd)c @prad)c," on page 304, with 
 „<gin aiftcntcuct," page 207. 
 
 Rem. 2. It is a profitable exercise also for the student to be required to group 
 words into adverbial phrases, where possible. Thus, in ,,®cS SotiiaS ©tab," 
 on page 211 : 
 
 „2)te aCeflgot^en tBoHtcn (buri^ Stalicn) (na($ Slfritfi) ttxmten, (uttter^^ 
 we 38) |lot6 (plogH^) SHavii^/i^t fiSnig, bcnpe (iiScr bie 3)t«6en) Mim. 
 (S a) iuBen fie m, unb leiteten ben glug Savent, bet(neben ber ©tabt eofen= 
 tid) (sont guge be« Serge?) jliept, (au3 feinem SBette) aS. (SWitten 
 in bem Sett) liepcrt fie nun (buri^ etnen ^aufen ©efangenet) tin Ovab 
 graBctt «nb (in ben <3(^og ber OruSc) Jefiatteten fte, (ne6|l sielen iio|l« 
 Jarfetten), t^ven TOntg Sttoicft. (Sie baSgef^e'^en w a r), leiteten jte baa 
 sa5affet(n)ieber) (in 3 alt e Sett) juriiif, unb tbbteten, bamit bie ©tatteCson 
 3lt c wanb) serrat^en teiitbe, aUc bie, mW i&i ®ra6 gegraSen fatten." 
 
 ■PKEPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 258. It is a profitable exercise, also, for the student to be required to trace 
 out all the idiomatic peculiarities, in which prepositions are involved, that oc- 
 cur in the different Conversations and other Selections in Part Second. Thus, 
 in the „Sn5ed)felbticf," on page 203 : 
 
 „®ttt fitr (for) 1500 3:^Ir. 3>r. Gour. 
 
 „3In (to) bie S)i3tonto»®efelIfi%aft ju (at) SevUn. 
 
 „SRac^ (at) ©i^t 6eUeien Sic, auf (upon) biefen 3)vima=aBei$feI, an (to) |)errn St. 
 SBil^. Sinbemann bie ©umme son (of) gUhf^'unbett, a:5ater, 3)teuBiW Eourant, au3» 
 (over) juja'^teit. SBert^ emjifangen, ben fw tn (to [our]) SRec&nung flcHen WoUen laut 
 (according to) Setic^t." 
 
 Also in „®er Scttlct unb %aifet Sriebrid)," on page 207 : 
 
 ,Mi tinea 3^gea ju (at) sKiimSerg ein Settler ju (to [the]) Saifcr Sftiebrii^ lam 
 unb t^n urn (for) ein Sllmofen anfi)tac&, etc. 
 
 THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 § 260-261. Formation of Conjunctions. 1. ®a6 is but a modified form of 
 the neuter (bo8) of the demonstrative pronoun ber. Both the pronoun and the 
 conjunction were written in the same way (dasz or dz) till the fifteenth century. 
 Since the beginning of the fifteenth century, the pronoun has been used almost 
 entirely in its present form (baS). The form of the conjunction, however, wav- 
 ered between b«§, b«5, bj, and baft until the end of the seventeenth century. 
 Since that time the last form (bog) has been universally employed. 
 
108 teachek's companion. 
 
 2. Utigead)tet (and o'^ngcftdjtet) is formed by adding the negation prefix ims to 
 the past participle gca(I)tet (=regarded), from the verb ad)ten (=io regard). 
 
 3. 3t>&cffcu (also written inbc^) was formerly written in two separate words 
 \in dea, by Luther). In this word, beffcn is to be considered the genitive oftho 
 demonstrative pronoun used adverbially. The entire compotind word iiit cff.'ii 
 is therefore analogous to such expressions as oon fticr, oon to (see § 186). 
 
 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 
 
 § 282. Trom the license -whicli is taken in poetry "with reference to the ar- 
 rangement of words, the order of words in subordinate sentences is often 
 changed. And thus what seems to those who speak the English language to 
 be an unnatural inversion is avoided, and hence, the order of words in German 
 poetry often seems to the English more natural than that in German prose. 
 Eor this very reason, the student of the German language should read prose a 
 long time before reading much poetry, that he became fully permeated with 
 the feeling of the natural order of words in the German language. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 Punctuation Ontct^unltion). 
 
 With German, as with English writers, there is great divergence with refer- 
 ence to punctuation, some writers using so many as to burden the tezt, knd 
 others using so few as often to make the sense obscure. 
 
 Bern. It is interesting, after our present system of punctuation has been fully 
 established, to notice how gradually the different signs of punctuation have 
 been introduced. Many of the earliest German writings had no punctuation 
 at all. In some, however, the period was employed. The period was used by 
 the Old and Middle Gprman poets to mark the end or the middle of the lines 
 of poetry. 
 
 The oldest printed translation of the Bible (1462-1466) contained the period, 
 the colon, and occasionally the hyphen; the second (1466) had the period, 
 colon, hyphen, and interrogation point; the fourth (1470-1478) had the period, 
 hyphen, and occasionally the comma; the seventh (1477) had the period, semi- 
 colon, comma, interrogation point, and hyphen ; the first edition of Luther's 
 translation had the' period, comma, interrogation point, hyphen, and parenthe- 
 sis; in the writings of Sohopf (1626) and Schottel (1663) we find the period, 
 colon, semicolon, comma, hyphen, interrogation point, and exclamation point, 
 including thus all the marks of punctuation which are now used except the 
 dash, and the marks of quotation. 
 
IV. NOTES TO PAET FOURTH. 
 
 I. PEESONAL PROPER NAMES. 
 We give here the derivation of a few pers. proper names of German origin: 
 
 1. aibalbret (contracted to StIOtrt and MlixtSji); Old-German, Adalbert, con- 
 tracted from Adalberaht (from Abdal=^%^ii=:7U)hility, lineage, and perdkf=^bnl- 
 llajit^=:of brilliant lineage). 
 
 2. 3lbcl(icib; 0.-&., Adalkeit (from Adal=Uneage, a,nd heit [heilar]=ia,dLmTit) 
 =qf radiant lineage, 
 
 3. Stiebridj 0.-Gr.,Fridur}h; Goiino, Frithareik {from frithus=%mi(=peace 
 and reiks=^xtld^^i'ich')=rich inpeace, 
 
 4. ©crljatS; O.-G., Kerhart (from her=spear, an(ihart=^<i.xt=^strong)=valiant 
 with the spear, 
 
 5. ©cttrubcj O.-G., Kerdrud (from Icer^spear, and drude [originally signify- 
 ing a heroine], but in Middle and New German a 'witcli)—a heroijie valiant with 
 the spear. 
 
 6. ©ottfricS; O.-G., toq/n«d=(ber) gtiebe mil ©ott (^flt). 
 \. ©otttjotSi O.-G., Cotahard=OiiX) in ®ott fidv! (i|l). 
 
 8. ©ottlieb (or (SJottleifi); O.-G., Cotleip (from Cb(=®ott/ and letp — the past 
 tense oildlan (=h\Ablti—leaoe)=spared by God. 
 
 Rem. The Old-German form Cotleip shows that ©otttte^ is not a translation of 
 the Greek proper name Ttieophihs. {=a friend of Gad). 
 
 9. ^ebmig; O.-G., Haduwic (from flada, the- name of a Teutonic deity, repre- 
 sented as blind, whose oiEoe it was to decide the fortune of war, and wic=battle) 
 ^victorious heroine, 
 
 10. ^ciiirid) ; 0.-Q.,Beimrth (from hdm=^mi, andmfe=retc^)=nc7j in houses. 
 
 11. Hermann; 0.-G.,Sanma»(from/?an=§eer, &iiiMan=^«m)=awarrior. 
 
 12. fiorl ; O.-G., Charal {der charal=man, married man)=ihe manly hero. 
 
 Hem. From the Latin form Carolus have been derived the French (and En- 
 glish) form Charles, the Italian Carlo, and the Spanish Carlos. From Carolus 
 has been formed the feminine name Caroline. 
 
 13. Subtois; Sludwic, Blwduwtc (from hludu=ghry, and wtc— battle) =a glo- 
 rious hero. The Old Franks used the form Chlodowich; this was Latinized into 
 Chlodowius,Lodauwicus,Lodhuvicus; from the last came the Old French Chlovis; 
 Middle-French, ioi/s; and New French (and English), IJiuis. From this last 
 was formed the feminine Louise (English Louisa) and the German guife. 
 
 14. Siegmunb ; O.-G., Sigimund; Old-Burgandian dialect, Sigismundus (from 
 bet ©ieg; O.-G., sjye; <ao\iaii,sigis=:victory, and die mund=protection)=the pro- 
 tector through victory. 
 
110 teacher's companion. 
 
 II. GEOaRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES. 
 
 ■ Geographical proper names in Germany are divided, as to their derivation, 
 into four classes: iflphose of Germanic origin; 2. those of Keltic origin (see 
 § 2, near the bottom of page 218); 3. those of Latin origin ; and, 4., those of 
 Slavic origin. 
 
 1. Examples of geographic^ names of Germanic origin: 
 
 3lad)en ; O.-G., Ahom (dat. pi. of aha=water)^to the waters, in allusion to the 
 mineral springs, which have been known and prized from the earliest times. 
 
 (Sifcnad) {<S\\tXi.=iron; and aci ^0.-G:.,aha\—water)=ircm-^atei: 
 
 3frnnlfiirt {0.-G.,Frcmkanenford=ford of the Franhs. 
 
 S5cr §009 (Dutch for the German %(i^)=lhichet (O.-G., hac, and Dutch, liaag, 
 signify primarily hedge, then enclosure, town, city; compare the English word 
 town, from the Anglo-Saxon tun=enclosure, garden, town. 
 
 ®ct ^orj (Harz Mountains) ; 0.-G-, Hart (the original German word tor forest). 
 
 Znn^btuiC=bridge over the river Inn (compare in English Cambridge). 
 
 SatBtul)e=Charles's retreat (founded by the Markgrave Karl Wilhelm (who 
 died in 1738). 
 
 S&n\ai1>ns=King's mountain. 
 
 Wteaicttbm3=large castle={ii:om mii^el [Old-English, micJi:le]=nmch, great). 
 
 3Iof?nu=a;e< meadow (jati^=wei, and Me tHiit=meadow). 
 
 ®a9 SRicfciigcbirgc (gjiefen and ®cMr3e)=giants' mountains. 
 
 3lo{man=meadow of roses. 
 
 2. Examples of geographical names of Keltic origin : 
 
 !5iie Sllticn {the Alps), derived from the Keltic a/p=io/Vy mmmtain, referring to 
 the whiteness of the snow on their peaks (allied to the Sabine oJpus and Latin 
 albm=white). 
 
 §ott ; the name of a number of places in Germany where salt springs are 
 found, as: •§alle «n bet ©anle, in Prussia; §at(, a city near Innsbruck; |>0ll, 
 a city in Swabia; |iallein (or §allc), a city near Salzburg. 
 
 Bern. The word Hall in the Kymric branch of the Keltic languages signifies 
 salt (see § 28). The workmen in the salt-works of Halle-an-<der-Saale are 
 termed hallaren. They consist of about a hundred and twenty families.' They 
 have their own peculiar customs, costume, and dialect. They are considered 
 descendants of the Kelts, who formerly extended their dominion as far to the ' 
 east as to this city (§ 2). 
 
 ®iinlird)cn (I>unkirk)=church on the Downs (see page 74 in the Teacher's 
 Companion). 
 
 3. Examples of geographical proper names of Slavic origin : 
 ^otiiam=under the oaks. | Siitcrbogt^iie glory of God. 
 
 i. Examples of geographical proper names of Latin origin : 
 
 9lHg9I>urfl,fromAugustaVindelioorum. 
 Soblens, from Confluentes. 
 £6In, from Colonia Agrippina. 
 
 3niincl)en, from Monaohus. 
 Sticft, from Tergeste.' 
 3Bicn, from Vindobona. 
 
COMFORT'S 
 
 dERMAl^ SERIES. 
 
 A GERMAN COURSE, adapted to Use in Colleges, Acad- 
 emies, and High- Schools. By George F. Comfort, A.M., 
 Professor of Modern Languages and Esthetics in Allegha- 
 ny College, Pa. i2mo, Cloth or Half Leather, $2 00. 
 
 A TEACHER'S COMPANION TO COMFORT'S GER- 
 MAN COURSE. By George F. Comfort, A.M. i2mo. 
 Cloth. Cyusf Ready.) 
 
 A GERMAN READER. By George F. Comfort, A.M. 
 i2mo, Cloth. (In Press.) 
 
 A MANUAL OF GERMAN CONVERSATION. By Geo. 
 F. Comfort, A.M. izmo, Cloth. (In Press.) 
 
COMFORT'S GERMAN COURSE. 
 
 In preparing this German Course, it has been the aim of the author to in- 
 corporate the most advanced views and principles of linguistic instruction, as 
 held by the best writers upon philology, and the best practical educators in 
 Europe and America. Especial preference has been given to those features 
 of amroved works for the study of modern languages which, in Europe more 
 especially, have stood the test of practical use. A few other features have 
 also been introduced which have been adopted with eminent success by the 
 most able professors of modern language in their personal instruction, but 
 which have not heretofore found their way into text-books. The book is in- 
 tended for the use of those who are commencing the study of the German 
 language. 
 
 The work has elicited, with others, the following expressions : 
 
 From Eev. William Nast, D.D., EAiUyr of Christian Apologist^ and President of GeV' 
 man Wallace Collegej Berea, Ohio. 
 
 " The study of the German language is finding its proper place in the regular course 
 of schools of every grade. Among the text-books which have lately been published 
 to facilitate the study of this important and Bomewhat difficult language, Prof. Com- 
 fort's ' German Course ' takes a high rank. The author, although not a German by 
 birth, has proved himself fully equal to the task he has undertaken ; and one who 
 mastered the German language by his own efforts may be presumed to be better 
 qualified to write a Grammar of that language for the English student than one to 
 whom the German is vernacular. 
 
 " The chief requisite for a practical Grammar of a living language is fully met by 
 Prof. Comfort. The scholar is not needlessly burdened with theory, but is taught, 
 by well-chosen exercises and examples, at the very start, to make practical efforts 
 himself. We fully agree in this respect with the principles so clearly laid dovra in 
 the introduction. Only thus can the scholar be guarded against parrot-like recita- 
 tions, and be enabled to learn to think in the foreign language. 
 
 "The author begins with lessons on pronunciation, and gradually— not too hur- 
 riedly nor with unnecessary delay, but in a systematic manner — ^he leads the student 
 into the different classes of words and their uses, giving a better selection than we 
 have seen In other grammars of those words that are most needed. The general out- 
 lines of the language, which have been given in Part First, are in the Second Part fill- 
 ed out, illustrated, and applied by conversations on the various practical topics of 
 daily life. The choice and treatment of these topics deserve the highest praise, and 
 any one who will apply himself in earnest can not fail soon to learn to speak on mat- 
 ters of general conversation. The Third Part gives a systematic review of the whole 
 language, explaining those points which in the First Part were intentionally and 
 properly not touched. 
 
 " The ' Teacher's Companion,' of which we have only seen one proof-sheet, will no 
 doubt be found a needful appendix for those teachers to whom the German language 
 is not vernacular. 
 
 "We are confident that Prof. Comfort's 'German Course' will introduce a more 
 practical and, at the same time, a truly philosophical method of studying a language 
 than which no other deserves more to be studied. 
 
 " The typographical execution of the work is, as in all the works that come fl'om 
 the press of the Harpers, very fine, and we have detected scarcely any typographical 
 errors." 
 
Comforfs German Course. 
 
 From Prof. Fbiedeioh Stengel, New York. 
 
 "After a careful examination of the 'German Course,' I venture to say that it 
 rises above the common mechanism of modern text-books, where all grammatical 
 knowledge is too often merged into mere routine, or where, from the quantity of 
 rules and exceptions, the student never arrives at the proper use of a foreign language 
 at all. 
 
 "This method is well calculated to introduce the pupil gradually to the difficulties 
 of the language ; and the clear and logical mode of arrangement contributes to facili- 
 tate study to such a degree that, if the instructor follows the practical hints given in 
 the * Teacher's Companion to the German Course,' the pupil, with a little perseverance, 
 will soon be able to read our German authors and write and speak with propriety. 
 ■ "Much information is "given illustrative of the peculiarities of modem phraseology 
 and familiar conversations, and there are valuable observations to show the gram- 
 matical and historical connection between the Euglish and German languages, even 
 linking them with Sanscrit. 
 
 "The most difficult part of the language— the declension, the derivations and com- 
 position of words, and the syntax— Is most successfully treated. The examples are 
 the very best— partly original, partly taken from our best authors. 
 
 "I was especially impressed with the degree to which it has succeeded in solving 
 one great problem in instruction, namely, how to take hold of the true philosophical 
 spirit of our language and present it clearly to English comprehension— a point in 
 which the student must be farther assisted by the history of the German language 
 (Part III.) in English. 
 
 "A correct table of moneys, weights, and measures will be welcomed by many. 
 
 "Last, not least, the print is very clear and distinct, the whole book of a conve- 
 nient size, and the price unusually moderate. Upon the whole, it is the most com- 
 plete course I ever met with, and I shall not hesitate to use and introduce it as occa- 
 sion may offer. I am confident this great work will be crowned with success." 
 
 From Prof. F. L. O. Roeheig, formerly Director of the Polyglot Bureau, Neiv York, and 
 now Professor in Cornell University. 
 
 "After a careful examination of Prof. Comfort's work, I hasten to express to you 
 my high appreciation of its merits. This being the first German Grammar in the En- 
 glish language that stands on the solid foundation of true and scientific philology, its 
 appearance ought to be hailed with delight by every fair critic. 
 
 "The Germans can now be proud of having our beloved mother tongue presented 
 to the American public in a worthy form. 
 
 "The introductory lessons are remarkable for the lucid and practical manner in 
 which the elements of the language are there unfolded. 
 
 "The idiomatic accuracy of the German exercises is one of the most striking fea- 
 tures of this excellent work." 
 
 Frorm, Gen. Franz Sigel. 
 
 "I have with some care perused the new English-German Grammar of Prof. Com- 
 fort, and think it my duty to write these few lines as an appreciation of the method 
 applied in the book. Such a Grammar and compendium is an excellent addition to 
 what we possess in this line of literature, and undoubtedly will find its way into our 
 English and German American schools where the German language has been made a 
 branch of study. It is 'short, sharp, and decisive,' and gives high proof of the thor- 
 ough and comprehensive mind of its author." 
 
 From B. W. Bwigiit, Ph.D., Vice-President American Philological Association. 
 "I have examined with care the 'German Course.' Having taught German for 
 twenty-five years, I have used every one of the manuals of instruction in that noble 
 language, and have found them each marked with decided faults— some in being too 
 minute, complicated, and voluminous, and others in being quite too general and 
 vague. Prof. Comfort's course is happily free from these faults, and is scholarly, 
 practical, and well adapted to the real wants of those who wish to learn the German 
 language rapidly and well." 
 
Comfort's Gerinan Course. 
 
 From Eugene Von Nokpiiadsen, A.M., LL.B., late Professor of Modem Languages, 
 New York. 
 
 "•It was with great pleasure that I perused carefully a ' German Course * published 
 by Harper & Brothers. Without criticising the former works on the subject, I must 
 acknowledge the great superiority of this iu the mode of introducing this difficult 
 language to students. It would be a pleasure to me to analyze all I find to praise, 
 but it would be too lengthy. I will content myself with mentioning the, mode of 
 pronunciation and accentuation of syllables, the way of introducing the declensions, 
 the way prepositions and the cases which govern them are explained, and the classi- 
 fication of verbs. 
 
 " I have no doubt that an ordinary good scholar may, alone, with the help of this 
 book, learn enough of the German language to enable him to enjoy its beauties. 
 
 " Thanking the author, as a German, for his interest in my mother tongue, I wish 
 the work an extensive circulation." 
 
 Frmn J. C. BnonFDEunEK, Professor of Languages, College Sill, Ohio. 
 "After using it two terms in the Farmers' College and Ohio Female College, it will 
 be proper to give a candid estimate of the value of Comfort's German Course to my 
 classes. Of the many text-books with which I am acquainted, I consider Comfort's the 
 best for the clearness of statement and arrangement. The value of the book is en- 
 hanced not only by the excellent paper and type, but also by the judicious exercises, 
 which contain interesting facts of history, literature, geography, morals, and aesthet- 
 ics. The best recommendation of the work is, that it has bravely stood the test of 
 the schoolroom and class-examination. I wish every instructor of German could see 
 this book to compare it with others and judge for himself." 
 
 From Prof, A. F. Beehdolt, Mercershurg College, Franklin Co., Pa. 
 " The work commends Itself to all students of German. Teachers of German have 
 long felt the want of a Grammar embodying, as this does, at the same time, the gram- 
 matical forms and the history and development of such forms. The tables of the 
 Comparison of Words iu the Indo-European languages are of incalculable benefit to 
 the student." 
 
 From Prof. A, B. Hyde, Instructor in Modern Languages, A lleghcmy College, Meadville, Pa. 
 "Prof, Comfort's excellent 'German Course' has been used for a year in our col- 
 lege. Our impartial judgment is completely in its favor. Gentlemen in onr city who 
 have studied In Germany, and others, native Germans of taste and culture, unite with 
 us in approval and employment of the book." 
 
 From Prof. T. W. Tobet, Paducah, Ky. 
 "The complete 'German Course' by G. F. Comfort, A,M., is a valuable work. It 
 is well arranged, neatly printed, and presents the facts in such a manner that the 
 learner can advance rapidly and easily. It only needs the trial of the schoolroom to 
 be highly appreciated by teachers of the German language," 
 
 From Dr. H. Von Holst, New York. 
 "It gives me satisfaction- to state, after a pretty careful examination of Prof. G, F. 
 Comfort's 'German Course,' that I think the book may conscientiously be recom- 
 mended to every teacher. It will be found practical as well as reliable," 
 
 From Prof, J, C, Van Eensouoten, Wesleyan University, Middletown, Conn. 
 "We have been using the advance sheets of Comfort's 'German Course' during the 
 present term. I have found it the best text-book in the German language I have ever 
 used," 
 
 FroTn Dr. J. B. Fettling, Professor of Comparative Philology, University of Wisconsin, 
 
 Madison. 
 " I consider Prof. Comfort's ' German Course ' a very good book, and I will intro- 
 duce it here at the next change of our text-books." 
 
Comfort's German Course. 
 
 From Dr. Geoko W. Ebdmaijn, Teachtr of German in New York. 
 *'0u October 7 of last year I addressed-a few lines to the publishers congratulating 
 them on the publication of Comfort's ' German Course,' as it was a most excellent in- 
 troduction into my native language. At that time I had, of course, examined the 
 book carefully, and'in consequence thereof had introduced it into the schools I am 
 connected with. After a practical use of more than six months, having gone entirely 
 through the book with some of my private scholars, my flist judgment has not only 
 been fully justified, but I have found it answerable and useful far beyond my expect- 
 ations. This is not the place to enter into the merits of the book specifically ; but so 
 much I will say, that I shall use Comfort's ' German "Course ' exclusively hereafter." 
 
 From F. CnBisxiAMEn, County Superintendent, Abingdon, Knox Co., III. 
 " The specimen sheets of Comfort's ' German Course ' present themselves very fa- 
 vorably. After a due examination I conclude the course is easy, progressive, and com- 
 prehensible, and just the thing for our American students. Being a German by birth 
 and education, I fully appreciate the work, and shall with pleasure recommend it to 
 our public institutions." 
 
 From Prof, Josepu E. King, Principal of Fort Edward Tnstitute, N. Y. 
 "Having examined the advance sheets of • Comfort's German Course,' we resolved 
 to adopt it. The past term we had a class of sixteen. The book has more than real- 
 ized our expectations." ' 
 
 From Prof. Osoae Howes, A.M., ofShurtlef College, Upper Alton, HI. 
 "I take this opportunity of saying that I am much pleased with the specimen 
 pages of Prof. Comfort's ' German Course,' and think I shall like it better than any 
 other." 
 
 From G. F. BEnniHGEB, Assistant Professor of German, Cornell University. 
 "We propose introducing Comfort's ' German Course ' into all our classes next tri- 
 mester, numbering one hundred and fifty students." 
 
 From Prof. L. G. Marshall, Harrison Academy, CyntMana, Ky. 
 
 "It seems to me certainly the most scholarly production on the subject in our 
 country, and last, if not least, it is the most beautifully printed." « 
 From Mrs. A. C. KmonT, Wilbraliam, Mass. 
 
 "I have used the 'German Course' two terms, and am well pleased with it. I pre- 
 fer it to any Grammar I have yet used." 
 
 Frrnn the College Cowrant. 
 
 " The treatment is, In general, full enough for all practical purposes. The rules are 
 clear, concise, well-expressed, and at the same time comprehensive of the whole prin- 
 ciple. There is no useless verbiage. The chief truths are drawn ont into due promi- 
 nence, and not obscured by a mass of details; The treatment of word derivation, of 
 the uses of the Potential Verbs, of Prepositions and Conjunctions, is most excellent. 
 The introduction upon the development and characteristics of the German language 
 will prove of interest to the advanced student. • * * The 'German Course' is adapt- 
 ed to all tastes. We have here the old style of theoretical Grammar and also the 
 new practical methods that have been devised for teaching language. Sometimes 
 one is more practicable than the other, and, as they are kept distinct in this work, 
 they can be used separately. The typographical arrangement throughout deserves 
 to be commended. The German words treated of stand out in full, broad-face type, 
 so as to catch the eye at once." 
 
 Published by HARPER & BROTHERS, New York. 
 
 Sat! by mail, fasiage prepaid, to any part of the United States, on receipt 0/ price. 
 
HAVEN'S RHETORIC. 
 
 RHETORIC : a Text-Book, designed for Use in Schools and 
 Colleges, and for Private Study.. By E. O. Haven, D.D., 
 LL.D., President of the Northwestern University, Evans- 
 ton, 111. 382 pages, i2mo, Cloth, $1 50. 
 
 Extract from JV^ace.— This work may be said to have grown, rather than to have, 
 been written for the purpose of making a book. Haying nsed in the class-room, in 
 academy and college, many of the text-books on Ehetoric, ancient and modern, for- 
 eign and American, and-having Instructed some classes without using a text-book, I 
 have been most satisfied with the result when the method herein presented has been 
 pursued. This book is therefore the result of actual experiment. 
 
 Though this work was published but a few weeks ago, tlie demand for it has been 
 80 great as to require the issuing of a third editimi. This is due to the fact that Dr. 
 Haven has placed his subject within the comprehension Of pupils, and has thus re- 
 lieved tutors from the necessity of explaining most of the text, as is generally neces- 
 sary while using a text-book on Bhetoric. 
 
 From Eev. Dr. Pattek, President of the Boston Theological Seminary. 
 
 " I was so much pleased with its simple, comprehensive, and suggestive method of 
 developing the subject, that I at once introduced it as a tea|fhook in onr preparatory 
 class. Its lucid style, freshness of illustration, natural arrangement, and brief and 
 pointed manner of discussion make it just the book we need." 
 
 From Prof, Homes B. Spkague, of the Chair of English Literature, RTictoriCf and OrOf 
 tory, Cornell University, N. F. 
 "An admirable work ; clear, straightforward, and practical." 
 
 From Wm. Peebton Jonssou, A.M., Professor of History and English Literature, 
 Washington College, Va. 
 "It is a good elementary book, and has the merit of presenting many new illustra- 
 tions, instead of the hackneyed quotations usually found in compilations." 
 
 From MoBEB Coit Tylee, M.A., Professor of Rhetoric and English Literature, Univer- 
 sity of Michigan, 
 
 "I welcome the book heartily, and shall adopt it in my classes here. 
 
 " Dr. Haven seems to me to have aimed to produce a useful book rather than a 
 Bhowy one. Too many who deal with the subject are only theoretical rhetoricians ; 
 on every page of Dr. Haven^ book I find the good effects of his being also a practical 
 rhetorician. Hitting the happy mean between the excess and the total r^cction of 
 the old technical phraseology, he has given to ns a series of just such sensible, sug- 
 gestive, and helpful talks about writing and speaking the English language as one 
 would expect from a man of his great experience as a speaker, writer, and teacher. 
 This, afterall, is precisely what American students need. 
 
 " Upon the whole, the book has these great merits : it is a growth, and not a man- 
 ufacture J it is fresh, sincere, lively, clear, practical ; finally, instead of being, like so 
 many text-books on this subject, dry and deadening, it will prove throughout posi- 
 tively Interesting to the student— it will stimulate, cheer, and guide him." 
 
 Harper & Brothers will send the ahove work ly Tjiail, postage prepaid, to any 
 part of the United States, on receipt of $i so. 
 
DALJON'S 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY AND HYGENE. 
 
 TREATISE ON PHYSIOLOGY AND HYGIENE, for 
 Schools, Families, and Colleges. By J.' C. Dalton, M.D., 
 Professor of Physiology in the College of Physicians and 
 Surgeons, New York. With Illustrations. 398 pages, Cloth 
 or Half Leather, $1 50. 
 
 The most important, and, at the same time, the mosSKiteresting facts of 
 Physiology may be tauglit with success in a perfectly simple manner, pro- 
 vided they be given in their proper order ^ and in their natural relation to each 
 other. It has been the aim of the present work to accomplish this object. 
 
 We append a partial list of Schools, Colleges, &c., which have already 
 adopted Ualton's Physiology. By this it will be seen that the work is used 
 in schools of widely differing grades : this is due to the fact that while it con- 
 tains a sufficiency of matter to satisfy the requirements of the College course, 
 it is written in language within the comprehension of the children who com- 
 pose the higher classes of our Common Schools. 
 
 Harvard University, Mass. 
 Virginia University, Va. 
 Missouri University, Mo. 
 Vermont University, Vt. 
 University of Notre Dame, Ind. 
 Cornell University, N. Y. 
 University of Kansas. 
 Eutgers College, N. J. 
 Princeton College, Ky. 
 Westminster College, Mo. 
 Wilberforce University, O. 
 McKendree College, 111. 
 Iowa State Agricultural College. 
 N. Y. Scientific School, Peekskill. 
 Penacook Academy, N. H. 
 Danville Academy, Pa. 
 Monroe Academy, N. Y. 
 High School, Lowell, Mass. 
 Free Collegiate Inst., Richmond, Va. 
 High School, Columbus, O. 
 Johnstown Academy, N. Y. 
 High School, Louisville, Ky. 
 Lebanon Seminary, HI. 
 Concordville Seminary, Pa. 
 St. Alban's Academy, Vt. 
 Mount Morris Academy, N. Y. 
 Literary Institute, Uniontown, Md. 
 High School, Maford, Mass. 
 
 Honesdale Seminary, Pa. 
 Academic School, Wadesboro, N. C. 
 High School, Saco, Me. 
 Fergusonville Academy, N. Y. 
 Bristol Academy, Mass. 
 High School, Galesburg, 111. 
 Cedar HiU Academy, Pa. 
 State Normal School, Bridgew'r, Mass. 
 " Baltimore, Md. 
 
 " Platteville, Wis. 
 
 " Farmiugton, Me. 
 
 " Potsdam, N.Y. 
 
 " Cortland Village, 
 
 N.Y. 
 Public Schools, Manchester, Mass. 
 " Brooklyn, N. Y. 
 
 " Plymouth, N. H. 
 
 " New Bedford, Mass. 
 
 " Ann Arbor, Mich. 
 
 " Fairhaven, Mass. 
 
 " Burlington, Vt. 
 
 " Iowa City, Iowa. 
 
 " Bridgewater, Mass. 
 
 " Winthrop, Me. 
 
 " Mt. Vernon, 111. 
 
 " Maiden, Mass. 
 
 " New York City, 
 
 and many others. 
 
 ■ Harper & Brothers wiU sendih^ ahove work hy mail, postage jbre^aidj to any 
 part o/tke United States^ on receipt of $t so. 
 
WADI^LL'S 
 
 GEEEK GMMMAPi FOR BEGINNERS. 
 
 A GREEK GRAMMAR FOR BEGINNERS. By William 
 Henry Waddell, A.M., Professor of Ancient Languages in 
 the University of Georgia. 12 mo, Flexible Cloth, $1 00. 
 
 Extract from frefA— This book is an attempt to be precisely what its name im- 
 ports—nothing moreJ%ia nothing less. It is a " Greek" Grammar for Beginners." 
 The author has stndionsly avoided the insertion of a solitary word not absolutely 
 essential. Such a book has been, for many years, a great desideratum — a book which 
 shall contain no notes, remarks, observations, "fine print," in short, nothing to be 
 marked by a teacher for omission, but only essential and elementary principles and 
 paradigms, which are to be thoroughly memorized by the pupil, without any excep- 
 tion whatever. The Grammar is designed to be committed to memory, from cover 
 to cover, the first time the pupil goes over it. It is not, therefore, a Grammar of ref- 
 erence—the world is full of such. It is a schoolboy's book, and intended for a school- 
 boy's use. Whether the author has succeeded in accomplishing his design, 'and giv- 
 ing expression to his many years' experience in teaching Greek, he leaves the public 
 to decide. 
 
 SMITH'S SMALLER HISTORIES. 
 
 By William Smith, LL.D., Editor of the " Dictionary of Greek 
 and Roman Antiquities,'.' " Principia Latina," and " History 
 of Greece." Illustrated. i6mo, Cloth, ^i 00 each. 
 
 The Series consists of the following books : 
 
 Smith's Smaller Greece, 248 pages. 
 Smith's Smaller Rome, 365 pages. 
 Smith's Smaller England, 357 pages. 
 
 The authot's name Is a sufficient guarantee of the accuracy of the matter 
 contained in the books, while the quantity of matter has been so regulated as 
 to enable the pupils to read either work in a single term. In each book the 
 " Table of Contents " is so arranged as to suggest appropriate questions. 
 
 ' Harper & Brothers will send either of the aliove hoajis l>y .mailt postage pre^aid^ 
 to any part of the United States, on receipt of the price. 
 
THE ONItT PROQRESSIVE AND GHADED SERIES 
 ON THE NATURAL SCIENCES. 
 
 By Dr. Worthington Hooker, 
 
 ZaU Professor of Medicine in Yale College. 
 ' THE CHILD'S BOOK OF NATURE. For the Use of 
 
 Families and Schools ; intended to aid Mothers and Teachers in 
 Training Children in the Observation of Nature. In Three Parts. 
 Parti. Plants; Part II. Animals; Part III. Air, Water, Heat, 
 Light, &c Illustrated by Engravings. The Three Parts complete 
 in One Volume, Small 4to, Cloth, jf 2 00 ; Sepiirately, Cloth, go 
 cents each. 
 
 FIRST BOOK IN CHEMISTRY. For the Use of 
 
 Schools and Families. Illustrated by Engravings. Square 4to, 
 Cloth, go cents. 
 
 NATURAL HISTORY. For the Use of Schools and Fam- 
 ilies. Illustrated by nearly 300 Engravings. lamo. Cloth, jSi 50. 
 
 NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. (Science for the School 
 
 and Family, Part I.) Illustrated by nearly 300 Engravings. i2mo. 
 Cloth, $\ 50. 
 
 CHEMISTRY. (Science for the School and Family, Part 
 II.) Illustrated by numerous Engravings. i2mo. Cloth, $1 50. 
 
 MINERALOGY AND GEOLOGY. (Science for the 
 
 School and Family, Part .III.) Illustrated by numerous Engrav- 
 ings. i2mo, Cloth, jSi 50. 
 
 These Text-Books on the Natural Sciences, during the several years in which they 
 have been before the public, have been thoroughly tested in some of the best schools 
 in the country, with the most happy and satisfactory results. By them it has been 
 conclusively proved that school-children are never too young to be interested and 
 benefited by lessons in the Natural Sciences, and that the main obstacle. which has 
 heretofore prevented an acquirement of such information has been the lack of suitably- 
 prepared books. Dr. Hooker has tiilly supplied this need by prefacing his higher 
 books, suitable for high schools and academies; with several^ elementary works, the 
 matter of which is fully within the comprehension of children six or eight years of age, 
 and is, in common with that of the higher books, given in such an attractive and enter- 
 taining manner as to uniformly engage the interest of the pupil. 
 
 The general objection that is urged against Jhe teaching of the Natural Sciences in 
 common schools is, that the teachers of these schools are not competent, as a general 
 thing, to give instructions on these subjects. With Dr. Hooker's books, however, no 
 teacher of ordinary ability can have any excuse for being unable to properly and under- 
 standingly instruct the classes. 
 
 1^" Haeper^& Beotheks ■uiill s.end any of the above worlis ly mail, postage 
 paid, to any part of tits United States, on receipt of the price.. ^ 
 
Students' Histories. 
 
 THE STUDENT'S HISTORY OF GREECE: A History of Greece 
 
 from the Earliest Times to the Roman Conquest; With Supplementary Chapters 
 on the History of Literature and Art. By William Smith, LL.D., Editor of 
 the "Classical Dictionary," "Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities," &c. 
 Revised, with an Appendix, by Plrof. George W. Greene, A.M. Engravings. 
 Large i2mo, 724 pages, Cloth, $2 00. 
 
 fl[^^ A SMALLER HISTORY OF GREECE: The above Work abridged ' 
 for Younger Students and Common Schools. Engravings. i6mo, 272 pages, 
 Cloth, $1 00. 
 
 THE STUDENT'S HISTORY OF ROME : A History of Rome 
 
 from the Earliest Times to the Establishment of the Empire. With Chapters on 
 the History of Literature and Art. By Henry G. Liddell, D.D., Dean of 
 Christ Church, Oxford. Engravings. Large i2mo, 778 pages. Cloth, $2 00. 
 
 lE^^ A SMALLER HISTORY OF ROME from the Earliest Times to the 
 Establishment of the Empire. By William Smith, LL.D. With a Con- 
 tinuation to A.D. 476. By Eugene Lawrence, A.M. Engravings. i6mo. 
 Cloth, ^i 00. 
 
 THE STUDENT'S GIBBON : The History of the Decline and Fall 
 of the Roman Empire. By Edward Gibbon. Abridged. Incorporating the 
 Researches of Recent Cornmentators. By William Smith, LL.D. Engrav- 
 ings. Large i2mo, 706 pages. Cloth, $2 00. 
 
 THE STUDENT'S HUME : A History of England from the Earli- 
 est Times to the Revolution in 1688. By David Hume. Abridged. Incorpo- 
 rating the Corrections and Researches of Recent Historians, and continue^ down 
 to the Year 1858. Engravings. Large lamo, S06 pages, Cloth, $2 00. 
 
 IB^" A SMALLER HISTORY OF ENGLAND from the Eariiest Times 
 to the Year 1862. Edited by William Smith, LL.D. Engravings. 
 i6mo, Cloth, $1 00. 
 
 THE STUDENT'S HISTORY OF FRANCE: A History of France 
 
 from the Earliest Times to the Establishment of the Second Empire m 1852. En- 
 gravings. Large i2mo, 742 pages, Cloth, $2 00. 
 
 THE STUDENT'S QUEENS OF ENGLAND : Lives of the Queens 
 of England. From the Norman Conquest. By Agnes Strickland. Abridged 
 by the Author. Revised and Edited by Caroline G. Parker. Large i2mo, 
 67s pages, Cloth, $2 00. 
 
 THE STUDENT'S ' OLD TESTAMENT HISTORY. From the 
 Creation to the Return of the Jews from Captivity. With an Appendix, contain- 
 ing an Introduction to 'the Books of the Old Testament. Edited by William 
 Smith, LL.D. Engravings. Large i2mo, 715 pages, Cloth, $2 00. 
 
 THE STUDENT'S NEW TESTAMENT HISTORY. With an 
 
 Introduction, connecting the Old and New Testaments. Edited by William 
 Smith, LL.D. With Maps and Wobdcuts. Large ismo, 780 pages, $2 00. 
 
 Published by HARPER & BROTHERS, New York. 
 
 Harper & Brothers wiil send any of the above works By ^nail^ postage 
 paid, to any part of tJte United States^ on receipt of the price.